Sony PXW-Z450 Operating instructions

4-693-039-17 (1)
GB
Solid-State Memory Camcorder
Operating Instructions
PXW-Z450 / PXW-Z450KC
Software Version 6.1
© 2016 Sony Corporation
0002
Table of Contents
1. Overview
5. Network Configuration
Name and Function of Parts............................................... 3
Network Functions Supported by the Camcorder...........59
Screen Display...................................................................13
Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN..........................60
Supplied Lens and Viewfinder..........................................20
Connecting to the Internet...............................................63
2. Preparation
Preparing a Power Supply................................................22
Attaching a Viewfinder.....................................................23
Using the Camcorder for the First Time...........................25
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens....................................26
Preparing the Audio Input System...................................27
Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices....................28
Handling SxS Memory Cards............................................29
Transferring Files...............................................................67
Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio.......................71
Streaming High Quality Video..........................................72
Using Wi-Fi Remote Control.............................................73
Configuring from the Web Menu.....................................75
Supported Network Functions and Operating
Limitations................................................................80
6. Clip Operations
Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration Data...........31
Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen.......................81
Using a Media Adaptor.....................................................32
Thumbnail Menu..............................................................87
3. Settings and Adjustments
7. Menu Display and Settings
Format Settings.................................................................33
Setup Menu Organization.................................................88
Expansion of Imaging Dynamic Range............................37
Basic Setup Menu Operations...........................................90
Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance.............38
Editing the User Menu......................................................92
Setting the Electronic Shutter...........................................40
User Menu (Factory Default Configuration).....................94
Setting Auto Iris................................................................41
Operation Menu................................................................95
Adjusting the Audio Level................................................43
Paint Menu......................................................................104
Setting Time Data.............................................................45
Maintenance Menu.........................................................109
4. Shooting
Basic Operations................................................................47
Advanced Operations........................................................49
File Menu.........................................................................119
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches.................121
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Proxy Data.........................................................................54
User Configuration Data..................................................124
Planning Metadata...........................................................56
User Files.........................................................................125
Obtaining Location Information (GPS).............................58
ALL Files..........................................................................126
Scene Files.......................................................................127
Reference Files................................................................128
Lens Files.........................................................................129
Gamma Files...................................................................130
9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting a Remote Control Unit.................................131
Connecting an External Monitor.....................................135
Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer.....................136
Configuring a Shooting and Recording System.............138
Recording External Input Signals...................................141
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Maintenance...................................................................142
Error/Warning System....................................................143
11. Appendix
Messages Displayed During Operation..........................146
Items Saved in User Data................................................152
Special Recording Support by Recording Format..........163
Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings...................................164
Media Recording and Playback Time.............................165
Usage Precautions...........................................................166
Specifications..................................................................168
0003
1. Overview
Name and Function of Parts
5. Battery attachment shoe
Attach a BP-GL95B Battery Pack. Alternatively, you
can attach an AC-DN10A AC Adaptor to operate
the camcorder from an AC power supply.
Power Supply
6
“Preparing a Power Supply” (page 22)
[Note]
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the
camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the BP-GL95B
Battery Pack.
6. Camera adaptor connector
Enables connection of a CA-TX70/FB70 HD Camera
Adaptor. To connect an adaptor, remove the
cover.
[Note]
Not supported in the return video display by the camcorder.
1
2
1. LIGHT (video light) switch
Determines how a video light connected to the
LIGHT connector (page 4) is turned on and off.
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video light
is in the on position, the video light is turned
on automatically while the camcorder is
recording.
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off
manually, using its own switch.
[Note]
When the camcorder is set for recording in Picture Cache Rec
mode, it is not possible to turn on the light before operation
to start recording is carried out (or while data is being stored
in memory).
3 4
5
2. POWER switch
Turns the main power supply on () and off ().
3. DC IN (DC power input) connector (XLR type,
4-pin, male)
4. DC OUT 12V (DC power output) connector
(4-pin, female)
Supplies power for the CBK-DL1 USB Adaptor and
HDVF-L750 Viewfinder (maximum 1.8 A).
0004
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
ˎˎ When connecting or disconnecting an interface cable to
this connector, power off the camcorder first.
Accessory Attachments
1
2
Controls Near the Lens
8. Lens mount securing rubber
After locking the lens in position using the lens
locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of
the two projections. This fixes the lens mount,
preventing it from coming loose.
3 45
9. Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
(page 23)
10. Attachment for optional microphone holder
(page 27) and attachment for supplied
guard (page 60)
9
6
7
8
10
11
3
11. LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin, female)
(page 28)
12. Shoulder pad (page 28)
13. Lens cable clamp
Clamps the lens cable.
14. MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V) connector
(XLR type, 5-pin, female)
Connect a stereo microphone to this connector.
The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.
15. LENS connector (12-pin) (page 26)
[Note]
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this
connector, power off the camcorder first.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1. Wireless receiver insertion slot (page 27)
“Attaching a Wireless Receiver” (page 27)
2. Shoulder strap fitting (page 28)
3. Accessory shoe (page 28)
4. Viewfinder front-to-back positioning lever
(page 23)
5. Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
(page 23)
6. Viewfinder attachment shoe (page 23)
7. VF (viewfinder) connectors (26-pin,
rectangular and 20-pin, round)
The analog interface connector (20-pin) is for
connection of an HDVF series viewfinder, and
the digital interface connector (26-pin) is for
connection of a CBK-VF02 HD viewfinder.
Connect a viewfinder connection cable to the
connector compatible with the viewfinder being
used.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Do not connect viewfinders to both connectors at the
same time.
16. Tripod mount
When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the
tripod adaptor (optional).
17. Lens mount (special bayonet mount)
(page 26)
18. Lens locking lever (page 26)
19. Lens mount cap
Remove by pushing the lens locking lever up.
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for
protection from dust.
1
4
5
2
6
1. REC START (recording start) button
Press to start recording. Press it again to stop
recording. The operation is the same as that of the
VTR button on the lens.
2. SHUTTER switch
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push to
SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter
mode setting. When this switch is operated, the
new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for
about three seconds.
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 40)
0005
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
[Note]
If Flash Band Reduce is On, setting the SHUTTER switch
to ON turns off the Flash Band Reduce function and the
FBR indicator disappears from the viewfinder screen.
Subsequently, setting the SHUTTER switch to OFF turns
on the Flash Band Reduce function and the FBR indicator
reappears on the viewfinder screen.
3. FILTER knob
Switches between four ND filters built into this
camcorder.
When this selector is used, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three
seconds.
FILTER knob
setting
ND filter
1
CLEAR
2
1/4 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/4)
3
1/16 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/16)
4
1/64 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/64)
You can change a Maintenance menu setting so
that different white balance settings can be stored
for different FILTER knob positions. This allows you
to automatically obtain optimum white balance
for the current shooting conditions in linkage with
the filter selection.
“Adjusting the White Balance” (page 38)
4. MENU knob (page 90)
5. AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black
balance adjustment) switch
Activates the automatic white/black balance
adjustment functions.
WHITE: Adjust the white balance automatically.
If the WHITE BAL switch (page 6) is set
to A or B, the white balance setting is stored
in the corresponding memory. If the WHITE
BAL switch is set to PRST, the automatic
white balance adjustment function does not
operate.
BLACK: Adjust the black set and black balance
automatically.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when
the ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) function is
operating.
If you push the switch to the WHITE side once
more during the automatic white balance
adjustment, the adjustment is canceled and
the white balance setting returns to the original
setting.
If you push the switch to the BLACK side once
more during the automatic black balance
adjustment, the adjustment is canceled and
the black balance setting returns to the original
setting.
LCD Monitor Side (1)
1
2
3
4
5
6. MIC (microphone) LEVEL knob (page 43)
6
10 12
789
11
12
13
14
0006
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
1. ASSIGN. (assignable) 1/2/3 switches
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
(page 121).
The ASSIGN. 1/3 switches are provided with an
indicator to show whether a function is assigned
to the switch (ON) or not (OFF).
5. MONITOR (audio monitor selection) switches
By means of combinations of the two switches,
you can select audio that you want to hear
through the built-in speaker or earphones.
2. ONLINE button
When network client mode or the streaming
function is assigned to this button, press and hold
until the indicator is lit orange. Then, press the
button again, turning the indicator blue, to enable
network client mode or the streaming function.
To exit the enabled function, press and hold the
button until the indicator turns off.
The button can also be used as an assignable
switch when assigned with functions other than
those above (page 122).
Upper switch
Audio output
CH-1/CH-3
Channel 1 audio
MIX
Channels 1 and 2 mixed audio
(stereo)a)
CH-2/CH-4
Channel 2 audio
3. ALARM (alarm tone volume adjustment)
knob
Controls the volume of the warning tone that
is output via the built-in speaker or optional
earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.
However, if Maintenance >Audio >Min Alarm
Volume in the setup menu is set to [Set], the alarm
tone is audible even when this volume control is at
the minimum position.
ALARM
Minimum
Maximum
4. MONITOR (monitor volume adjustment)
knob
Controls the volume of the sound other than the
warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker
or earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.
When the lower switch is set to CH-1/2
When the lower switch is set to CH-3/4
Upper switch
Audio output
CH-1/CH-3
Channel 3 audio
MIX
Channels 3 and 4 mixed audio
(stereo)a)
CH-2/CH-4
Channel 4 audio
a)By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE jack,
you can hear the audio in stereo. (Maintenance >Audio
>Headphone Out in the setup menu must be set to
Stereo.)
6. ASSIGN. (assignable) 0 switch
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
(page 121).
Off is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory.
This is a momentary type switch. Each press of the
switch turns the function assigned to this switch
on or off.
7. GAIN switch
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match
the lighting conditions during shooting. The gain
values corresponding to the L, M, and H settings
can be selected using Operation >Gain Switch in
the setup menu (page 99) (factory settings are
L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB).
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three
seconds.
8. OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic
contrast control) switch
Switches the video signal output from the camera
module, between the following two.
BARS: Output the color bar signal.
CAM: Output the video signal being shot. When
this is selected, you can switch DCC 1) on and
off.
1)DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very bright
background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject,
objects in the background will be lost in the glare. The
DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore
much of the lost detail. It is particularly effective for
shooting in the following cases.
ˎˎ Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day
ˎˎ Shooting a subject indoors, against a background
through a window
ˎˎ Any high contrast scene
9. WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch
Controls adjustment of the white balance.
PRST: Adjust the color temperature to the preset
value (the factory default setting: 3200K). Use
this setting when you have no time to adjust
the white balance.
A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment
settings already stored in A or B. Push the
AUTO W/B BAL switch (page 5) to the
WHITE position to automatically adjust the
white balance and save the adjustment
settings in memory A or memory B.
B (ATW 1)):When this switch is set to B and
Operation >White Setting >White Switch
<B> is set to [ATW] in the setup menu, ATW is
activated.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even
when ATW is in use.
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about
three seconds.
1)ATW (Auto Tracing White balance): The white balance
of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for
varying lighting conditions.
[Note]
It may not be possible to adjust to the appropriate colors
using ATW, depending on the lighting and subject
conditions.
Examples:
ˎˎ When a single color dominates the subject, such as sky,
sea, ground, or flowers.
ˎˎ When the subject is under a light source of extremely
high or extremely low color temperature.
If execution of automatic tracing by the ATW
function takes an unacceptably long time or only
results in an inadequate effect, then execute the
AWB function.
10. Switch cover
Open this cover to use the MENU ON/OFF switch
or the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch.
11. MENU ON/OFF switch
To use the switch, open the cover.
This switch is used to display the menu on the
viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. Each
time the switch is pushed down, the menu screen
is turned on and off.
The function of this switch is the same as that
of the MENU button in the thumbnail screen
operations section.
[Note]
It is not possible to turn off the menu screen by closing the
cover.
12. MENU CANCEL/PRST (preset) /ESCAPE switch
To use the switch, open the cover.
This switch has different functions depending on
whether or not a menu is displayed.
Use the switch in the following way when the
menu is displayed.
CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this
position after a setting is changed in the
setup menu displays the message to confirm
whether the previous settings are canceled.
Pushing this switch up to this position again
cancels the previous settings.
Pushing this switch up to this position before a
setting is changed in the setup menu or after a
setting change is canceled in the setup menu
displays the message to confirm whether the
setting is reset to the initial value. Pushing
0007
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
this switch up to this position again resets the
settings to the initial value.
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page,
which has a hierarchical structure, is opened.
Each time the switch is pushed to this position,
the page returns to one stage higher in the
hierarchy.
1. Built-in speaker
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E 1) sound
during recording, and playback sound during
playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to
reinforce visual warnings (page 143).
If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack,
the speaker output is suppressed automatically.
LCD Monitor Side (2)
[2]
[1]
7
Use the switch in the following way when the
menu is not displayed.
CANCEL/PRST: Each time this switch is pushed
upward, a window to confirm the menu
settings and status of the camcorder appears
on the viewfinder screen (page 13). The
window consists of several pages, which are
switched each time the switch is pushed
upward.
ESCAPE: To clear the page, push this switch down
to the OFF position.
8
1)E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric.” In E-E mode,
video and audio signals input to the camcorder are
output after passing through internal electric circuits only.
This can be used to check input signals.
9
2. LCD monitor
Displays remaining battery capacity, remaining
media capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on.
It also allows you to check camera and playback
pictures (page 13).
You can adjust the position and angle of the LCD
monitor.
10 11 12
1
2
3
13. UTILITY SD card slot
Insert an SD card for saving camcorder settings.
14. ACCESS indicator
Lights up orange when the SD card is being
accessed.
4
5
3. WARNING indicator
Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs
(page 143).
6
13
14
15
16
17
4. ACCESS indicator
Lights up in blue when data is written to or read
from the recording media.
5. Audio control section (page 9)
6. Thumbnail screen operation section
(page 9)
7. F REV (fast reverse) button and indicator
This plays back at high speed in the reverse
direction. The playback speed changes in the order
×4  ×15  ×24 with each press of the button.
0008
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
The indicator lights during high-speed playback in
the reverse direction.
8. PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
Press this button to view playback video images
using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor.
The indicator lights during playback.
Press this button again during playback to pause,
outputting a still image. At this time the indicator
flashes at a rate of once per second.
Pressing the F REV or F FWD button during
playback or pause starts high speed playback in
the forward or reverse direction.
9. F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator
This plays back at high speed in the forward
direction. The playback speed changes in the order
×4  ×15  ×24 with each press of the button.
The indicator lights during high-speed playback in
the forward direction.
10. PREV (previous) button
This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.
If you press this together with the F REV button,
the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded
clip on the recording media.
If you press this button twice in rapid succession,
the jump is to the first frame of the preceding
clip (or the first frame of the current clip when no
preceding clips exist).
11. STOP button
Press this button to stop playback.
12. NEXT button
This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.
If you press this together with the F FWD button,
the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded
clip on the recording media.
13. DISP SEL (display selection)/EXPAND
(expand function) button
With each press of this button, the display in the
LCD monitor changes as follows.
Display indication
Description
Video with
superimposed
information (CHAR)
The LCD monitor displays
the same text information as
the viewfinder.
Video without
superimposed
information (MONI)
Only the video appears.
Status display
(STATUS)
(page 13)
Counters, warnings, audio
levels, and similar
information appear. No
video image appears.
Switch settings
RESET/RETURN button
operation
DISPLAY switch:
U-BIT
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch:
SET
Reset user bits data a) to
00:00:00:00.
The EXPAND button function will be supported in
a future upgrade.
a)Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the
media, those bits which can be used to record useful
information for the user such as scene number, shooting
place, etc.
14. HOLD (display hold) button
“Setting Time Data” (page 45)
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time
data displayed in the LCD monitor. (The timecode
generator continues running.) Pressing this button
again releases the hold.
For details about the time data display, see page 13.
15. RESET/RETURN button
Resets the value shown in the time data display in
the LCD monitor. According to the settings of the
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch (page 9) and the
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch (page 9), this button
resets the display as follows.
Switch settings
RESET/RETURN button
operation
DISPLAY switch:
COUNTER
Reset counter to 00:00:00:00.
DISPLAY switch:
TC
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch:
SET
Reset timecode to
00:00:00:00.
This button returns to the previous screen when
pressed during thumbnail screen display or
essence mark thumbnail screen display.
16. DISPLAY switch
This cycles the data displayed in the time data
display in the LCD monitor through the sequence
COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT (page 13).
COUNTER: Display recording/playback duration
counter.
TC: Display timecode.
U-BIT: Display user bits data.
17. BRIGHT (brightness) button
Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor
backlight.
Each press of the button selects the next setting in
the order shown in the following table. If you press
the button with the LCD monitor off, the LCD
backlight comes on in the H state.
Setting
LCD monitor backlight
H
High (select this to view the LCD monitor
outdoors in the daytime)
M
Brightness between H and L
L
Low (select this to view the LCD monitor
indoors or outdoors at night)
OFF
Off (the display is also off)
0009
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
Thumbnail screen operations section and audio control section
1
2 3 4
8
9
5
6
1011
12
1. Thumbnail indicator
This lights when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
2. THUMBNAIL button
Press this button to display the thumbnail
screen (page 81) and to carry out a thumbnail
operation.
Press once more to return to the original display.
3. SET button and arrow buttons
Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit
settings, and for thumbnail screen operations.
When the menu is displayed, press this button to
select an item or to confirm the setting change.
4. MENU button
Each press of this button turns the setup menu
display on and off.
The function of this button is the same as that of
the MENU ON/OFF switch.
5. F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording
run) switch
Selects the operating mode of the internal
timecode generator. The operating mode is set
as explained below, depending on the position of
the switch.
7
F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless of
whether the camcorder is recording. Use this
setting when synchronizing the timecode with
external timecode.
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during recording.
Use this setting to have a consecutive
timecode on the recording media.
8. ESSENCE MARK button
By pressing this button when a thumbnail display
is on the screen, you can view the following
thumbnail displays of the essence-marked frames
of the selected clip, depending on the item
selected in a list displayed on the screen.
All: Thumbnail display of all frames marked with
essence marks.
Rec Start: Thumbnail display of frames marked
with Rec Start marks and of the first frames of
clips (when the first frames are not marked
with Rec Start marks).
Shot Mark1: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 1.
Shot Mark2: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 2.
You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot Mark 3 to
Shot Mark 9.
If a clip is recorded using planning metadata that
defines names for shot mark 0 to shot mark 9, the
selection options in the list are displayed by the
defined names.
9. SHIFT button
Use this in combination with other buttons.
1/2/3/4 recording level) knobs
Adjust the audio levels to be recorded on channels
1, 2, 3, and 4 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2
and AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switches are set to
MANUAL.
10. PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK switch
Selects the type of timecode to record.
PRESET: Record new timecode on the media.
REGEN: Record timecode continuous with the
existing timecode recorded on the media.
Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-RUN
mode.
CLOCK: Record timecode synchronized to the
internal clock. Regardless of the setting of
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the camcorder
operates in F-RUN mode.
7. AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 (audio channel 3/4
11. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2
“Setting the Timecode” (page 45)
“Setting the User Bits” (page 45)
6. LEVEL CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio channel
adjustment method selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for
audio channels 3 and 4.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
adjustment method selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for
audio channels 1 and 2.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
12. AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio channel
1/2/3/4 input selection) switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on
audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4.
FRONT: Audio input signals from the microphone
connected to the MIC IN connector
REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device
connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connectors
WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF
portable tuner if it is attached
000
10
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
[Note]
Handle and Memory Card Slot Side
Do not grasp this part of the camcorder when the GPS
function is in use.
3. PC connector
Used to put this camcorder into USB connection
mode and use it as an external storage device
for a computer. When a computer is connected
to this connector, every memory card inserted
in the camcorder is recognized as a drive on the
computer.
SxS memory card slots (page 29)
654 3
2
1
7
8
10
11
12
9
4. External device connector
Connect to a PSZ-HA/HB/HC series Portable
Storage HDD (option), PSZ-SA25 Portable Storage
SSD (option), a general-purpose external USB
HDD, or USB flash drive to copy clips from the
recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of the
camcorder to USB media.
[Note]
This connector should be used only for connecting the type
of devices above. It cannot be used for connecting a USB
hub or other devices.
5. USB wireless LAN module connector
Connect to an IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN
Module (supplied), CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN
Adaptor (option), CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor
Kit (option), or modem (option) to enable
communications with wireless LAN devices and
networks.
“Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 60)
“Connecting to the Internet” (page 63)
6. PROXY SD card slot (page 54)
Insert an SD card for recording proxy data.
7.
13
(NFC) mark
A built-in NFC antenna is provided.
14
1. ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
(page 122).
Off is assigned to these switches when the
8. SLOT SELECT (SxS memory card select)
camcorder is shipped from the factory.
2. GPS module
Contains a built-in GPS module.
“Obtaining Location Information (GPS)” (page 58)
button
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both card
slots A and B, press this button to select the card
you want to use (page 29).
9. Network connector
Connects to a network via a wired LAN connection
using a LAN cable (sold separately).
[CAUTION]
ˎˎ For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral
device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this
port.
Follow the instructions for this port.
ˎˎ When you connect the LAN cable of the unit to peripheral
device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent malfunction
due to radiation noise.
“Connecting to the Internet” (page 63)
10. HDMI connector
Connect an HDMI device, such as a monitor or
recording unit, to output HD or SD HDMI video
and audio signals.
[Note]
4K (QFHD) output is not supported.
11. GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input)
connector (BNC type)
This connector inputs a reference signal when the
camcorder is to be genlocked or when timecode
is to be synchronized with external equipment.
The supported reference signals vary depending
on the current system frequency as shown in the
following table.
System frequency
Supported reference signals
59.94i
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
59.94P
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
50i
1080/50i, 576/50i
50P
1080/50i, 576/50i
29.97P
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
25P
1080/50i, 576/50i
23.98P
1080/23.98PsF
12. TC IN (timecode input) connector (BNC type)
To apply an external lock to the timecode of the
camcorder, input the reference timecode.
“Setting the Timecode” (page 45)
13. VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)
Outputs video signals for monitoring.
000
11
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
14. TC OUT (timecode output) connector (BNC
type)
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to
the timecode of this camcorder, connect this
connector to the external VTR’s timecode input
connector.
1. TALLY (back tally) indicator (red)
Lights up during recording. It will not light if the
TALLY switch is set to OFF. It also flashes when the
WARNING indicator operates. The tally indicator on
the front of the viewfinder and the REC indication
on the viewfinder screen light or flash in the same
manner.
Tally Indicator and Connector Section
1
2
“Error/Warning System” (page 143)
2. TALLY switch
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator function.
3. EARPHONE jack (stereo, mini jack)
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording
and playback sound during playback. When an
alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound
through the earphone. Plugging an earphone into
the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.
You can select monaural or stereo using
Maintenance >Audio >Headphone Out in the
setup menu.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Use monaural (2-pole) or stereo (3-pole) type earphones.
Use of other earphones may damage the camcorder.
ˎˎ Use earphones with 16 Ω impedance.
3
4
AES/
LINE EBU
5
AES/
MIC
LINE EBU
+48V
OFF
4. AUDIO IN selector switch
Select the audio source you connect to the AUDIO
IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
LINE: When connecting a stereo amplifier or other
external audio signal source
AES/EBU: When connecting an external digital
audio signal source
MIC: When connecting a microphone.
6
MIC
+48V
OFF
SDI IN
12V 1.8A
1
SDI OUT
2
CH1
1/2
17
3
4
SDI OUT
CH2
3/4
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
8 9
REMOTE
10
11
5. +48V/OFF (+48V external power source on/
off) switch
Switch between the following settings, according
to the microphone used for audio input.
+48V: Microphone requiring external power
source (phantom power)
OFF: Microphone using internal power source or
not requiring a power source
6. SDI IN (SDI input) connector (BNC type)
Connector used when connecting an external SDI
signal source to the camcorder.
000
12
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
7. AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1 and
channel 2 input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin,
female)
Connect to audio equipment or a microphone.
8. Bottom cover
This is provided for protecting the cables
connected to the connectors on the rear panel.
By loosening the screws which retain the cover to
the bottom of the camcorder, you can adjust the
position of the cover depending on the size and
shape of the microphone or audio cable plugs.
After adjusting the position, tighten the screws to
secure the cover.
9. AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5-pin,
male)
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4.
The audio signals are selected by the MONITOR
switch.
10. REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect a remote control unit to control the
camcorder remotely.
[Note]
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control Unit
to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the camcorder
POWER switch.
11. SDI OUT 1/2/3/4 connectors (BNC type)
Outputs a 3G/HD SDI or SD SDI signal (with
embedded audio). The output signal from this
connector can be turned on/off using Operation
>Input/Output >SDI Out1/3 Output or SDI Out2/4
Output in the setup menu.
Use a commercially available 75 Ω coaxial cable for
connection.
[Notes]
ˎˎ To output QFHD Quad Link, installation of CBKZ-Z450QL
(QUAD-LINK 3G-SDI Upgrade License option) is required.
ˎˎ Make sure that the ground connection between the
camcorder and external device is securely established
before turning the power on.
(It is recommended that the camcorder and external
device be turned on after connecting the 75 Ω coaxial
cable.)
If the external device must be connected to the
camcorder while the camcorder is on, connect the 75 Ω
coaxial cable to the external device first and then connect
it to the camcorder.
000
13
1. Overview
Screen Display
LCD Monitor Information Screen (Status Display)
9. Warning indicator area
Displays warnings when trouble with recording
occurs.
Status Screens
The LCD monitor information screen is displayed
by pressing the DISP SEL/EXPAND (display select/
expand) button (page 8).
For details, see “Error/Warning System” (page 143).
The status screens allow you to check camcorder
settings and various types of status information.
When no menu is displayed, push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL/
PRST position to display the status screen. Each
push selects the next status screen.
The following status screens can be displayed.
10. Clip name display
Displays the name of the clip currently recording
when recording, or displays the name of the next
clip to be recorded during recording standby.
1 23 4 5
12 13
9
11
10
6
8
7
1. File system indicator
Indicator
Recording format
2. File format indicator
16bit
HD420 HQ
DVCAM
MPEG IMX 50
3. Status display
PB: Appears during media playback.
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is
selected.
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode
generator is locked to an external signal input
to the TC IN (timecode input) connector.
HOLD: Appears when the operation mode of the
internal timecode generator is set to R-RUN
and stopped.
4. System frequency indicator
Indicates the system frequency of video being
currently played or recorded.
5. Audio format indicator
Indicates the audio recording format or the audio
format of clip being currently played.
24bit
HD422 50
MPEG IMX 50
XAVC Intra
XAVC Long
6. Audio level meters
Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of
channels 1 to 4.
7. Remaining battery capacity indicator
Displays the battery remaining capacity icon and
the remaining recording time.
8. Remaining media capacity indicator
Shows bar segments indicating the remaining
capacity of recording media in the slots.
11. Time data display
Switches displays of duration, timecode, and
user bits data, depending on the position of the
DISPLAY switch.
Displays the type of data currently shown in the
time data display, as follows.
TCG: Recorded timecode
TCR: Playback timecode
UBG: Recorded user bits
UBR; Playback user bits
CNT: Counter
DUR: Duration
CLK: Time display (when the PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch is set to CLOCK)
When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the
timecode value, the timecode is displayed in the
format shown below. When the HOLD button is
pressed again to release the hold, the timecode is
displayed in the normal format.
Status screen
Display indication
Camera Status
screen
Settings and status information
related to shooting
Audio Status
screen
Settings and status information
related to audio input and output
System Status
screen
Settings and status information
related to recording
Video Output
Status screen
Settings and status information
related to video output
Assignable
Button Status
screen
Names of functions assigned to
assignable switches
Battery Status
screen
Status of the battery mounted on
the camcorder
Media Status
screen
Status information about
recording media
Network Status Settings and status information
1 screen
related to the network
Network Status Settings and status information
2 screen
related to streaming
The three dots indicate that the timecode and
counter progress are in hold mode.
12. Resolution indicator
Indicates the resolution of the output video.
13. Recording format indicator
Indicates the current recording format or the
recording format of clip being currently played.
Camera Status screen
000
14
1. Overview: Screen Display
Display item
Description
Display item
Description
Display item
Description
Gain
Gain level in dB units
System frequency
Video
Shutter
VIDEO OUT connector output
settings (output picture size,
superimposition)
Electronic shutter status
System
Frequency
Gamma
Gamma category and curve
File System
File system
White
White balance mode setting
Rec Format
Recording format
Gain Switch
GAIN switch status
Zebra
Clip Continuous Rec function on/
off setting
Media Status screen
Zebra pattern status
Clip
Continuous
Rec
Iris
Iris f-stop value
Title Prefix
Clip name prefix
Focal Length
Focal length
Picture Size
Picture size
Display item
Description
Simul Rec
2-slot Simul Rec function on/off
setting
SxSA
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining time display) and
media life of media in slot A (0% to
100% indication. Replacement
recommended at 0%. Displayed
only for media that supports this
function.)
SxSB
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining time display) and
media life of media in slot B (0% to
100% indication. Replacement
recommended at 0%. Displayed
only for media that supports this
function.)
SD Proxy
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining time display) and
media life (displayed only if
available) of media in PROXY SD
card slot
SD Utility
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining capacity) and
media life (displayed only if
available) of media in UTILITY SD
card slot
Focus Distance Focus distance
Depth Of Field
Depth of field
Zoom Speed
Zoom speed configured for the
lens ZOOM button
Rec Function
Enabled special recording format
and settings
HDR Setting
HDR settings
Picture Cache
Rec
Picture Cache Rec function on/off
setting
Number
Clip name suffix
Gamma
Gamma category in use
4K&HD (Sub)
Rec
1-slot Simul Rec function on/off
setting
Audio Status screen
Assignable Button Status screen
Battery Status screen
XAVC Proxy Rec Proxy data recording function on/
off setting
Video Output Status screen
Display item
Description
CH 1/CH 2/CH
3/CH 4
Audio level, input source,
reference input level, and wind
noise reduction filter settings for
each channel
System Status screen
Display item
Description
Detected
Battery
Detected type of the battery
Remaining
Remaining capacity (%)
Charge Count
Number of recharges
Capacity
Remaining capacity (Ah)
Voltage
Voltage
Manufacture
Date
Date of battery manufacture
Display item
Description
Power Source
Power supply source
SDI
SDI OUT connector output
settings (output picture size,
output form, output rate,
superimposition)
Supplied
Voltage
Supplied power source voltage
HDMI
HDMI connector output settings
(output picture size, output form,
output rate, superimposition)
A
mark is displayed if the media is protected.
000
15
1. Overview: Screen Display
Network Status 1 screen
Network Status 2 screen
Display item
Description
Display item
Description
Setting
Network setting status
Wireless
Network
Wireless network setting status
NW Client
Mode Status
Device Name
Name of attached USB wireless
LAN module device
Network client mode status
For details about the status, see
“Network client mode status”
(page 15).
CCM Name
IP Address
(Wireless)
IP address of wireless LAN
connection
Name of the connected CCM
when using network client mode
Streaming distribution status
MAC Addr.
(Wireless)
MAC address of device attached
the USB wireless LAN module
connector
Streaming
Status
Streaming Size
Picture size of the currently
selected streaming setting
Wireless
Network
Modem setting status
Streaming Bit
Rate
Bit rate of the currently selected
streaming setting
Device Name
Name of attached modem device
IP Address
(Modem)
IP address of attached modem
device
Streaming Type Type of the currently selected
streaming setting
Wired LAN
Wired LAN network connection
status
Wired LAN
Remote
Remote control enabled/disabled
state when connected using a LAN
cable
IP Address
(Wired)
IP address of wired LAN
connection
Streaming
Dest. Add.
Streaming destination address
Streaming
Dest. Port
Streaming destination port
Number of
Distribution
Number of streaming distribution
destinations
File Transfer
File transfer progress status
Transfer to:
Server name of file transfer
destination
Status
display
State
Connected
CCM
Network client mode is
connected on, CCM is connected,
and CCM control is
enabled.
Connecting
Connecting Attempting to connect
to CCM
to CCM (or
(disconnected) disconnecting). Wait
until connection
(disconnection) is
successful. If the status
does not change from
“Connecting,” the CCM
address setting may be
incorrect. Check that the
address is set correctly.
Awaiting
CCM
Network client mode is
connection on, but the network
standby
setting is off. Enable the
network setting to
connect to the CCM.
Address
Error
CCM
address
error
The host name or IP
address of the CCM to
connect may be
incorrect. Check that the
setting is correct.
Auth. Failed
CCM user
name/
password
error
The user name or
password used to
connect to the CCM
may be incorrect. Check
that the setting is
correct.
No Inet
Access
Internet
Cannot connect to the
connection network. The network
error
settings may be
incorrect. Check the
network settings.
Cert. not
Valid
CCM
certification
not valid
error
Network client mode status
Status
display
State
Description
Off
CCM not
Network client mode is
connected off.
Description
The CCM certificate is
not valid. The date
setting may be invalid.
Check the date setting.
000
16
1. Overview: Screen Display
Viewfinder Screen
The viewfinder screen displays images during
shooting (recording or recording standby)
and playback with camcorder information
superimposed on the display.
You can toggle the display of information on/off
7
1 23 4 5 6
8
using the DISPLAY switch.
The information to display is linked to the settings
in Operation >Super Impose in the setup menu,
and the settings of the corresponding switches.
9
10 11 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 20
21
23 22
24
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28 27 26
1. Extender indicator
25
5. Iris position indicator (with lens mounted)
“EX” appears when the lens extender function is
ON.
Displays the iris position setting.
2. Zoom position indicator (with lens mounted)
Displays the zoom position of the zoom lens in the
range 0 to 99.
The values displayed will vary with the lens used.
Appears when the CC5600K function is on.
3. Color temperature indicator
Displays the color temperature of the white
balance.
4. Focus position indicator (with lens mounted)
Displays the focus position as a distance to the
subject (unit: meters).
6. Electric color temperature filter indicator
7. Depth of field indicator (serial lens mounted)
Displays the depth of field using a bar. The units
for display are set using Operation >Display On/Off
>Lens Info in the setup menu, and can be set to
meters or feet.
8. Recording mode indicator
Displays the following recording operation states
of the camcorder.
Indicator
Meaning
Rec
During recording
Stby
Recording standby
Cont Rec
Clip continuous recording in
progress
Cont Stby
Recording standby in clip continuous
recording mode
S&Q Rec
Recording in progress in Slow &
Quick Motion mode
S&Q Stby
Recording standby in Slow & Quick
Motion mode
Rec
Recording in Picture Cache Rec
mode
Cache
Recording standby in Picture Cache
Rec mode
Int Rec
Recording in progress in Interval Rec
mode
Int Stby
Recording standby in Interval Rec
mode
Int Stby
Recording paused in Interval Rec
mode (during pause intervals)
Sml Rec
Recording in progress in Simul Rec
mode
Sml Stby
Recording standby in Simul Rec
mode
CALL
Normal: Displays the strength of the received
signal level by the number of white segment
indicators.
Analog receiver muting/Digital receiver error rate
warning: Displays the strength of the received
signal level by the number of gray segment
indicators.
If the received level exceeds the peak: Displays “P”
in place of the indicator.1)
If the transmitter is in power-save mode: “S” is
displayed.
Receiver battery is low: The corresponding channel
number and indicators flash.1)
1)When using the DWR-S02DN
10. S&Q Motion (Slow & Quick) frame rate
indicator
Displays the shooting frame rate when the
camcorder is set to Slow & Quick Motion recording
mode.
11. GPS indicator (page 58)
12. Battery capacity/voltage display
Displays the following indicators according to the
type of battery power source.
Battery type
Indicator
Info battery
Battery remaining capacity
icon and remaining recording
time
Anton/Bauer
battery
Remaining battery capacity (%
indicator)
Other batteries
Input voltage
Call received from external
connected device
Green tally is displayed when the camcorder is in
the following states.
ˎˎMaintenance >Camera Config >HD SDI Remote
I/F is set to Green Tally in the setup menu and a
recording control signal is output from the SDI
OUT connector.
ˎˎGreen tally signal received (when a camera
adaptor is mounted on the camcorder and a
camera extension unit is connected)
9. Wireless receiver function indicator
Displays “W” when a slot-in receiver is attached to
the camcorder, and displays the reception level
for each channel that can be used by the receiver
(1ch, 2ch, or 4ch).
13. Recording format (picture size) indicator
Displays the picture size of clips recorded onto SxS
memory cards.
14. Recording format (system frequency and
scan method) indicator
Displays the currently configured camcorder
system frequency and the recording format scan
method.
000
17
1. Overview: Screen Display
15. Recording format (codec) indicator / 1-slot
Simul Rec indicator
Displays the format name of clips recorded onto
SxS memory cards.
“/Sub” is displayed in 1-slot Simul Rec mode
(page 52).
16. Gamma indicator
Display the gamma setting.
Menu settings
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Gamma
Indicator
Paint >Gamma setting
Gamma
Gamma
Category
Gamma
Select
The following are displayed when Operation >Base
Setting >Shooting Mode in the setup menu is set
to HDR and Operation >Display On/Off >Gamma
is set to On.
Menu settings
Operation >HDR Setting
Indicator
Paint >Gamma
4K(QFHD)
Rec/Out
HD Rec/Out Gamma
Gamma
Select
HDR
(HLG)
HDR
(HLG)
–
–
HLG
SDR
Off
–
HLG
On
STD1 DVW
HLG STD1
STD2 ×4.5
HLG STD2
Indicator
Paint >Gamma
4K(QFHD)
Rec/Out
HD Rec/Out Gamma
HDR
(S-Log3)
SDR
Gamma
Select
Off
–
S-Log3
On
STD1 DVW
S-Log3
STD1
STD2 ×4.5
S-Log3
STD2
STD3 ×3.5
S-Log3
STD3
STD4 240M S-Log3
STD4
STD5 R709
S-Log3
STD5
STD6 ×5.0
S-Log3
STD6
Off
–
–
–
–
STD3 ×3.5
On
Off
–
–
Gamma
Off
STD4 240M HLG STD4
STD5 R709
HLG STD5
STD1
STD6 ×5.0
HLG STD6
STD2 x4.5
STD2
HG1
3250G36
HLG HG1
HG1
3250G36
S-Log3
HG1
STD3 x3.5
STD3
HG2
4600G30
HLG HG2
HG2
4600G30
S-Log3
HG2
STD4 240M
STD4
HLG HG3
HG3
3259G40
S-Log3
HG3
STD5 R709
STD5
HG3
3259G40
HLG HG4
HG4
4609G33
S-Log3
HG4
STD6 x5.0
STD6
HG4
4609G33
User 1
S-Log3
User1
HG1
3250G36
HG1
HLG
User1
User 1
User 2
User 2
S-Log3
User2
HG2
4600G30
HG2
HLG
User2
User 3
User 3
S-Log3
User3
HG3
3259G40
HG3
HLG
User3
User 4
User 4
S-Log3
User4
HG4
4609G33
HG4
HLG
User4
User 5
User 5
S-Log3
User5
User 1
User 1
HLG
User5
User 2
User 2
User 3
User 3
On
STD
HG
User
STD1 DVW
User 4
User 4
User 5
User 5
HLG STD3
Menu settings
Operation >HDR Setting
17. Timecode external lock indicator
Displays timecode lock when the timecode is
input from an external source.
18. Wired LAN/Modem connection status
indicator
Displays icons for the wired LAN network or
modem settings/connection status.
Wired LAN settings/connection status
State
Maintenance
Operation
>Display On/ >Network
>Setting
Off
>Network
Condition
Maintenance
>Network
>Wired LAN
Network
connection
state/icon
Off
–
–
–
On
Off
–
–
On
–
–
Disable
–
Enable
Connecting
to LAN
(flashing)
Connected
to LAN
LAN
connection
error
3G/4G modem settings/connection status
State
Maintenance
Operation
>Display On/ >Network
>Setting
Off
>Network
Condition
Maintenance
>Network
>Modem
Network
connection
state/icon
Off
–
–
–
On
Off
–
–
000
18
1. Overview: Screen Display
State
Network
connection
state/icon
Maintenance
Operation
>Display On/ >Network
>Setting
Off
>Network
Condition
Maintenance
>Network
>Modem
On
–
–
Off
–
On
Modem
connecting
On
The following icons are displayed when streaming
from a CCM.
State
Operation
Maintenance
>Display On/ >Streaming
Off
>Setting
>Streaming
Status
Maintenance
>Network
Client Mode
>Setting
On
On
Off
(flashing)
19. Streaming indicator
Displays the status of streaming using icons.
State
Operation
>Display On/
Off
>Streaming
Status
Maintenance
>Streaming
>Setting
Maintenance
>Network
Client Mode
>Setting
Streaming
state/Icon
Off
–
–
–
On
Off
Off
–
On
Off
Not
streaming
Streaming
Error
State
Maintenance
>Network
>Setting
Maintenance
>Network
>Wi-Fi Mode
On
Wi-Fi Station
Not
streaming
Network
connection
state/icon
Connecting
to Wi-Fi
(flashing)
Searching for
access points
RX Station or C3 Portal using icons when network
client mode is on.
State
Maintenance
>Network
Client Mode
>Setting
State
Off
–
–
–
On
Off
–
–
On
CCM
connected
Connecting to
CCM
(disconnected)
Connecting
to access
point
[Note]
CCM
connection
standby
Icons are not displayed before streaming starts.
20. Wi-Fi mode status indicator
Displays the wireless LAN settings and connection
status using icons.
Operation
>Display On/
Off
>Network
Condition
Off
On
State
Maintenance
>Network
>Setting
–
Off
On
Maintenance
>Network
>Wi-Fi Mode
–
–
Wi-Fi Access
Point
CCM
connection
error
Icon changes
due to signal
strength
Access point
connection
error
Network
connection
state/icon
–
–
Connecting
to Wi-Fi
(flashing)
Wi-Fi standby
(connected)
Icon
Operation
>Display On/
Off >NW
Client Mode
Status
Streaming
Modem
connected
Modem
connection
error
Streaming
state/Icon
Operation
>Display On/
Off
>Network
Condition
On
Off
23. Network client mode indicator
Displays the status of the connection to the CCM
(Connection Control Manager) of either a Network
For details
about errors,
see
page 15.
State
Video signal
indicator
Operation >Input/
Output >Output
Format >SDI Out
Operation >HDR
Setting
3840x2160
4K(QFHD) Rec/Out setting indicator
22. Proxy indicator
Displays “Proxy” when proxy recording is on
(Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Setting in
the setup menu is set to On). During setup, “Proxy”
blinks. “Proxy Rec” is displayed during proxy
recording.
–
24. Video signal indicator
Displays the output video signal in realtime as a
waveform, vectorscope, or histogram.
–
21. File transfer status indicator
Displays and transfer rate (%) during file transfer.
When transfer finishes, disappears to indicate
100% transfer.
(flashing)
1920x1080
HDR(HLG)
HDR(HLG)
HDR(S-Log3)
HDR
(S-Log3)
HD Rec/Out setting indicator
HDR(HLG)
HDR(HLG)
SDR
SDR
000
19
1. Overview: Screen Display
25. Recording media state/remaining capacity
indicator for each media slot
Displays the state and remaining capacity of the
media in SxS slot A, SxS slot B, and the PROXY SD
card slot.
SxS slot icon indicator
*SxS slot A (SxSA) example. The icons for SxS slot B are
labeled SxSB.
when recording, or displays the name of the next
clip to be recorded during recording standby.
28. Focus assist indicator
Displays a detection frame (focus area marker)
indicating the area for detection of degree of
focus, and a level bar (focus assist indicator)
indicating the degree of focus within that area.
Media mounted
29. Time data display
Displays the remaining recording/playback
time, timecode, user bits, etc., as selected by the
DISPLAY switch (page 8).
Media mounting
30. SD card indicator for saving configuration
Icon
Media state
–
Media not inserted or not mounted
(flashing)
Recording (active)
(orange bar)
Playback (active)
(green
indicator)
data
Displays the state of the SD card (for saving
configuration data) inserted in the UTILITY SD card
slot.
Icon
Media state
–
SD card not inserted or not mounted
SD card mounted
Recording/playback (active)
(orange bar
+ green
indicator)
Mounted SD card is protected
SD card mounting
SD card (for proxy data recording) icon indicator
Icon
Media state
–
Media not inserted or not mounted
Media mounted
Media mounting
(flashing)
Recording (active)
(orange bar)
The remaining recording time is displayed
numerically.
26. Audio level meter indicators
Displays the levels of audio channels 1 and 2.
27. Clip name display
Displays the name of the clip currently recording
(flashing)
31. SDI output REC trigger indicator
Displays the superimposition state of the recording
command sent to the SDI connector output.
It is displayed when Maintenance >Camera Config
>HD SDI Remote I/F is set to “Characters” in the
setup menu.
32. ALAC indicator
Displays “ALAC” when the ALAC (Auto Lens
Aberration Correction) function is set to be
performed automatically.
ALAC will be performed automatically when
an ALAC-compatible lens is attached, the ALAC
function is enabled, and Maintenance >Camera
Config >ALAC is set to “Auto” in the setup menu.
33. AE (auto iris) mode indicator
Displays the current operating mode of the auto
iris function using an icon and auto iris override
level.
Icon
Meaning
Backlight mode
Standard mode
Spotlight mode
34. Auto focus mode indicator (when an auto
focus lens is attached only)
Displays the focus adjustment mode of the
camcorder.
ˎˎAF (auto focus)
ˎˎMF (manual focus)
ˎˎMF* (manual focus with MF assist function on)
ˎˎFull MF (full manual focus)
35. ND filter indicator
Displays the position number of the currently
selected ND filter (page 5).
When “Electrical CC” is assigned to an assignable
switch, the position (A/B/C/D) of the electrical
CC filter is displayed on the right of the ND filter
indicator (1 to 4).
36. Gain indicator
Displays the gain setting (dB), set using the GAIN
switch, of the video amplifier.
37. Shutter mode/shutter speed indicator/Flash
Band Reduce status indicator
Displays the shutter mode or shutter speed.
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 40)
If Flash Band Reduce (page 103) is set to On in
the Operation menu, FBR is displayed when the
shutter is in a non-operating state.
38. White balance mode indicator
Displays the currently selected white balance
automatic adjustment memory.
ATW: ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) mode
W:A: Memory A mode
W:B: Memory B mode
W:C: Memory C mode
W:P: Preset mode
3200K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 3200K is on
4300K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 4300K is on
5600K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 5600K is on
6300K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 6300K is on
000
20
1. Overview
Supplied Lens and Viewfinder
Lens Supplied with the PXW-Z450KC
[Note]
For details about operating the lens, refer to the Zoom Lens Manual (PDF) operating instructions.
12. Zoom lever / zoom ring
For manual zoom adjustment, set the zoom servo/
manual switch to the MANU position, then operate
the lever/ring.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Always set the iris mode switch to the M (manual) position
first and then adjust the iris.
8
9
The zoom rapidly returns to the previous zoom
position when the switch assigned with the
Shtl (shuttle) function is released.
Current zoom
position
13. Focus ring
Turn this ring to adjust the focus.
14
10
15
11 16
12
13
Press and hold switch assigned
with Shtl (shuttle) function
14. Zoom servo / manual selector tab
SERVO (servo): Selects power zoom. Operate the
zoom with the zoom seesaw switch.
MANU (manual): Selects manual zoom. Operate
the zoom with the zoom lever/zoom ring.
Shuttle position
15. Hood lock knob
18
17
16. Connector for zoom/focus remote and
virtual output (20-pin)
Connect to zoom/focus control, or accessories
(20-pin).
Release switch assigned with
Shtl (shuttle) function
Original zoom
position
[Note]
1. Iris gain adjustment trimmer (page 42)
2. Iris push auto switch
When the iris mode switch is in the M (manual)
position, press this switch for instantaneous auto
iris adjustment. The iris is automatically adjusted
while the switch is held down.
3. Iris mode switch
A (auto): The iris is adjusted automatically.
M (manual): Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
4. Zoom seesaw switch
This is enabled when the zoom servo/manual
knob is in the SERVO position. Set to the W (wide
angle) position when you want wide-angle, and
set to the T (telephoto) side when you want
telephoto.
Press the switch harder for a faster zoom action, or
softer for slower zoom action.
5. RET switch
While pressed, the last few seconds recorded
appear on the viewfinder screen (Rec Review).
6. MEMO switch (page 20)
Used for the shuttle shot function.
7. AUX switch
8. F.B. lock screw / F.B. adjustment ring
(page 42)
9. Positioning pin
When attaching the lens, align this pin with the
recess in the top center of lens mount on the
camcorder.
10. Macro button / macro ring
Press and hold the macro button and turn the
macro ring to adjust the focus (minimum focus
distance: 10 mm).
11. Iris ring
For manual iris adjustment, set the iris mode
switch to the M (manual) position, then turn this
ring.
Virtual output is enabled for the center connector only.
17. VTR switch
Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to
start recording, then press once more to stop.
Information display unit (digital drive unit)
1
2
3
18. Fast zoom speed adjustment knob
About shuttle shot
Shuttle shot is a shooting function for rapidly
moving to a preset zoom position set by the user.
1 Set the zoom position that you want to
DISPLAY
register.
2 Press and hold the MEMO switch, and press
the switch assigned with the Shtl (shuttle)
function.
The zoom position is registered as the shuttle
position.
To move rapidly to the shuttle position, press
and hold the switch assigned with the Shtl
(shuttle) function.
1. DISPLAY switch
Turns the display on/off.
000
21
1. Overview: Supplied Lens and Viewfinder
2. Display
The display automatically turns off if no operation
is performed after 2 minutes.
3. Control key
Moves the cursor up/down/left/right. Press the
center button to apply settings.
Viewfinder Supplied with the
PXW‑Z450KC
For details about the supplied viewfinder, refer
to the operating instructions for the viewfinder
(CD-ROM).
000
22
2. Preparation
Preparing a Power Supply
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and AC
adaptors listed below.
ˎˎBP-GL95B Lithium-ion Battery Pack
[CAUTION]
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey the law in
the relative area or country.
For details on the battery charging procedure, refer to the battery
charger operation manual.
Note on using the battery pack
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully
recharged.
Using AC Power
Using a Battery Pack
Press the battery pack against the back of the
camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the
battery pack with the line on the camcorder. Then
slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow
aligns with the line on the camcorder.
To detach the battery pack, pull the battery pack
up by holding the release button in.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminals
may become damaged.
ˎˎ During recording and playback (while the ACCESS lamp
on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS lamp
in the card slot section is lit in orange), be careful never to
remove the battery pack.
Doing so may corrupt the data recorded on the card.
ˎˎ Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing
the battery pack.
When a BP-GL95B Battery Pack is used, the
camcorder will operate continuously for
approximately 185 minutes.
[WARNING]
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
[Note]
The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency
of use of the battery pack, and the ambient temperature
when used.
Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger
suitable for each battery.
Mount an AC-DN10A on the camcorder in the
same way as a battery pack, then connect to the
AC power supply.
000
23
2. Preparation
Attaching a Viewfinder
[CAUTION]
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the camcorder
with the eyepiece lens facing the sun.
Direct sunlight can enter through the lens, be focused in the
viewfinder and cause fire.
2 Couple the viewfinder connector to the VF
the way so that your right leg does not hit the
viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder.
connector (26-pin).
1 Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder
VF connector (26-pin)
positioning levers and the front-to-back
viewfinder positioning knobs, and then pull
the viewfinder slide assembly forward.
A viewfinder is available separately.
This section describes attachment of the CBK-VF02
as an example.
For the procedure for attaching other viewfinders, refer to the
manual supplied with each viewfinder.
Diopter adjustment ring
Attaching a Viewfinder
Up
[Note]
When attaching a viewfinder, take note of the following
points.
ˎˎ Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling
the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF
connector (26-pin). If you make this connection when the
camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not function
properly.
ˎˎ Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the
camcorder’s VF connector (26-pin). If the coupling is loose,
noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not
operate properly.
1 [1] Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right
positioning ring, [2] attach the viewfinder to
the viewfinder fitting shoe, and [3] tighten the
viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring.
Slide stopper
You can detach the viewfinder by following the
attaching procedure in reverse order. But, when
detaching the viewfinder from the attachment
shoe, pull up the stopper.
Adjusting the Diopter
You can also attach a commercially available
protection filter, close-up lens, etc. that is 52 mm
in diameter.
Adjusting the Screen
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.
Outlines: Adjust using the PEAKING knob.
Contrast: Adjust using the CONTRAST knob.
Brightness: Adjust using the BRIGHT knob.
[1]
Left-to-right positioning
ring
detach the viewfinder slide assembly.
Hex socket bolts
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the
viewfinder image is sharpest.
[3]
[2]
2 Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal wrench,
Viewfinder slide assembly
Attaching the BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket
By fitting an optional BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation
Bracket, you can rotate the viewfinder out of
3 Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied bolts.
000
24
2. Preparation: Attaching a Viewfinder
Bolts supplied with the BKW-401
4 Adjust the front-to-back position so that the
arm of the BKW-401 does not touch the
handle when it is raised.
Adjust position so that arm does not
touch handle
000
25
2. Preparation
Using the Camcorder for the First Time
When using the camcorder for the first time,
configure the following settings in the menu.
For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 90).
3 Turn the MENU knob to set the year, month, or
day, and then press the knob.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the remaining
digits.
Setting the Time Zone
Set the time zone for the region of use. The default
value is “UTC Greenwich.”
1 Select Operation >Time Zone >Time Zone in
the setup menu.
5 Press the SET button.
The internal clock is set to the date set in steps
2 to 4.
Next, set the time.
6 Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Time in the
setup menu.
The Time screen appears.
2 Select the time zone to use.
Setting the Date and Time of the
Internal Clock
Set the year, month, day, and day-of-week of the
internal clock.
1 Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Date in the
setup menu.
The Date screen appears.
7 Set the time in the same way as when setting
the date.
8 Press the SET button.
The time is registered in the internal clock.
To cancel the setting, press the Cancel button.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the year, month,
or day, and then press the knob.
The selected year, month, or day becomes
editable.
000
26
2. Preparation
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens
[Note]
[CAUTION]
Attaching a Lens
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off
while the camcorder is being used. This could
cause a serious accident. Make sure the lens is
firmly locked. It is recommended that the lens
mount securing rubber be put on the lens
locking lever as illustrated below.
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this
connector, power off the camcorder first.
Lens mount securing rubber
The lens is available separately.
This section describes an example lens
attachment.
For information about attaching a lens, refer to the operation
manual for the lens.
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you
zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the
flange focal length (the distance from the plane
of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane,
also called flange-back).
Make this adjustment just one time after mounting
or changing the lens.
When carrying out the adjustment, use a flange
focal length adjustment chart as the subject.
2 Align the center pin on the lens with the
3
Approx. 3 m (10 ft.)
4 Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector.
5 Secure the lens cable with the cable clamp.
If an aberration correction lens is attached
1
1
3 Holding the lens in place, push the lens
locking lever down to lock the lens.
6 Point the camcorder at the chart by turning
the focus ring and focus on it.
7 Set the zoom ring to wide angle.
8 Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in
focus, being careful not to disturb the focus
ring.
focus all the way from wide angle to
telephoto.
center slot in the lens mount, and insert the
lens into the mount.
2
telephoto.
9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the chart stays in
1 Push the lens locking lever up and remove the
lens mount cap from the lens mount.
5 Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to
The aberration correction function is activated
automatically. 1) Starting the camcorder with an
aberration correction lens may require more time
than normal because of data loading at start-up.
Contact a Sony service representative for
information about aberration correction lenses.
1) The aberration correction function does not operate if
Maintenance >Camera Config >ALAC in the setup menu
is set to Off.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If you use a subject with insufficient contrast, or move the
camcorder or subject during adjustment, this will cause
an adjustment error.
ˎˎ Place the subject (the flange focal length adjustment
chart) so that it appears at the center of the screen at the
telephoto end. Arrange it so that no nearby object (no
object closer to the camera than the chart) enters the
screen at the wide-angle end.
1 Set the iris to manual.
2 Place the supplied flange focal length
adjustment chart about 3 m (10 ft) in front of
the camera.
3 Open the iris.
The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is
open, making adjustment easier.
4 Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring
(flange focal length adjustment ring).
10 Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.
000
27
2. Preparation
Preparing the Audio Input System
Connecting a Microphone to the MIC
IN Connector
[2]
[3]
For details about attaching the microphone holder and
microphone, refer to the instruction manual of each product.
You can attach a stereo microphone (available
separately) to the microphone holder of the
viewfinder (available separately).
This section describes an example microphone
attachment.
Attaching a Wireless Receiver
For the procedure for attaching a microphone holder to other
viewfinders, refer to the manual supplied with each viewfinder.
[1]
1 Loosen the screw and open the microphone
holder clamp.
Microphone holder clamp
3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN
[2]
[1]
connectors, using an optional CAC-12 Microphone
Holder.
Supported microphones: ECM-674/678 electret
condenser microphone
connector, then set the AUDIO IN switch for
the channel on which you want to record the
audio from this microphone to FRONT.
To use a Sony wireless microphone system, power
the camcorder off and then attach a wireless
receiver.
ˎˎDWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D Digital Wireless
Receiver
ˎˎURX-S03D UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
holder.
[1] Place the microphone in the holder so that
“UP” is at the top.
[2] Close the microphone holder.
[3] Tighten the screw.
1 Connect the audio output connector of the
audio equipment that supplies the line input
signal to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2
connector.
4 Secure the microphone cable with the cable
clamp.
Connecting Microphones to the
AUDIO IN Connectors
You can connect up to two monaural
microphones to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
The XLR connection automatic detection function
can be switched on/off using Maintenance
>Audio >Rear XLR Auto in the setup menu.
[4]
For details about attaching a wireless receiver, refer to the
instruction manual of each product.
Connecting Line Input Audio
Equipment
2 Place the microphone in the microphone
ˎˎWith the XLR connection automatic detection
function switched on: When a cable is
connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2
connector, the input from that connector is
automatically selected for audio recording,
regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2/CH3/CH4 switch.
ˎˎWhen the AUDIO IN selector switch is set to
LINE or MIC, the type of audio recorded on
audio channels 3 and 4 does not depend on
the XLR automatic detection function. It is
determined by the switch selection only.
2 Set the AUDIO IN selector for the channel to
which the audio signal source is connected to
LINE.
XLR connection automatic detect function
ˎˎWith the XLR connection automatic detection
function switched off (the factory default
setting): Set the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
switch to REAR for the channels to which the
audio equipment is connected.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 switches
[2] To AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector
[3] Monaural microphone
[4] AUDIO IN selector switches
000
28
2. Preparation
Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices
[Note]
Mounting on a Tripod
1 Attach the optional VCT-14/U14 Tripod
Adaptor to the tripod.
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position
even after the camcorder is removed. If this happens, press
the red button and move the lever as shown above until
the pin returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains
in the engaged position, you will not be able to mount the
camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
1,3
1 Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting.
Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.
2 Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
Connecting a Video Light
3 Make sure that the camcorder is securely
With this camcorder, you can use the Anton Bauer
Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light (powered by
12 V with maximum power consumption of 50 W).
ˎˎIf you connect the video light to the LIGHT
connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT
switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and
off automatically as you start and stop recording
on this camcorder.
ˎˎThe output of the LIGHT connector on the
camcorder is regulated to 12 V even when the
camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power
(through the DC IN connector or battery pack).
The brightness or color temperature of the light
will not change in response to voltage increase.
To remove the camcorder from the tripod
attachment, hold down the red button and pull
the lever in the direction of the arrow.
ˎˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption of
50 W or greater.
ˎˎ The brightness or color temperature of the light will
change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN
connector or from the battery pack) is less than 12 V.
Slide the camcorder forward along the
groove in the adaptor until it clicks.
attached by moving it back and forth.
[Note]
The accessory shoe on the camcorder is of the 1/4-inch
tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slide-type
shoe, use the supplied cold shoe kit.
Lever
Shoulder pad
Clip
2 Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting
1 Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder
pad to unlock the shoulder pad.
on the other side of the grip in the same way.
2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward
To remove the shoulder strap, refer to the
following diagram.
3 Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad
Press here and pull in the direction shown by the
arrow to release.
[Notes]
To attach a video light, fit the video light to
the accessory shoe on the camcorder grip,
and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT
connector.
Red button
2
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position
You can slide the shoulder pad back and forth
within a 40 mm range. This adjustment helps
you get the best balance for shooting with the
camcorder on your shoulder.
until it is in the most convenient position.
in the selected position.
000
29
2. Preparation
Handling SxS Memory Cards
This camcorder records video and audio on SxS
memory cards (not supplied) loaded into one or
both of its memory card slots.
In addition to SxS memory cards, you can also
use XQD memory cards (not supplied) with the
QDA‑EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor (optional) or
SDXC/SDHC cards (not supplied) with the MEADSD02 Media Adaptor (optional) in the camcorder
to make recordings.
The file system supported by each type of media is
given below.
Memory card
File system
exFAT
UDF
FAT
SxS memory cards
Yes
Yes
No
XQD memory cards
Yes
Yes
No
SDXC cards
Yes
No
No
SDHC cards
No
No
Yes
Use SxS PRO X or SxS PRO+ memory cards when recording in
XAVC-I 3840×2160P.
SxS PRO X series
SxS PRO+ series
SxS PRO series
SxS-1 series
The memory cards listed above comply with the
ExpressCard memory card standard.
ˎˎSxS, SxS PRO X, SxS PRO+, SxS PRO, and SxS-1
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
ˎˎThe ExpressCard label and logo are the
property of the Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association (PCMCIA) and
Slot A access indicator
When you press the EJECT button, take care not to
impede the SxS memory card. If the movement of
the SxS memory card is impeded, the lock may fail to
release.
Slot B access indicator
Inserting SxS Memory Cards
1 Slide the cover to the left to open.
2 Insert an SxS memory card into a card slot.
About SxS Memory Cards
Use Sony SxS memory cards (SxS PRO X, SxS PRO+,
SxS PRO, or SxS-1) with this camcorder.
[Note]
[Note]
Slot A
SxS memory cards
2 Press the EJECT button again to eject the card.
are licensed to Sony Corporation. All other
trademarks and trade names are the property of
their respective owners.
Indicator
Slot status
Lights in
orange
Accessing the SxS memory card
(lights during data reading and
writing)
Lights in
green
Standby (the loaded SxS memory
card is ready for recording or
playback)
Not lit
No SxS memory card is loaded.
An unusable card is loaded.
An SxS memory card is loaded, but
the other slot is selected.
Slot B
[Note]
Make sure to insert the SxS card in the correct
orientation. Hold the card with the arrow on one side
facing the direction shown in the diagram, and then
insert the card.
The ACCESS indicator lights in orange, and
then lights in green to indicate that the
memory card is usable.
Ejecting SxS Memory Cards
1 Open the cover, and then press the EJECT
button to release the lock and extract the
button.
3 Close the cover.
ACCESS indicator status
Card slots A and B each have an ACCESS indicator
that indicate the slot status.
Press the button once
to release the lock.
[Note]
Data integrity cannot be guaranteed if you power the
camcorder off or remove a memory card while the card
is being accessed. All data recorded on the card may be
discarded. Always make sure that the ACCESS indicator is
lit green or not lit before you power the camcorder off or
remove a memory card.
Selecting the SxS Memory Card to
Use
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both slot A
and slot B, you can press the SLOT SELECT button
to select the SxS memory card to use.
When the remaining recording time on the
recording SxS memory card falls below 60
seconds, the remaining capacity indicator for
the corresponding media slot flashes on the
viewfinder screen to indicate that the camcorder
will switch SxS memory cards soon.
Subsequently, the camcorder switches
automatically to the other card when the selected
card becomes full, and recording continues.
000
30
2. Preparation: Handling SxS Memory Cards
[Notes]
ˎˎ The SLOT SELECT button is disabled during playback. The
memory cards are not switched even if you press the
button. Button operations are enabled when a thumbnail
screen (page 81) is displayed.
ˎˎ In 1-slot Simul Rec mode, recording may not be able to
continue after switching cards if the next card already has
200 or more clips.
Formatting (Initializing) SxS Memory
Cards
When an unformatted SxS memory card or an SxS
memory card formatted in another specification is
inserted, a message notifying you that the media
has a different file system appears. In this case,
format the memory card in the following way.
SxS memory cards are formatted in exFAT or FAT
by factory default.
[Note]
SxS memory cards must be formatted on an XDCAM device
that supports the exFAT or UDF file system or on this
camcorder. Cards in other formats cannot be used.
1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup
menu.
2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B).
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to
format the card appears.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
If formatting fails
A format operation may fail because the SxS
memory card is write protected, or because it is
not the type of card specified for use with this
camcorder.
In this case, an error message appears. Follow the
instructions in the error message and exchange
the card for an SxS memory card that can be used
with this camcorder.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Formatting a memory card erases all data, including
recorded video data and setup files.
ˎˎ Use the format function of this camcorder to format SxS
memory cards for use on this camcorder. The formats of
cards formatted on other devices are not recognized as
valid formats, making it necessary to format them again
on this camcorder.
Formatting while recording
Even while recording, the SxS memory card loaded
in the other card slot can be formatted.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Formatting is not supported during 1-slot Simul Rec,
during playback, or when the thumbnail screen is
displayed.
ˎˎ During formatting, recording to an SxS memory card
loaded in the other card slot cannot be started.
Checking the Remaining Recording
Time
You can check the remaining capacity of the SxS
memory cards loaded in the two slots by checking
the recording media remaining capacity indicator
in the viewfinder.
The remaining recording time is calculated from
the remaining capacity of the media in each slot
and the current video format (recording bit rate),
and is displayed in units of minutes.
You can check the remaining capacity on a bar
graph by displaying the Media Status screen
(page 14).
[Note]
A
mark appears when a memory card is write protected.
When to exchange SxS memory cards
ˎˎThe warning message “Media Near Full” appears,
the WARNING indicator and the REC indication
on the viewfinder screen flash, and the buzzer
sounds when the total remaining recording
time of the two memory cards falls to five
minutes during recording.
Exchange one of the cards for media with
available recording capacity.
ˎˎIf you continue recording, the message “Media
Full” appears and recording stops when the
total remaining recording time falls to 0.
[Note]
About up to 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS memory
card.
The display of remaining recording time changes to “0”
and the message “Media Full” appears when the clip limit is
reached.
If restoration fails
ˎˎWrite protected SxS memory cards and cards on
which memory errors have occurred cannot be
restored. A warning message appears for such
cards. Follow the instructions in the message
and unprotect the card or replace it with
another card.
ˎˎSxS memory cards on which memory errors
have occurred may become usable if they are
reformatted.
ˎˎIn some cases, some clips can be restored while
others cannot. The restored clips can be played
normally.
ˎˎIf the message “Could not Restore Some Clips”
keeps appearing after repeated attempts at
restoration, it may be possible to restore the SxS
memory card with the following procedure.
[1] Use the application software (page 170)
to copy the required clips to another SxS
memory card.
[2] Format the unusable SxS memory card on
the camcorder.
[3] Copy the required clips back to the newly
formatted SxS memory card.
[Note]
Restoring SxS Memory Cards
If for any reason an error should occur in a memory
card, the card must be restored before use.
When you load an SxS memory card that needs to
be restored, a message appears in the viewfinder
to ask whether you want to restore it.
To execute the restore, turn the MENU knob to
select [Execute], and then press the knob.
The restoration starts.
During restoration, a message is displayed, and the
ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When restoration ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
For restoration of media recorded with this camcorder, be
sure to use this camcorder. Media recorded with a device
other than this camcorder or with another camcorder of
different version (even of the same model) may not be
restored using this camcorder.
000
31
2. Preparation
Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration Data
The following SD cards can be used for saving
configuration data.
Checking the Remaining Capacity
SDHC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or higher,
non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB)
You can check the remaining capacity on an SD
card on the Media Status screen (page 14).
To use an SD card formatted on the camcorder in
the slot of another device, make a backup of the
card, then reformat the card in the device to be
used.
* Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual.
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards
SD cards must be formatted the first time they are
used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be
formatted using the format function of the
camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card
is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card.
1 Select Operation >Format Media >SD
Card(Utility) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to
format the card appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
[Note]
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The card
cannot be restored.
000
32
2. Preparation
Using a Media Adaptor
[Notes]
ˎˎ For professional applications, the use of other media will
not provide the same high reliability and durability that is
obtained using SxS memory cards.
ˎˎ Not all memory cards are guaranteed to work with this
camcorder. For compatible memory cards, contact your
Sony dealer.
XQD Memory Cards
By using an optional QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard
Adaptor, you can insert an XQD memory card into
an SxS memory card slot and use it instead of an
SxS memory card for recording and playback.
For details about using a QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor,
refer to the instruction manual supplied with the adaptor.
[Note]
The following operations may not be available depending on
the type of XQD memory cards used.
ˎˎ High frame rate recording in XAVC-I 3840×2160P, XAVC-L
3840×2160P, and other formats.
ˎˎ High-speed playback
ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion shooting
Formatting (initializing)
XQD memory cards must be formatted the first
time they are used in the camcorder.
XQD memory cards for use in the camcorder
should be formatted using the format function
of the camcorder. If a message appears when the
XQD memory card is inserted into the camcorder,
format the XQD memory card.
If an unformatted XQD memory card or an XQD
memory card that was formatted in a different
specification is inserted, a message asking for
confirmation to format media or a message
notifying you that the media has a different file
system appears.
1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup
menu.
2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B).
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to
format the card appears.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
[Note]
Formatting an XQD memory card erases all data on the card,
including protected video. The data cannot be restored.
Connection between the camcorder and a
computer
Insert the recorded XQD memory card into a slot
in the camcorder, and connect the camcorder to a
computer using a USB cable.
To use a memory card formatted on the
camcorder in the slot of another device
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the
card in the device to be used.
[Note]
If an SD card and other media are inserted in their respective
memory card slots, only the first inserted media is recognized
and the last inserted media is not recognized.
The following SD cards are supported.
SDXC memory cards (SD speed class: Class 10) 1)
SDHC memory cards (SD speed class: Class 10) 2)
1) Supported if the file system is exFAT.
2) Supported if the file system is FAT.
For details about using an MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor, refer to
the instruction manual supplied with the adaptor.
[Notes]
ˎˎ High-speed playback may not be properly achieved with
an SD card.
ˎˎ Seamless playback across clip boundaries is not
supported.
ˎˎ Recording and playback using SD cards is not supported
when shooting in XAVC-I or XAVC-L 3840×2160P format.
ˎˎ Slow motion recording using the Slow & Quick Motion
recording function cannot be used with an SDXC card.
Formatting (initializing)
SD cards must be formatted the first time they are
used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be
formatted using the format function of the
camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card
is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card.
If an unformatted SD card or an SD card that was
formatted in a different specification is inserted, a
message asking for confirmation to format media
or a message notifying you that the media has a
different file system appears.
Format the card using the following procedure.
1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup
SD Cards
By using an optional MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor,
you can insert an SD card into an SxS memory card
slot and use it for recording and playback.
menu.
2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B).
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to
format the card appears.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
[Note]
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card, including
protected video. The data cannot be restored.
Connection between the camcorder and a
computer
Insert the recorded SD card into a slot in the
camcorder, and connect the camcorder to a
computer using a USB cable.
To use a memory card formatted on the
camcorder in the slot of another device
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the
card in the device to be used.
000
33
3. Settings and Adjustments
Format Settings
You can set the file system, system frequency,
and video format using Operation >Format in the
setup menu.
For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 90).
Selecting the File System
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the system
frequency, and press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel]
to cancel, and then press the MENU knob.
The camcorder will reboot automatically after
executing [Execute].
Video Formats
The following recording formats can be selected for different combinations of video resolution and
system frequency.
Video format
File system
System frequency
(Operation >Format >File (Operation >Format
(Operation >Format
>Rec Format in setup menu)
>Frequency in setup menu) System in setup menu)
59.94/50
You can select the file system.
1 Select Operation >Format >File System in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file system,
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel]
to cancel, and then press the MENU knob.
The camcorder will reboot automatically after
executing [Execute].
[Note]
The file system cannot be changed during recording/
playback or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Switching the Video Format
Refer to “Video Formats” (page 33) as required
when switching the video format.
1 Select Operation >Format >Rec Format in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to change the video
format, and press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel]
to cancel, and then press the MENU knob.
Switching the System Frequency
29.97/25/23.98
Picture size
exFAT
UDF
FAT
Yes
–
–
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
3840×2160
Yes
–
–
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
1920×1080
Yes
–
–
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
Yes
–
–
XAVC-I 1280×720P
1280×720
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
3840×2160
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
1920×1080
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P
1280×720
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 35 1080P
1920×1080
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 35 1080i
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 25 1080i
Yes
Yes
–
HD422 50 1080i
Yes
Yes
–
HD422 50 720P
1280×720
Yes
Yes
Yes
HQ 1920×1080i
1920×1080
1920×1080
Yes
Yes
Yes
HQ 1440×1080i
1440×1080
Yes
Yes
Yes
HQ 1280×720P
1280×720
–
–
Yes
SP 1440×1080i
1440×1080
Yes
Yes
–
MPEG IMX 50
720×486/720×576
Yes
Yes
–
DVCAM
720×480/720×576
Yes
–
–
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
3840×2160
You can switch the system frequency as required.
Yes
–
–
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
1920×1080
[Notes]
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
3840×2160
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
1920×1080
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 35 1080P
Yes
Yes
–
HD422 50 1080P
Yes
Yes
–
HD422 50 720P
1280×720
Yes
Yes
Yes
HQ 1920×1080P
1920×1080
ˎˎ The system frequency cannot be changed during
recording/playback or while the thumbnail screen is
displayed.
ˎˎ After switching between 29.97 and 59.94 or between 25
and 50, the camcorder does not reboot automatically.
ˎˎ Switching the system frequency will automatically switch
the video format to the format used previously at that
frequency.
1 Select Operation >Format >Frequency in the
setup menu.
1920×1080
000
34
3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings
SDI OUT Connector, HDMI Output Connector, and VIDEO OUT Connector Output Formats
The signals that can be output from the SDI OUT connector, HDMI output connector, and VIDEO OUT connector are shown in the following table according to the Operation >Format setting in the setup menu.
One line is available when the signal output from the SDI OUT1 to 4 connectors is Quad Link output, up to two lines when the signal output is Dual Link output, and up to four lines when the signal output is Single
output.
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The following restrictions apply when using XAVC proxy recording (“proxy recording” in the following table), when using the network function, or when XAVC Proxy Rec Start is assigned to an assignable switch.
ˋˋ3840×2160P SDI output format setting cannot be selected when recording at 3840×2160P.
ˋˋ720×486 or 720×576i SDI output format setting cannot be selected when recording at 1440×1080i.
ˎˎ If proxy recording or network functions are enabled during operation with 3840×2160P SDI output format setting, the SDI output setting changes to 1920×1080P (Level B).
Operation >Format (codec
omitted) in the setup menu
59.94
3840×2160P
1920×1080P
1920×1080i
1440×1080i
1280×720P
720×480i
SDI output format selectable
Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu
When both proxy
recording and network
functions are off
When proxy recording or
network function is on
SDI Out 1/3 Output
or
SDI Out 2/4 Output
HDMI Output
VIDEO OUT
SDI OUT 1 to 4 connector description
OFF
ON
Yes
No
3840×2160P Square a)
–
HD Sync
–
Quad Link output: 3840×2160 59.94P
Square (Level-B)
Yes
No
3840×2160P 2SI a)
–
HD Sync
–
Quad Link output: 3840×2160 59.94P
2SI (Level-A)
Yes
No
3840×2160P b)
–
HD Sync
–
Dual Link output: 3840×2160 29.97P
2SI (Level-B)
Single output
Proxy recording or network function
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P
HD-Y
HD-Y
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level B)
–
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×486i
720×480i
Composite
Composite f)
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level B)
–
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×486i
720×480i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×486i
720×480i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
No
720×486i
720×480i
Composite
–
Single output
Yes
Yes
1280×720P
1280×720P
HD Sync c)
HD Sync c)
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×486i
720×480i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×486i
720×480i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
Yes
Yes
–
720×480P
Composite
HD-Y
No signal
000
35
3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings
Operation >Format (codec
omitted) in the setup menu
29.97
3840×2160P
1920×1080P
1280×720P
23.98
3840×2160P
1920×1080P
1280×720P
SDI output format selectable
Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu
When both proxy
recording and network
functions are off
When proxy recording or
network function is on
SDI Out 1/3 Output
or
SDI Out 2/4 Output
HDMI Output
OFF
ON
Yes
No
3840×2160P 2SI a)
–
HD Sync
–
Yes
No
3840×2160P b)
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Yes
Yes
720×486i
720×480i
Composite
Composite
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×486i
720×480i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
Yes
Yes
1280×720P
1280×720P
HD-Y
HD-Y d)
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×486i
720×480i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
Yes
No
3840×2160P 2SI
–
HD Sync
–
Yes
No
3840×2160P b)
Dual Link output: 3840×2160 23.98P
2SI (Level-B)
a)
VIDEO OUT
SDI OUT 1 to 4 connector description
Proxy recording or network function
d)
Dual Link output: 3840×2160 29.97P
2SI (Level-B)
Single output
f)
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
–
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i (2-3PD)
1920×1080i (2-3PD)
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×486i (2-3PD)
720×486i (2-3PD)
Composite
Composite f)
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
–
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i (2-3PD)
1920×1080i (2-3PD)
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×486i (2-3PD)
720×486i (2-3PD)
Composite
Composite
Single output
Yes
Yes
1280×720P (2-3PD)
1280×720P (2-3PD)
HD-Y d)
HD-Y d)
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×486i (2-3PD)
720×486i (2-3PD)
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
000
36
3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings
Operation >Format (codec
omitted) in the setup menu
50
3840×2160P
1920×1080P
Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu
When proxy recording or
network function is on
SDI Out 1/3 Output
or
SDI Out 2/4 Output
HDMI Output
VIDEO OUT
SDI OUT 1 to 4 connector description
OFF
ON
Yes
No
3840×2160P Square a)
–
HD Sync
–
Quad Link output: 3840×2160 50P
Square (Level-B)
Yes
No
3840×2160P 2SI a)
–
HD Sync
–
Quad Link output: 3840×2160 50P 2SI
(Level-A)
Yes
No
3840×2160P b)
–
HD Sync
–
Dual Link output: 3840×2160 25P 2SI
(Level-B)
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level B)
–
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×576i
720×576i
Composite
Composite f)
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level B)
–
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Single output
Proxy recording or network function
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Yes
Yes
720×576i
720×576i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×576i
720×576i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
1440×1080i
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
No
720×576i
720×576i
Composite
–
Single output
1280×720P
Yes
Yes
1280×720P
1280×720P
HD Sync c)
HD Sync c)
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×576i
720×576i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×576i
720×576i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
Yes
Yes
–
720×576P
Composite
HD-Y
No signal
Yes
No
3840×2160P 2SI a)
–
HD Sync
–
Yes
No
3840×2160P b)
Dual Link output: 3840×2160 25P 2SI
(Level-B)
Single output
1920×1080i
720×576i
25
SDI output format selectable
When both proxy
recording and network
functions are off
3840×2160P
1920×1080P
1280×720P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Yes
Yes
720×576i
720×576i
Composite
Composite f)
Single output
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080i
HD-Y
HD-Y
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×576i
720×576i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
Yes
Yes
1280×720P
1280×720P
HD-Y
HD-Y d)
Single output
Yes
Yes
720×576i
720×576i
Composite
Composite e)
Single output
a) Enabled when CBKZ-Z450QL (QUAD-LINK 3G-SDI Upgrade License (option)) is installed.
b) Disabled or not displayed when CBKZ-Z450QL (QUAD-LINK 3G-SDI Upgrade License (option)) is installed.
c) 1080i sync signal output.
d) 1080PsF signal output.
e) Character information (superimposed) turns on/off in sync with the SDI Out2/4/HDMI Super character information display switching.
f) Character information (superimposed) turns on/off in sync with the 4K(QFHD) SDI OUT Super character information display switching.
d)
000
37
3. Settings and Adjustments
Expansion of Imaging Dynamic Range
You can set the imaging dynamic range to High
Dynamic Range (HDR) mode to record and output
images with BT.2020 equivalent color space and
increased dynamic range when the recording
format is 4K QFHD or HD.
When this function is used together with the
1-slot Simul Rec function, a 4K QFHD main clip
can be recorded in high dynamic range and an
HD subclip can be recorded in standard dynamic
range (SDR).
The High Dynamic Range function is available if
the file system is exFAT.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Not supported for MPEG IMX and DVCAM file formats.
ˎˎ An SD format signal cannot be output when HDR is
configured. If the signal format is SD and then HDR is
selected, the image is output in the default HD format.
ˎˎ Change the dynamic range mode setting with the Picture
Cache Rec function set to Off.
Operation >Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec >Off
HDR(HLG), the color space is set to ITU-R BT.2020.
You can also specify the HLG type using HLG Look.
For details, see “HLG Look” (page 104).
HDR(S-Log3)
HDR(S-Log3) can be set for both 4K (QFHD) and
HD.
When the high dynamic range mode is set to
HDR(S-Log3), the color space can be set to ITU-R
BT.2020 or S-Gamut3/S-Gamut3.Cine. For details,
see “HDR Setting” (page 95).
SDR Gain
When the HD Rec/Out setting is SDR, this sets the
HD-SDR gain relative to the 4K(QHFD)-HDR value.
This setting is applied to the HD-SDR recording/
output, viewfinder display, and LCD monitor.
Gamma display assist function
Setting the Dynamic Range
1 Select Operation >Base Setting >Shooting
Mode in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the dynamic
range mode.
Select HDR to set to High Dynamic Range or
SDR to set to standard dynamic range.
HDR settings
When HDR is selected for the dynamic range
mode, configure HDR settings using Operation
>HDR Setting in the setup menu. For details, see
page 95.
HDR(HLG)
HDR(HLG) can be set for both 4K (QFHD) and HD.
When the high dynamic range mode is set to
When the HDR function is used, the contrast of
the video shown in the viewfinder and on the LCD
monitor is lower than when using conventional
dynamic range, making the picture harder to
see. In this case, you can adjust the contrast of
the image displayed in the viewfinder and LCD
monitor to an appropriate level using the gamma
display assist function.
The gamma display assist function is automatically
applied when HDR Setting >HD Rec/Out is set to
HDR(HLG) or HLG(S-Log3).
You can also assign the gamma display assist
function to an assignable switch, and then turn
the function on/off with a single button touch as
required.
[Note]
This function is applied to the image in the viewfinder and
LCD monitor. It is not applied to the recorded image or
output image.
000
38
3. Settings and Adjustments
Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance
To ensure excellent image quality when using this
camcorder, conditions may require that both the
black balance and the white balance be adjusted.
Black balance and white balance adjustment
values that are automatically set by the camcorder
and the various settings are stored in the
camcorder memory and retained even when the
power is turned off.
Adjusting the Black Balance
The black balance will require adjustment in the
following cases.
ˎˎWhen the camcorder is used for the first time
ˎˎWhen the camcorder has not been used for a
long time
ˎˎWhen the camcorder is used under conditions
in which the surrounding temperature has
changed greatly
ˎˎWhen the GAIN selector (L/M/H/Turbo) values
have been changed with Operation >Gain
Switch in the setup menu.
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black
balance when using the camcorder after it has
been off.
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are
performed in the following order: black set and
black balance. Manual black balance adjustment
can be selected from the setup menu.
Automatic black balance adjustment is disabled in
the following cases.
ˎˎDuring recording
ˎˎDuring special recording modes
ˎˎWhen the shutter mode is SLS
1 Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.
2 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLACK and
release the switch.
The message “Executing…” appears during
execution, and changes to “OK” when the
adjustment finishes.
Adjustment values are saved to memory
automatically.
[Notes]
ˎˎ During the black balance adjustment, the iris is
automatically closed.
ˎˎ During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection
circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering
on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a fault.
If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be
made
If the black balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Error message
Meaning
NG: Iris not Closed
The lens iris did not close;
adjustment was impossible.
NG: Timeout
Adjustment could not be
completed within the
standard number of
attempts.
1 Set the switches and selectors as shown
below.
ˎˎGAIN switch: L (set to a gain value that is as
small as possible)
ˎˎOUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM
ˎˎWHITE BAL switch: A or B 1)
1) Adjustment values are saved to memory B only when
Operation >White Setting >White Switch<B> in the
setup menu is set to Memory.
2 Set the FILTER knob to suit the lighting
conditions as follows.
3 Place a white test card under the same lighting
conditions as the subject to be shot and zoom
in on it.
Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth
or a wall can be used.
The absolute minimum white area is as
follows.
Rectangle centered on the screen
The lengths of the sides are 70% of the length
and width of the screen. 10% or more of the
surface area of the image within the rectangular
area must be white.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the black balance adjustment.
If the error message occurs again, an internal
check is necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to the
Maintenance Manual (option).
[Note]
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS
connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If this
happens, the black balance will be incorrect.
Adjusting the White Balance
Always readjust the white balance when the
lighting conditions change.
The message “Executing…” appears during
execution, and changes to “OK: (color
temperature of subject)” when the adjustment
finishes.
The adjustment values are saved automatically
in the memory selected in step 1 (A or B).
[Note]
The iris may hunt 1) during the adjustment. To prevent
this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S) on
the lens.
1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of
the image, resulting from repeated response to
automatic iris control.
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.
If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot
be made
If the white balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Error message
Meaning
NG: Low Light
The white video level is too
low. Either open the lens iris or
increase the gain.
NG: High Light
The white video level is too
high. Either stop down the lens
iris or change the ND filter.
NG: Color Temp.
High
The color temperature of the
subject lighting is too high,
and could not be adjusted.
Adjust the color temperature
of the lighting, then update
memory.
NG: Color Temp.
Low
The color temperature of the
subject lighting is too low, and
could not be adjusted. Adjust
the color temperature of the
lighting, then update memory.
[Note]
Make sure there are no bright spots in the rectangle.
4 Adjust the lens iris.
Iris adjusted manually: Set the iris to an
appropriate setting.
Iris adjusted using auto iris: Set the automatic/
manual switch on the lens to automatic.
5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHITE and
then release the switch.
000
39
3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance
Error message
Meaning
NG: Out of Range
Value could not be adjusted
because the difference
between the current value and
reference value exceeds the
adjustment range.
NG: Poor White
Area
The white surface of the
subject is too narrow, and
could not be adjusted.
NG: Timeout
Adjustment could not be
completed within the specified
time.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the white balance adjustment. If the error
message occurs again, an internal check is
necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
If you have no time to adjust the white balance
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
Changing the color temperature when the ND
filter is switched
You can assign electrical CC (color correction)
filters to ND filters (page 5) allowing you to
change the color temperature automatically when
the ND filter is switched.
1 Set Maintenance >White Filter >ND Filter C.
Temp to On in the setup menu (page 113).
2 To assign an electrical CC filter to FILTER knob
position number 1, select [ND FLT C.
Temp<1>]. To assign it to positions 2 to 4,
select [ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>].
3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired
color temperature.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required.
Switching electrical CC filters with an assignable
switch
You can assign the function that switches between
electrical CC filters to an assignable switch. This
allows you to switch between color temperatures
(3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that have been
assigned using up to four positions (A to D) with
each press of the assignable switch.
1 Select Maintenance >White Filter in the setup
menu.
2 Select the position to which to assign a CC
filter by selecting one of [Electrical CC<A>] to
[Electrical CC <D>], and then turn the MENU
knob to select the desired color temperature.
Select “-----” with Electrical CC<C> or <D>
selected.
When the assignable switch is pressed, the
setting for that position is not displayed. For
example, if “-----” is set for one position, then
switching between the remaining three
positions is carried out.
3 Repeat step 2 as required.
4 Assign the electrical CC filter switching
function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an assignable
switch (page 122).
White balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the white
balance is next adjusted, even if the camcorder
power is turned off.
The camcorder has two white balance memories,
A and B. You can automatically save adjustment
values for each ND filter in the memory that
corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch setting (A
or B). The camcorder has four built-in ND filters,
allowing you to save a total of eight adjustment
values (4×2). However, the contents of the
memories are not linked to ND filter settings in the
following case.
ˎˎWhen the number of memories allocated to
each of A and B is limited to one by setting
Operation >White Setting >Filter White Memory
in the setup menu to Off.
Also, when Operation >White Setting >White
Switch<B> in the setup menu is set to [ATW
(Auto Tracing White Balance)], and the WHITE BAL
switch is set to B, the ATW function is activated
to automatically adjust the white balance of the
picture being shot for varying lighting conditions.
000
40
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting the Electronic Shutter
Shutter Modes
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
When a remote control unit, such as the RM-B170, is
connected, only standard mode (Speed) can be selected.
Select this mode for obtaining images with no
horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects
such as monitor screens.
As shown in the following tables, the range of
shutter speeds that can be set varies depending
on whether the Slow & Quick Motion (S&Q)
function is on or off.
Standard mode
System
frequency
Shutter speed (unit: Hz)
S&Q: Off
S&Q: On
59.94i
60.00 to 7000
–
The shutter modes that can be used with the
electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can
be selected are listed below.
[Note]
Select this mode for shooting fast-moving subjects
with little blurring.
You can set the shutter speed in one of two
shutter modes: Speed mode, in which the speed
is set in seconds, and Angle mode, in which the
speed is set in degrees.
Speed mode
System
frequency
Shutter speed (unit: seconds)
59.94i
59.94P
50i
50P
1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000
29.97P
1/40 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
25P
1/33 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
23.98P
1/32 a), 1/48 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/96, 1/100,
1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000
a) This speed cannot be selected when the camcorder is in
Slow & Quick Motion mode and Operation >Rec Function
>Frame Rate in the setup menu is set to a value that is
greater than the system frequency.
Angle mode
180°, 90°, 45°, 22.5°, 11.25°
59.94P
60.00 to 8000
60.00 to 8000
29.97P
30.00 to 8000
30.00 to 8000
23.98P
23.99 to 6000
30.03 to 6000
50i
50.00 to 7000
–
50P
50.00 to 7000
50.00 to 7000
25P
25.02 to 7000
30.00 to 7000
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode
This mode is used to shoot subjects with low
illumination. The number of accumulated frames
shot when using the slow speed shutter function
can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16 using Operation
>Slow Shutter >Number of Frames in the setup
menu.
ˎˎ The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the
current system frequency.
Switching between Speed mode and Angle mode
Setting the Shutter Mode and Shutter
Speed
[Notes]
ˎˎ When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as the
shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of field.
1 Set the shutter mode to ECS (see the previous
item).
1 Select Operation >Shutter >Mode in the setup 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired
menu.
frequency or number of frames.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Speed] or
[Angle], and then press the knob.
Setting the shutter mode and shutter speed
(standard mode)
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained
even when the camcorder power is turned off.
1 Push the SHUTTER switch from ON to SELECT.
The current shutter setting indication appears
in the viewfinder for about three seconds.
2 Before the shutter setting in step 1 disappears,
push the SHUTTER switch down to SELECT
again. Repeat this step until the desired mode
or speed appears.
When all modes and speeds are displayed, the
display changes in the following order.
Speed Mode (with system frequency 59.94i)
[Notes]
ˎˎ SLS mode cannot be used when the camcorder is in Slow
& Quick Motion mode.
ˎˎ It is not possible to turn the SLS mode on or off, or change
the number of accumulated frames when recording.
Setting the shutter speed (ECS mode)
ECS Mode
[Note]
Depending on the frame rate setting (page 50), some
shutter speeds cannot be selected in Slow & Quick Motion
mode. These speeds are replaced by the slowest selectable
shutter speed.
Example when shooting in XAVC-I 1080P/29.97P,
frame rate of 60, and Slow & Quick Motion:
ˎˎSlow & Quick Motion mode: Off
1/401/501/601/100…
ˎˎSlow & Quick Motion mode: On
1/601/100…
Setting the shutter speed (SLS mode)
1 Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Setting in the
setup menu and set the shutter mode to On.
2 Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Number of
Frames in the setup menu and select the
desired number of frames.
000
41
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting Auto Iris
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment
can be changed to aid the shooting of clear
pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blownout highlights.
Convergence
level
Description
–99
Sets the iris 2 f-stops or more
darker
±0
Reference level
+99
Sets the iris 2 f-stops or more
lighter
Setting the Auto Iris Operating Mode
Set the operating mode used when adjusting
levels using auto iris.
1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Mode in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the operating
mode, then press the knob.
Operating
mode
Description
Backlight
Mode for shooting in backlight
conditions
Standard
Standard mode
Spotlight
Mode for reducing blown out
highlights when there are
spotlights centered on a
subject.
Set the target convergence level for
auto iris
1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Level in the setup
menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the level in the
range –99 to +99, then press the knob.
Setting the auto iris speed
Set the operating speed when adjusting levels
using auto iris.
1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Speed in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the speed in the
range –99 (slowest) to +99 (fastest), then press
the knob.
3 Turn the MENU knob to change the reference
value.
[Note]
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not
ECS.
The current reference value is shown by the iris
position indicator (page 16) on the
viewfinder screen.
ˎˎTo open the iris slightly, turn the MENU
knob counterclockwise as seen from the
front of the camcorder.
Select one of +0.25, +0.5, +0.75, or +1.
ˎˎTo close the iris slightly, turn the MENU
knob clockwise as seen from the front of the
camcorder.
Select one of –0.25, –0.5, –0.75, or –1.
The changed reference value is retained until
the power of the camcorder is turned off. Even
if the reference value is changed, it reverts to
the standard value every time the power is
turned on.
Changing the Reference Value of the
Lens Iris
Setting the Auto Iris Detection
Window
The reference value for the lens iris can be set
within the following range with respect to the
standard value.
ˎˎ+0.25 to +1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1
stop further open
ˎˎ–0.25 to –1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1
stop further closed
Also you can set the area where light detection
occurs.
1 Set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
1 Set Operation >Auto Iris >Iris Override in the
setup menu to On.
2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
Indication in the setup menu to On.
The current automatic iris window appears on
the viewfinder screen.
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris
window on the screen, set to Off.
2 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
in the setup menu.
3 Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris
window appears, and then press the knob.
The shaded parts indicate the area of
light detection.
If you select Var, the following items become
effective and you can set the window of the
desired size. Set Operation >Auto Iris >Iris Var
Width, Iris Var Height, Iris Var, Iris Var H Position,
and Iris Var V Position in the setup menu.
Item
Setting
Iris Var Width
The width of the window
Iris Var Height
The height of the window
Iris Var H
Position
The position of the window
in the horizontal direction
Iris Var V
Position
The position of the window
in the vertical direction.
When you exit the menu, the auto iris window
selected in step 3 appears.
Unless you need to keep this window displayed,
set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
Indication in the setup menu to Off.
Reducing the Effect of Bright
Highlights
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too
much, leaving the overall image dark, a condition
known as clipped blacks. In such cases, switching
the clip highlight function on will clip the signal
above a certain level, reducing the effects of the
auto iris.
Set Operation >Auto Iris >Clip High Light in the
setup menu to On.
000
42
3. Settings and Adjustments: Setting Auto Iris
Adjusting the Iris Gain on the Lens
Supplied with the PXW-Z450KC
1 Set the iris mode switch to the A (auto)
position.
2 Flip off the rubber cap of the iris gain
adjustment trimmer.
3 Turn the iris gain adjustment trimmer using a
screwdriver, or similar object, to adjust the
gain.
Turn clockwise to increase the gain. Turn
counterclockwise to decrease the gain.
Adjust while watching the iris ring on the lens
body.
4 Reattach the rubber cap.
000
43
3. Settings and Adjustments
Adjusting the Audio Level
When you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO,
the input levels of analog audio signals recorded
on each channel are adjusted automatically. You
can also make manual adjustments.
[Note]
Even if you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO, the input
levels of digital audio signals are not adjusted automatically.
Target Audio Level for Manual
Adjustment
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level.
If the audio level meter shows a maximum level of
0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level is
excessive.
Excessive input level
2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es)
corresponding to the channel(s) selected in
step 1 to MANUAL.
3 With the LEVEL knob(s) for the channel(s)
selected in step 1, adjust so that the audio
level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal
input volume.
Selecting the knob used for adjusting the
recording level
In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu, you
can select which audio level control controls
the audio recording level of the input to each
of the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors. The
correspondences between the settings of the
menu items and the controls are as follows.
[Note]
If an AES/EBU digital audio signal is input, the recording level
cannot be adjusted using the camcorder.
Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels
of the Audio Inputs from the AUDIO
IN CH-1/CH-2 Connectors
1 To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN
CH-1 or CH-2 connector, set the AUDIO IN CH1
or CH2 switch to REAR.
To adjust both input signals, set both switches
to REAR.
1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch(es)
2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the
desired channel(s) selected in step 1 to
MANUAL.
3 Turn the MIC LEVEL knob, and adjust so that
the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a
normal input volume.
Selecting the knob used for adjusting the
recording level
Setting
Knob
Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Setting
Knob
Front+Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked operation)
Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked operation)
Rear2/WRR Level: Channel 2 recording level
Setting
Knob
Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob
MIC CH2 Level: Channel 2 recording level
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Setting
Knob
Front+Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked operation)
Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked operation)
[Note]
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs
and MIC LEVEL knob linked together, if the MIC LEVEL knob
is set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be
recorded. Check the position of the MIC LEVEL knob before
adjusting the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs.
[Note]
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL knob and LEVEL
(CH1/CH2) knobs linked together, if the LEVEL (CH1/CH2)
knobs are set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2
cannot be recorded. Check the position of the LEVEL (CH1/
CH2) knobs before adjusting the MIC LEVEL knob.
to FRONT.
In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu, you
can select which audio level control controls the
audio recording level of the front microphone
input. The correspondences between the settings
of the menu items and the controls are as follows.
MIC CH1 Level: Channel 1 recording level
Rear1/WRR Level: Channel 1 recording level
Target input level
Manually Adjusting the Audio Level
of the MIC IN Connector
Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4
1 Select the audio recorded on audio channels 3
and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4 switches.
CH3 switch
Channel 3 recording target
FRONT
Front microphone audio
REAR
Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
CH1 connector
WIRELESS
Wireless microphone audio
CH4 switch
Channel 4 recording target
FRONT
Front microphone audio
REAR
Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
CH2 connector
Wireless microphone audio
WIRELESS
2 To adjust automatically, set the AUDIO SELECT
CH 3-4 switch to AUTO.
To adjust manually, set the AUDIO SELECT CH
3-4 switch to MANUAL.
3 Select the knobs that adjust the audio levels with
the Audio CH3 Level and Audio CH4 Level items
under Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu.
Audio CH3 Level: Channel 3 recording level
Setting
Knob
Side3
LEVEL (CH3) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side3
LEVEL (CH3) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
000
44
3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Audio Level
Audio CH4 Level: Channel 4 recording level
Setting
Knob
Side4
LEVEL (CH4) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side4
LEVEL (CH4) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
You can now adjust the levels of audio
channels 3 and 4 with the knobs selected here.
000
45
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting Time Data
Setting the Timecode
The timecode setting range is from 00:00:00:00 to
23:59:59:29 (hours:minutes:seconds:frames).
1 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch
the display in the LCD monitor to status
display.
2 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
3 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
PRESET.
4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
The first (leftmost) digit of the timecode
flashes.
5 Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right arrow
buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat
until all digits are set.
To reset the value to 00:00:00:00, press the
RESET/RETURN button.
6 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or
R-RUN.
F-RUN: Free run (timecode generator keeps
running)
R-RUN: Recording run (timecode generator
runs only while recording)
[Note]
When Picture Cache Rec mode is active, time data cannot be
set by switching the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. To set
time data, turn Picture Cache Rec mode off.
Switching between DF and NDF
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or
non-drop frame (NDF) mode using Maintenance
>Timecode >DF/NDF in the setup menu.
To make the timecode consecutive
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to
R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the
media normally produces consecutive timecode.
However, once you remove the media and record
on another media, the timecode will no longer
be consecutive when you use the original media
again for recording.
In this case, to make the timecode consecutive, set
the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN.
Saving the real time in the timecode
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode. The
time of the camcorder internal clock is applied as
the real time.
For details about adjusting the internal clock, see “Setting the
Date and Time of the Internal Clock” (page 25).
Setting the User Bits
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal
digits), you can record user information such as
the date, time, or scene number on the timecode
track.
To reset the value to 00 00 00 00, press the
RESET/RETURN button.
5 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or
R-RUN, corresponding to the desired operating
mode for the timecode generator.
User bit memory function
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is
automatically retained in memory even when the
power is turned off.
Synchronizing the Timecode to an
External Source
You can synchronize the internal timecode
generator of this camcorder with an external
generator. You can also synchronize the timecode
generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the
internal generator of this camcorder.
1 Connect both the reference video signal and
the external timecode as illustrated below.
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external
signal
1 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.
4 Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right arrow
buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat
until all digits are set.
[1] VIDEO OUT connector
[2] TC OUT connector
[3] TC IN connector
[4] GENLOCK IN connector
2 Turn on the POWER switch.
3 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
PRESET.
the display in the LCD monitor to status
display.
2 Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.
3 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
To next camcorder
[1]
[2]
External timecode
Reference video signal
[1] GENLOCK IN connector
[2] TC IN connector
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of
camcorders with one camcorder as reference
4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.
5 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
6 Supply a timecode signal and a reference
video signal, complying with the SMPTE
standard and in proper phase relationship, to
the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN
connector, respectively.
000
46
3. Settings and Adjustments: Setting Time Data
This operation synchronizes the internal
timecode generator with the external
timecode. Once about ten seconds have
elapsed after the timecode locks, the external
lock state is maintained even if the external
timecode source is disconnected.
To release the external synchronization, first
stop the external timecode input, then set the
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you finish the above procedure, the internal
timecode is immediately synchronized with the external
timecode and the time data display will show the value of
the external timecode. However, wait for a few seconds
until the sync generator stabilizes before recording.
ˎˎ If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the
same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the
camcorder cannot be correctly genlocked. If this occurs,
the timecode will not acquire successful lock with the
external timecode.
User bit settings during synchronization
When the timecode is synchronized to an external
signal, only the time data is synchronized with the
external timecode value.
Note on changing the power supply from the
battery pack to an external power supply during
external synchronization
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect
the external power supply to the DC IN connector
before removing the battery pack. You may lose
timecode external synchronization if you remove
the battery pack first.
Camcorder genlock during external
synchronization
During external synchronization, the camcorder is
genlocked to the reference video signal input from
the GENLOCK IN connector.
000
47
4. Shooting
Basic Operations
This section explains the basic shooting and
recording procedures.
Before starting to shoot, inspect the camera
system to verify that it is operating properly.
1 Attach a fully charged battery pack
(page 22).
2 Load one or two SxS memory cards
(page 29).
If you load two cards, the camcorder switches
automatically to the second card when the
first card becomes full.
3 Set the camcorder’s POWER switch
(page 3) to ON.
4 Make the following settings.
Marker display: On (page 99)
Iris: Auto (page 41)
Zoom: Auto
Camera output: Select the picture currently
being shot (camera picture), and turn the
DCC function on (page 6)
Timecode advance mode: F-RUN (Free Run) or
R-RUN (Rec Run) (page 45)
Audio input channel selection: Auto
(page 9)
5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the BLACK
position to adjust the black balance
(page 38).
6 Select a filter according to the lighting
conditions, and adjust the white balance
(page 38).
7 Point the camcorder at the subject, and adjust
the focus and zoom.
8 If you are using the electronic shutter, select an
appropriate shutter mode and speed
(page 40).
9 Do one of the following to start recording.
–– Press the REC START button (page 4).
–– Press the VTR button on the lens.
–– Turn on the assignable switch to which the
Rec function has been assigned (page 121).
During recording, the TALLY indicators, the
tally indicator on the front panel of the
viewfinder, and the REC indicator on the
viewfinder screen light. Adjust the zoom and
focus as required.
the button to play the clip from that point at
normal speed. The clip is played to the end,
then Rec Review ends and the camcorder
returns to Stby mode.
When the Rec Review function is assigned to
the RET button on the lens, you can also
conduct a review by using the RET button.
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 to continue recording.
With each repetition, another clip is created on
the memory card.
Clip 1
[Notes]
ˎˎ Never remove the battery pack while the camcorder
is recording (while the ACCESS indicator on the
right-side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS indicator
in the card slot section is lit in orange). Doing so
risks the loss of several seconds of data before
the recording was interrupted, because internal
processing will not end normally.
ˎˎ The playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F FWD,
NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, STOP) do not function
during recording.
10 To stop recording, perform one of the
operations listed in step 9.
The TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on the
front panel of the viewfinder, and the REC
indicator on the viewfinder screen go out, and
camcorder enters recording standby (Stby)
mode.
A clip is created from the video and audio data
and the metadata recorded between steps 9
and 10.
To review the recording (rec review)
With the camcorder in recording standby
mode, press an assignable switch assigned
with the Rec Review function to play back the
last two seconds of the clip at normal speed.
Press and hold an assignable switch assigned
with the Rec Review function for one second
or longer to start play back from the frame two
seconds prior to the last frame at four times
speed in the reverse direction. Then, release
Clip 2
Clip 3
The four-digit number at the end of clip names is
generated automatically, incrementing as clips are
recorded.
Playing Recorded Clips
1 Insert the SxS memory card to play
(page 29).
2 Press the PREV button (page 8) or the F REV
button (page 7) to cue up the clip to play.
[Notes]
ˎˎ You cannot resume recording for about one second after
stopping recording.
ˎˎ The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on
one memory card is 600. Even if the memory card has
enough free capacity to record more clips, when 600 clips
have been recorded, no further recording is possible.
ˎˎ Clips shorter than 2 seconds cannot be created. For
example, even if recording is started and then stopped
within 2 seconds, the recording continues for a duration
of 2 seconds. Also, if recording is started, immediately
stopped, and then restarted within 2 seconds of the initial
recording start, two clips are created.
ˎˎ The maximum continuous recording time spanning
several memory cards is 24 hours. When 24 hours have
elapsed, recording stops.
Clip names
Eight-character clips names (consisting of a
four-character prefix and a four-digit number) are
generated automatically for clips recorded by this
camcorder.
Example: ABCD0001
You can also use Operation >Clip >Title Prefix
in the setup menu to set the clip name prefix
to a user-specified string of characters (four to
46 characters in length). (A user-specified prefix
cannot be changed after recording.)
3 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator lights, and the
playback picture appears in the viewfinder.
Seamless playback
Seamless playback across clip boundaries is
supported if each clip recorded on an SxS PRO+,
SxS PRO X, or XQD-G series memory card has the
following status.
ˎˎVideo format is XAVC-I/XAVC-L (HD) and clip
length is 4 seconds or longer, or video format
is XAVC-I/XAVC-L (QFHD) and clip length is 8
seconds or longer
ˎˎVideo format is MPEG HD and clip length is 2
seconds or longer
[Notes]
ˎˎ For SxS-1 cards, double the length described above is
required.
ˎˎ Seamless playback not supported for SD cards.
Pausing playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play is
paused.
Press the button again to return to play mode.
000
48
4. Shooting: Basic Operations
High-speed playback
Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F REV
button (page 7).
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
Stopping playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the
camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops and
the thumbnail screen (page 81) appears in
the viewfinder.
Playback also stops and the timecode screen
appears in the viewfinder when you start
recording during playback, and when you eject an
SxS memory card.
Switching between memory cards
When two memory cards are loaded, press the
SLOT SELECT button (page 29) to select the
active slot.
It is not possible to switch between memory cards
during playback.
000
49
4. Shooting
Advanced Operations
Recording Shot Marks
On this camcorder, two types of shot marks are
available. You can record them at user-specified
positions to make it easier for editors to cue up
those positions.
The maximum number of shot marks per clip is
999.
You can also use the Thumbnail menu to add and delete shot
marks in clips. For details, see “Adding/Deleting Essence Marks in
Clips” (page 85).
To record shot marks, turn on an assignable switch
assigned with the Shot Mark 1 or Shot Mark 2
function.
When a shot mark is recorded, a “Shot Mark 1” or
“Shot Mark 2” indication appears in the viewfinder
for about three seconds near the timecode
indicator.
[Note]
An SD card inserted in an SxS card slot using the MEAD-SD02
Media Adaptor (option) cannot be used for recording.
Recording Retroactive Images
(Picture Cache Rec Function)
The camcorder always maintains a cache of video
and audio data for a set interval (maximum of
15 seconds) in internal storage memory when
shooting, allowing you to record several seconds
of footage before the start of recording.
For details about the video formats supported for
this function, see “Special Recording Support by
Recording Format” (page 163).
To start recording in Picture Cache Rec mode,
Picture Cache Rec mode and the storage time of
images in memory (Picture Cache Rec time) must
be set beforehand in the Operation menu.
When recording is started, the duration of footage
that can be recorded retroactively is determined
by the Picture Cache Rec time. The duration that
can be recorded retroactively may be reduced
in some circumstances, as described in [Notes]
below.
[Notes]
Setting Clip Flags
To make it easier for editors to select good clips,
you can set clip flags in recorded clips.
Clip flags are set in the Thumbnail menu. For
details, see “Adding Clip Flags to Clips” (page 85)
and “Deleting a Clip Flag” (page 85).
[Note]
An SD card inserted in an SxS card slot using the MEAD-SD02
Media Adaptor (option) cannot be used for recording.
ˎˎ The storage of video in memory starts when Picture
Cache Rec mode is selected. However, if recording is
started immediately after selecting this mode, a portion
of the images shot immediately prior to selecting Picture
Cache Rec mode will not be recorded.
ˎˎ Images are not stored in memory during playback,
recording review, or thumbnail display, so recording of
images during these periods is not supported.
Setting the Picture Cache Rec time
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Picture
Cache Rec in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
3 Select Operation >Rec Function > Cache Rec
Time in the setup menu.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select the Picture
Cache Rec time setting, then press the knob.
The options will vary depending on the
recording format and system frequency
settings. See “Picture Cache Rec Mode
Settings” (page 164) in the Appendix.
Once Picture Cache Rec mode is selected, it is
maintained until the settings are changed.
Alternatively, instead of performing steps 1 and 2,
you can also select Picture Cache Rec mode using
an assignable switch (page 121) which has been
assigned with the Picture Cache Rec function.
[Notes]
ˎˎ With the exception of some functions a), only one special
recording function, such as Picture Cache Rec, can be
used at any one time.
ˎˎ With the exception of some functions a), if another special
recording mode is enabled while Picture Cache Rec is in
use, Picture Cache Rec is automatically released.
ˎˎ Changing system settings, such as the video format,
clears all images stored in memory. Consequently, images
shot just before changing settings cannot be recorded, if
recording is started immediately after changing settings.
Picture Cache Rec mode is automatically released.
ˎˎ The Picture Cache Rec time cannot be set during
recording.
a) When XAVC-L QFHD format is selected, Picture Cache Rec
is also supported in 1-slot Simul Rec mode.
Starting Picture Cache Rec recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 47).
When recording starts, the “Cache” indication in
the viewfinder changes to the “Rec” indication.
The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on
the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do
during normal recording.
To exit, stop the recording.
Canceling Picture Cache Rec mode
In recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec
Function >Picture Cache Rec in the setup menu to Off.
Device operation when recording in Picture Cache
Rec mode
The recording procedure is essentially the same,
except for the following points where operation
varies from normal.
ˎˎIf recording is started while accessing media,
the actual start point of recording may be
delayed even longer than the set Picture Cache
Rec time. The delay increases with the number
of recorded clips, so stopping recording and
quickly restarting recording should be avoided
in Picture Cache Rec mode.
ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN
mode.
ˎˎIn Picture Cache Rec mode, time data cannot be
set by switching the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch
to SET.
To set time data, first stop Picture Cache Rec
mode.
ˎˎIf the remaining recording time of the media
in the currently selected slot is shorter than the
Picture Cache Rec time, images are recorded
to the media (if there is sufficient remaining
recording time) in the non-selected slot.
However, images are not recorded if there is no
media in the non-selected slot or if the media
in the slot has insufficient remaining recording
time. (A message notifying you that there
is insufficient remaining recording time will
appear on the viewfinder screen.)
ˎˎShot marks are not recorded, even if the
shot marks are set before the recording start
operation.
If the camcorder is turned off during recording
ˎˎIf the POWER switch on the camcorder is set
to the OFF position, the media is accessed for
several seconds to record the images stored
in memory up till that moment, and then the
power turns off automatically.
000
50
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
ˎˎIf the battery is removed, the DC cable
disconnected, or the AC adaptor turned off
during recording, the video and audio data
stored in memory is erased, and images up till
that point are not recorded. Care should be
exercised when exchanging the battery.
Recording Time-lapse Video (Interval
Rec Function)
The camcorder’s Interval Rec function allows you
to capture time-lapse video to the camcorder’s
internal memory. This function is an effective way
to shoot slow-moving subjects.
When you start recording, the camcorder
automatically records a specified number of
frames at a specified interval time.
This function is enabled when the camcorder is set
to any of the following video formats (page 33).
XAVC-I
XAVC-L
MPEG HD 422
Recording interval (Interval Time)
A pre-lighting function is available when Interval
Rec is enabled. This function automatically turns
on the video light before recording starts, which
allows you to record pictures under stable light
and color temperature conditions.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Interval Rec
recording, can be used at any one time.
If another special recording mode is enabled while
Interval Rec is in use, for example, Interval Rec is
automatically released.
ˎˎ Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during recording.
Setting Interval Rec
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Interval Rec
in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
The camcorder enters Interval Rec mode, and
“Int Stby” appears at the REC indicator position
on the viewfinder screen. (The green tally
indicator in the HDVF series viewfinder also
flashes.)
3 Select [Number of Frames], turn the MENU
knob to select the number of frames to record
in one take, and then press the knob.
You can select 2, 6, or 12 when the format is
50P or 59.9P.
You can select 1, 3, 6, or 9 when the format is
23.98P, 25P, 29.97P, 50i, or 59.94i.
4 Select [Interval Time], turn the MENU knob to
select the desired interval, and then press the
knob.
You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec, 1
to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, or 1 to 4/6/12/24
hour.
Number of frames in one take
(Number of Frames)
5 As required, select [Pre-Lighting], turn the
MENU knob to select the length of lighting
time before recording starts, and then press
the knob.
You can select 2, 5, 10 seconds, or Off.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If you want to turn the video light on before the start
of recording, set the camcorder’s LIGHT switch to
AUTO. The video light switch must also be turned on.
When this is done, the video light turns on and off
automatically. However, the video light remains lit if
the time that it would be off is five seconds or less.
ˎˎ If you set the LIGHT switch to MANUAL and turn the
video light switch on, the video light is always lit. (The
video light does not turn on and off automatically.)
The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when it is
powered off, but the number of frames, interval
time, and pre-lighting settings are maintained. You
do not need to set them again the next time you
shoot in Interval Rec mode.
Starting Interval Rec recording
Make the settings and preparations described
in “Basic Operations” (page 47), secure the
camcorder so that it does not move, and begin
shooting.
When Interval Rec mode is set to On, “Int Stby”
appears at the REC position on the viewfinder
screen. When you start recording, “Int Rec” and
“Int Stby” are displayed alternately. The TALLY
indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel
of the viewfinder light as they do during normal
recording. (The green tally indicator in the HDVF
series viewfinder also flashes at high speed.)
If you are using the pre-lighting function, the video
light comes on before recording starts.
To exit, stop the recording.
When shooting ends, the video data stored in
memory up to that point is written to the media.
Canceling Interval Rec mode
Do one of the following.
ˎˎSet the POWER switch to OFF.
ˎˎIn recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec
Function >Interval Rec in the setup menu to Off.
[Note]
Restarting the camcorder automatically releases Interval Rec
mode.
Limitations during recording
ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the advance mode of the internal
timecode generator is always R-RUN.
ˎˎAudio is not recorded.
ˎˎReviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not
possible.
ˎˎGenlock is not possible.
If the camcorder is turned off during recording
ˎˎIf the POWER switch on the camcorder is set
to the OFF position, the media is accessed for
several seconds to record the images stored
in memory up till that moment, and then the
power turns off automatically.
ˎˎIf power is lost because the battery was
removed, the DC power cord was disconnected,
or the power was turned off on the AC adaptor
side, then the video and audio data shot up to
that point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds).
Care should be exercised when exchanging the
battery.
Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion
You can specify a recording frame rate that is
different from the playback frame rate.
000
51
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
[Note]
When shooting in XAVC recording format, use SxS PRO+
type SxS memory cards.
Recording
format
System frequency S&Q frame rate
XAVC-I 3840P 59.94P/50P/
29.97P/23.98P/
XAVC-I 1080P 25P
1 FPS to 60 FPS
(1 FPS units)
XAVC-L 3840P
XAVC-L 50
1080P
then press the knob.
When you finish making these settings, the system
frequency and the frame rate appear at the top of
the viewfinder screen. You can change the frame
rate while viewing the display in the viewfinder by
turning the MENU knob.
The Slow & Quick Motion mode setting and the
frame rate are retained even after the camcorder is
powered off.
[Notes]
XAVC-L 35
1080P
HD422 50
1080P a)
4 Turn the MENU knob to select the frame rate,
29.97P
23.98P
25P
1 FPS to 30 FPS
(1 FPS units)
1 FPS to 25 FPS
(1 FPS units)
a) exFAT and UDF files systems are supported. Only exFAT is
supported for other recording formats.
By shooting with a frame rate that differs from
the playback frame rate, you can obtain slow and
quick motion effects that are smoother than lowspeed or high-speed playback of content recorded
at the normal frame rate.
Setting Slow & Quick Motion
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick
Motion in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
Slow & Quick Motion starts, and “S&Q Stby”
appears in the recording status indicator area
in the viewfinder.
Next, set the frame rate.
3 Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick
Motion >Frame Rate in the setup menu.
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Slow & Quick
Motion, can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ If another special recording function is enabled while
using Slow & Quick Motion, Slow & Quick Motion is
automatically canceled.
ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set during recording,
playback, or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set if the slow shutter
function is set.
Starting Slow & Quick Motion recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 47).
When recording starts, the “S&Q Stby” indication
in the viewfinder changes to the “S&Q Rec”
indication. The TALLY indicators and the tally
indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light
as they do during normal recording.
To exit, stop the recording.
[Note]
It takes longer than normal for recording to stop when the
frame rate is set to a low value (for a slow frame rate).
Canceling Slow & Quick Motion mode
With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick in the
setup menu to Off.
Limitations during recording
Setting Clip Continuous Rec
ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the advance mode of the internal
timecode generator is always R-RUN.
ˎˎAudio cannot be recorded when the recording
and playback frame rates differ.
ˎˎReviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not
possible.
ˎˎIf you change the recording frame rate to a
value faster than the current shutter speed, the
shutter speed is changed to the slowest value
for which shooting is possible.
Example: If the frame rate is 32 and the shutter
speed is 1/40, and you change the frame rate to
55, then the shutter speed is changed to 1/60.
It is not possible to select a shutter speed that is
slower than the recording frame rate.
ˎˎGenlock is not possible.
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Clip
Continuous Rec in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
“Cont Stby” appears in the viewfinder, and the
function is enabled.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Clip
Continuous Rec, can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while Clip
Continuous Rec is in use, for example, the currently
selected mode is automatically released.
You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on/off
function to one of the ASSIGN. 1/2/3 switches,
ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, or the ONLINE button.
For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches”
(page 121).
Recording with the Clip Continuous
Rec Function
Normally, a clip is created as an independent file
each time that you start and stop recording. But
this function allows you to start and stop recording
while continuously recording to the same clip, for
as long as the function remains enabled. This is
convenient when you do not want to generate a
large number of short clips, and when you want
to record without worrying about exceeding the
clip limit.
It is still easy to find recording start points, because
a Rec Start essence mark is recorded at the
recording start point each time you start recording.
This function is enabled when the camcorder is set
to any of the following video formats (page 33).
XAVC-I (excluding XAVC-I 3840×2160P)
XAVC-L (excluding XAVC-L 3840×2160P)
MPEG HD 422
Starting Clip Continuous Rec recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 47).
When recording starts, the “Cont Stby” indication
in the viewfinder changes to “Cont Rec”
indication.
The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on
the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do
during normal recording.
[Note]
During recording or in recording standby mode (when
“Cont Stby” indication is displayed), if you remove the media,
the battery, or the power source, the media needs to be
restored. It is not possible to restore media on a device other
than this camcorder.
Exit Clip Continuous Rec mode (page 52) and then remove
the media.
When “Cont Stby” indication is flashing (once per second),
you can remove the media.
To exit, stop the recording.
000
52
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
[Note]
Stop the recording after recording for two or more seconds.
Canceling Clip Continuous Rec mode
With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set Operation >Rec Function >Clip Continuous
Rec in the setup menu to Off.
Limitations during recording
A single continuous clip cannot be created if you
perform one of the following operations while the
camcorder is in recording or recording standby
mode. (A new clip will be created when you next
start recording.)
ˎˎOperate on a clip (lock, delete, or rename a clip)
ˎˎSwitch slots
ˎˎChange the recording format
ˎˎTurn off the POWER switch
ˎˎPlayback
ˎˎSwitch to the thumbnail screen
Recording Video Simultaneously to
Two SxS Memory Cards (2-slot Simul
Rec)
When the video format (page 33) is set to one of
the options in the following table, you can record
the same video to two SxS memory cards. This
function is useful for making a video backup while
shooting.
[Notes]
ˎˎ It is recommended that both SxS memory cards be
formatted (initialized) using the camcorder before use.
ˎˎ Simultaneous recording is not supported when the file
system is UDF.
ˎˎ SD cards cannot be used.
Operation >Format
>Rec Format in the
setup menu
Operation >Format
>Frequency in the setup
menu
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
59.94/59/29.97/25/23.98
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
59.94/50
XAVC-I 1280×720P
59.94/50
XAVC-L 50
1920×1080P
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
XAVC-L 50
1920×1080i
59.94/50
Starting 2-slot Simul Rec recording
1 Insert SxS memory cards in both memory slots
A and B.
The ACCESS indicators for SxS slots A and B are
lit. Also, icons for SxS slots A and B appear in
the viewfinder (page 19).
XAVC-L 35 1080P
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
XAVC-L 35 1080i
59.94/50
XAVC-L 25 1080i
59.94/50
HD 422 50 1080P
29.97/25/23.98
HD 422 50 1080i
59.94/50
HD 422 50 720P
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
HQ 1920×1080P
29.97/25/23.98
HQ 1920×1080i
59.94/50
HQ 1440×1080i
59.94/50
HQ 1280×720P
59.94/50
the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
[Notes]
MPEG HD422
1920×1080P
59.94, 50
MPEG HD422
1920×1080i
[Notes]
Setting 1-slot Simul Rec
ˎˎ Simultaneous recording is not possible if either of the
media is defective or if the media is write protected.
ˎˎ During simultaneous recording, if either of the media
becomes full or an error occurs and recording cannot
continue, recording to that media stops but recording to
the other media continues.
To exit, stop the recording.
Canceling 2-slot Simul Rec mode
In recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec
Function >Simul Rec in the setup menu to Off.
Recording 4K and HD Clips
Simultaneously to One SxS Memory
Card (1-slot Simul Rec)
the knob.
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as 2-slot Simul
Rec, can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while using
2-slot Simul Rec, 2-slot Simul Rec is automatically released.
ˎˎ 2-slot Simul Rec cannot be set during recording, playback,
or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
ˎˎXAVC-I 3840×2160P 29.97, 25,
ˎˎXAVC-L 3840×2160P 23.98
[Note]
Setting 2-slot Simul Rec
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Simul Rec in
System
Recording
frequency format of
subclip
2 Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 47).
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P 59.94/50
Recording format of
main clip
This function allows you to record large file size
4K QFHD video (main clip) and small file size HD
video (subclip), that can be used for pre-editing,
simultaneously to a single SxS memory card.
The recording format of SxS cards that can be used
for 1-slot Simul Rec is 4K QFHD (XAVC-I QFHD or
XAVC-L QFHD).
The picture size and recording format of subclips
vary with the system frequency.
SD cards cannot be used in 1-slot Simul Rec mode.
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >4K & HD
(Sub) Rec in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
[Notes]
ˎˎ With the exception of some functions a), only one special
recording function, such as 1-slot Simul Rec, can be used
at any one time.
ˎˎ With the exception of some functions a), if another special
recording mode is enabled while using 1-slot Simul Rec,
1-slot Simul Rec is automatically released.
ˎˎ 1-slot Simul Rec cannot be set during recording, playback,
or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
a) When XAVC-L QFHD format is selected, Picture Cache Rec
is also supported in 1-slot Simul Rec mode.
Starting 1-slot Simul Rec recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 47).
During recording, “/Sub” is displayed on the right
of the recording format (codec) indicator on the
viewfinder screen (page 17).
To exit, stop the recording.
Canceling 1-slot Simul Rec mode
With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set Operation >Rec Function >4K & HD (Sub) Rec
in the setup menu to Off.
000
53
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
Playback of subclip recording format
1 Select Operation >Input/Output >Output
Format >HD 1920×1080 in the setup menu.
2 Select Operation >Rec Function >HD (Sub)
Playback Mode >On in the setup menu.
3 Press the PLAY button to start playback.
In this mode, only subclips can be played. The
4K QFHD main clips are skipped.
Subclips can also be selected on the
thumbnail screen.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Subclips cannot be played when the 1-slot Simul Rec
function is set to Off.
ˎˎ Thumbnail menu clip operations (page 81) on
the thumbnail screen apply to the main clip. Subclip
operations are not supported. To perform operations
on a subclip, copy it as a main clip as described in
“Copying and Saving a Subclip as a Main Clip” below,
and then perform clip operations.
Copying and Saving a Subclip as a
Main Clip
You can copy a subclip created using 1-slot Simul
Rec and save it as a main clip on other media.
1 Load the media on which the subclip created
using 1-slot Simul Rec was recorded into a
card slot.
2 Load media in the other card slot.
3 Select Thumbnail >Copy Sub Clip >All Clips in
the setup menu.
[Note]
Subclips cannot be selected individually.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
All subclips are copied as main clips, and a
completion message appears.
6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
000
54
4. Shooting
Proxy Data
Proxy data is made up of low-resolution video data
(H.264) and audio data (AAC-LC). This lightweight
proxy data can be used in the same way as the
original data, but it can be transferred more
quickly, for more efficient viewing and editing.
During clip recording, proxy data is recorded onto
the SD card inserted into the PROXY SD card slot.
PROXY SD card slot
By importing proxy data recorded on the SD
card into a computer, you can quickly check the
recorded content or perform rapid offline editing.
You can record proxy data not only simultaneously
when recording on SxS memory cards, but also
independently from recording to SxS memory
cards.
then turn off the camcorder or turn off the proxy
recording/wireless LAN connection function.
To turn off the proxy recording/wireless LAN
connection function, make the following
settings in the setup menu.
– Set Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
>Setting to Off.
– Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to Off.
ˎˎAttempting to remove the SD card while either
the proxy recording or wireless LAN connection
function is enabled may display a warning
(E91-1C0) in some cases. If the warning appears
while recording, data is still recorded correctly
to the SxS memory cards, but proxy files are not
recorded. The warning message can be cleared
by turning the camcorder off and then on again.
ˎˎProxy recording will not start if Picture Cache
Rec, Interval Rec, Slow & Quick Motion, or
streaming is enabled.
ˎˎProxy recording cannot be performed when the
SDI output format is set to 3840×2160P.
SD Cards
1 Select Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
>Setting in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
3 Select Operation >Format Media >SD
Card(Proxy) in the setup menu.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to
format the card appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message and progress
state (%) is displayed and the ACCESS indicator
is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
[Note]
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The card
cannot be restored.
Proxy Recording using the Camcorder
ˎˎWhen recording simultaneously, proxy
recording will not start unless an SxS memory
card is inserted.
ˎˎWhen the camcorder has been turned on for
about 30 seconds, the
icon (media status
indicator for Proxy SD slot) turns on in the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen to indicate that
proxy recording is enabled.
If you start shooting while the
icon is
flashing or is not lit, proxy files are not recorded.
ˎˎBefore removing an SD card from the
camcorder, always check that the ACCESS
indicator for the PROXY SD card slot is not lit,
SD cards supported for recording proxy data
ˎˎSDHC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or higher,
non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB)
ˎˎSDXC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or higher,
non-UHS, Capacity: 64 GB to 256 GB)
* Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual.
Formatting (initializing) SD cards
SD cards must be formatted the first time they are
used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be
formatted using the format function of the
camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card
is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card.
Checking the remaining recording capacity
You can check the remaining capacity on an SD
card on the Media Status screen (page 14).
To use an SD card formatted on the camcorder in
the slot of another device
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the
card in the device to be used.
Recording Proxy Data
To record proxy data simultaneously
You can record proxy data to an SD card
simultaneously as the recording to SxS memory
cards.
1 Select Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
>Setting in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
3 Insert an SD card for recording proxy data into
the PROXY SD card slot.
4 Start recording.
The proxy data file is saved in the “/PRIVATE/
PXROOT/Clip” directory of the SD card at the
same time as the original data is being
recorded onto an SxS memory card.
Proxy data recording automatically stops when
you stop recording.
[Note]
Recording proxy data simultaneously when the SDI output
format is 3840×2160P causes the SDI output format setting
to automatically switch to 1920×1080P (Level-B).
000
55
4. Shooting: Proxy Data
To record proxy data separately from recording
original data
You can record proxy data to an SD card
independent of the SxS memory cards by
assigning the XAVC Proxy Rec Start function to an
assignable switch.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If simultaneous proxy recording is started while recording
proxy data independently is in progress, the proxy data
recording continues without interruption. Subsequently,
when simultaneous recording is stopped, proxy data
recording also stops.
ˎˎ Proxy recording cannot be stopped independently during
simultaneous proxy recording.
Proxy recording limitations
Proxy recording is not supported in the following
cases.
ˎˎDuring streaming (Maintenance >Streaming
>Setting in the setup menu set to On)
ˎˎDuring Interval Rec (Operation >Rec Function
>Interval Rec in the setup menu set to On)
ˎˎDuring Picture Cache Rec (Operation >Rec
Function >Picture Cache Rec in the setup menu
is set to On)
ˎˎDuring Slow & Quick Motion (Operation >Rec
Function >Slow & Quick Motion in the setup
menu set to On)
ˎˎWhen network client mode is enabled
(Maintenance >Network Client Mode
>Setting in the setup menu is set to On) and
Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset
1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the
setup menu is set to Disable.
ˎˎWhen Operation >Format >Frequency in the
setup menu is set to 23.98P and Operation
>XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Size is set to HD
Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps)
ˎˎWhen power is being supplied to the external
device connector (Operation >USB in the setup
menu).
ˎˎThe maximum number of clips that can be
recorded is 600.
About the recorded files
ˎˎThe file name extension is “.mp4”.
ˎˎThe timecode is also recorded simultaneously.
ˎˎA still image of the first frame is also recorded
simultaneously.
ˎˎLocation information and a Log file are recorded
simultaneously if the GPS function is enabled.
The Log file is saved in “Root/PRIVATE/SONY/
GPS.”
Canceling proxy data recording
Set Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Setting in
the setup menu to Off.
When there is insufficient remaining capacity on
an SD card
A warning is displayed to indicate that there is
insufficient free space.
Changing proxy recording settings
Select Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Size
and Audio Channel in the setup menu to change
the settings for the size of the proxy recording
format and the audio channel for proxy recording,
respectively.
[Note]
When Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Size in the setup
menu is set to HD Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps) and the
system frequency is set to 29.97 or 25, the proxy data picture
size will be set to 1920×1080 even if the picture size of the
recording video format is set to 1280×720.
Checking proxy recording settings
Select Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Frame
Rate and Bit Rate in the setup menu to view the
settings for the video frame rate and video bit rate,
respectively.
000
56
4. Shooting
Planning Metadata
Planning metadata is information about shooting
and recording plans, recorded in an XML file.
You can shoot using clip names and shot mark
names defined in advance in a planning metadata
file.
You can send and receive planning metadata
using the “Content Browser Mobile” application.
[Note]
Use a font set that is compatible with the language set using
Maintenance >Language in the setup menu when defining
clip names and shot mark names. Using fonts for a language
that is different from the language setting on the camcorder
may cause characters to be displayed abnormally.
“Sort by” setting
Sort order
Item
Information
Date/Time (9-0)
Sort the file list in
descending order in the
Date/Time column
(newest creation date at
the top).
Modified
Date and time of most recent
modification
Modified by
Name of person who
modified the file
Title
Title1 specified in file (ASCII
format clip name)
Title2
Title2 specified in file (UTF-8
format clip name)
Material Group
Number of material groups a)
Shot Mark0 to
Shot Mark9
Names defined in file for Shot
Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9
4 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load
and press the knob.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Load] and press
the knob, then select [Execute] and press the
knob again.
Loading a Planning Metadata File
into Camcorder Memory when
Recording a Clip
1 Save the planning metadata file on an SxS
memory card beforehand.
Planning metadata files are stored in the
“General/Sony/Planning” directory.
2 Insert an SxS memory card in slot A or B.
3 Select Operation >Planning Metadata >Load
from Media(A) or Load from Media(B) in the
setup menu.
A file list screen appears.
Up to 512 planning metadata files are
displayed in the list.
You can change the file list sort order using
Operation >Planning Metadata > Sort by in the
menu.
[Note]
Planning metadata files can be loaded from SDXC cards
using an optional MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor. However, data
cannot be loaded from SDHC/SD cards.
a) Material group: A group of clips recorded with the
same planning metadata.
You can turn the MENU knob to scroll the list.
Displaying Detailed Information in
Planning Metadata
Clearing the Loaded Planning
Metadata
After loading planning metadata into the
camcorder, you can check the detailed information
that it contains, such as file names, date and time
of creation, and titles.
1 Select Operation >Planning Metadata >Clear
1 Select Operation >Planning Metadata
>Properties in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and
then press the knob.
The planning metadata information is
displayed.
Item
Information
“Sort by” setting
Sort order
File Name
File name
Date/Time (0-9)
Sort the file list in
ascending order in the
Date/Time column (oldest
creation date at the top).
Assign ID
Assign ID
Created
Date and time of creation
Memory in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and
then press the knob.
Deletion starts.
When the deletion ends, the following
message appears.
Clear Planning Metadata File
Done
Defining Clip Names in Planning
Metadata
The following two types of clip name strings can
be written in a planning metadata file.
ˎˎAn ASCII format name that appears in the
viewfinder
ˎˎA UTF-8 format name that is actually registered
as the clip name
You can select which type of clip name is
displayed with Operation >Planning Metadata
>Clip Name Disp in the setup menu.
When a clip name is set with planning metadata,
the clip name is displayed.
[Note]
When you define both an ASCII format name and a UTF-8
format name with planning metadata, the UTF-8 format
string is used as the clip name string. If you define either an
ASCII format name or a UTF-8 format name with planning
metadata, the defined format name is displayed though it is
not selected by menu setting.
Clip name string example
Use a text editor to modify the two fields in the
<Title> tag that contain the clip name strings.
The shaded fields in the example are clip name
strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format
(up to 44 characters). “Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo” is
described in UTF-8 format (up to 44 bytes).
“sp” indicates a space and  indicates a carriage
return.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>
<PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
P0001"spcreationDate="
2016-11-30T17:00:00+09:00"sp
lastUpdate="
2016-12-06T17:00:00+09:00"sp
000
57
4. Shooting: Planning Metadata
version="1.00">
<PropertiessppropertyId="
assignment"spupdate="
2016-12-06T17:00:00+09:00"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">
<TitlespusAscii="Typhoon"sp
xml:lang="en">Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo
</Title>
</Properties>
</PlanningMetadata>
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you create a file, enter each statement as a single line
with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement
line, and do not enter spaces except where specified.
ˎˎ The following characters cannot be used in clip names.
If they are used, they are replaced by an underscore
character (_).
" * / : < > ? \ |
ˎˎ Up to 44 bytes (or characters) can be entered for the clip
name.
If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 44 bytes, the first 44
bytes are used as the clip name.
If only an ASCII format name is specified, a 44-character
string is used as the clip name.
When neither an ASCII format name string nor UTF-8
format name string can be used, the standard format clip
name is used.
Setting clip names
1 Load a planning metadata file that contains
clip names into camcorder memory
(page 103).
2 Set Operation >Clip >Clip Naming in the setup
menu to Plan.
Each time that you record a clip, the
camcorder automatically generates a name
consisting of the clip name defined in the
planning metadata file, with the addition of an
underbar (_) and a five-digit serial number
(00001 to 99999).
Examples:Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001,
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002,… After the
number reaches 99999, the next increment
returns the number to 00001.
When you load another planning metadata file, the serial
number continues incrementing. You can change the
numbering using Operation >Clip >Number Set in the setup
menu.
name strings. Names can be either in ASCII format
(up to 32 characters) or UTF-8 format (up to 16
characters).
“sp” indicates a space and  indicates a carriage
return.
<Metaspname="_ShotMark0"sp
content="Kick Off"/>
</Properties>
</PlanningMetadata>
Selecting the clip name display format
[Note]
When you create a definition file, enter each statement
as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in
the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
specified, except within essence mark name strings.
[Note]
When names are defined in both ASCII format and
UTF-8 format, you can use Operation >Planning
Metadata >Clip Name Disp in the setup menu to
select which of the names to display on the LCD
monitor and on the viewfinder screen.
To display ASCII format names:
Select Title1(ASCII).
The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_
Tokyo_SerialNumber”, but “Typhoon_
SerialNumber” is displayed on the screen.
To display UTF-8 format names:
Select Title2(UTF-8).
The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_
Tokyo_SerialNumber”, and the same name is
displayed on the screen.
Defining Shot Mark Names in
Planning Metadata
When you use planning metadata to set shot
marks, you can define names for Shot Mark 0 to
Shot Mark 9.
When you record shot marks, you can add the
shot mark name strings defined in the planning
metadata.
[Note]
Only Shot Mark 1 and Shot Mark 2 can be recorded on the
camcorder.
Shot mark name string example
Use a text editor to modify the fields in the <Meta
name> tag.
The shaded fields in the example are essence mark
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character, the
maximum length of that string is 16 characters.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
H00123"spcreationDate="
2016-11-30T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate="
2016-11-30T15:00:00Z"spversion=
"1.00">
<PropertiessppropertyId=
"assignment"spclass="original"sp
update="2016-11-30T15:00:00Z"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">
<TitlespusAscii="Football
Game"spxml:lang="en">
Football Game 30/11/2016</
Title>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark1"sp
content="Goal"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark2"sp
content="Shoot"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark3"sp
content="Corner Kick"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark4"sp
content="Free Kick"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark5"sp
content="Goal Kick"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark6"sp
content="Foul"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark7"sp
content="PK"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark8"sp
content="1st Half"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark9"sp
content="2nd Half"/>
[Note]
000
58
4. Shooting
Obtaining Location Information (GPS)
Location and time information of video shot
when positioning is enabled is recorded by the
camcorder. That information is also superimposed
on the SDI signal output.
The GPS function is set to Off by factory default.
Supported formats for GPS recording
GPS recording is supported in XAVC-I and XAVC-L
recording formats.
When a recording format that does not support
GPS recording is set, location information can still
be obtained on an SDI output if SDI output is set
to On (Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1/3
Output or SDI Out2/4 Output set to On).
[Note]
Location information is not output when the format is SD
SDI. Nor is it output during playback.
1 Check that the camcorder is in standby state.
2 Set Operation >GPS to On in the setup menu.
is displayed in the viewfinder when the
camcorder is seeking GPS satellites. When
positioning is established, location information
is recorded when shooting video.
The icon displayed in the viewfinder varies,
depending on the signal reception from the GPS
satellites.
Positioning Display
status
GPS reception state
Off
GPS is set to Off or an
error occurred.
Positioning
not
available
No display
Location information
could not be obtained
because GPS signal
could not be received.
Move to a location with
a clear view of the sky.
Positioning Display
status
GPS reception state
Searching
for satellites
Searching for GPS
satellites. Several
minutes may be required
to acquire satellites.
Positioning
A weak GPS signal is
being received.
A GPS signal is being
received. Location
information can be
acquired.
A strong GPS signal is
being received. Location
information can be
acquired.
ˎˎIt may take some time to start acquiring location
information after turning on the camcorder.
ˎˎIf a positioning icon is not displayed after several
minutes, there may be a problem with signal
reception. Start shooting without location
information, or move to an area with a clear
view of the sky. Shooting when a positioning
icon is not displayed means that location
information will not be recorded.
ˎˎThe GPS signal may not be received when
indoors or near tall structures. Move to a
location with a clear view of the sky.
ˎˎThe recording of location information may be
interrupted, depending on the strength of the
received signal, even if a positioning icon is
displayed.
000
59
5. Network Configuration
Network Functions Supported by the Camcorder
The camcorder supports various network
functions. This section provides an overview and
detailed description of the network connections
and functions.
Configure a password in order to use network
functions using Access Authentication >Password.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The Access Authentication >Password setting is blank
when network functions are used for the first time and
after updating the software to version 5.0 or later from a
version prior to version 5.0 or updating to version 6.1 or
later from a version prior to version 6.1.
ˎˎ If a password is not configured, the Network menu items
in the setup menu are disabled (grayed out), and network
settings cannot be configured.
Network Connection Overview
1 Connect the camcorder and router using a
Network Function Overview
Connecting to the Internet using wireless LAN
Transferring files recorded on the camcorder to a
server on the Internet
LAN cable.
 (page 63)
Connect the camcorder to the Internet using the
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied),
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option), or
modem (option).
[Note]
The CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option) is required if
connecting using a CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option)
or modem (option).
When using the IFU-WLM3 (supplied)
1 Attach the IFU-WLM3 to the camcorder.
 (page 60)
You can transfer proxy files recorded on an SD
card and original files recorded on SxS memory
cards to a server on the Internet when connected
via a 3G/4G/LTE network, access point, wired LAN
router.
 (page 67)
Transmitting streaming video and audio
You can transmit the video and audio captured/
played back with the camcorder via the Internet or
local network.
Connecting devices using wireless LAN
2 Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi
Streaming using the streaming settings on the camcorder
The camcorder can connect to smartphones,
tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN
connection using the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN
Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN
Adaptor (option).
When using the CBK-WA02 (option)
1 Attach the CBK-WA02 to the camcorder.
High-quality streaming using the Connection Control
Manager (CCM) of either a Sony Network RX Station
(option) or C3 Portal
2 Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi
Using Wi-Fi remote control
Using a modem
You can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into
the camcorder from a smartphone, tablet, or other
device over a wireless LAN connection.
 (page 73)
1 Select the wireless connection device.
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module
(supplied)  (page 60)
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) 
(page 60)
2 Select the wireless LAN access mode.
Wi-Fi Access Point mode  (page 61)
Wi-Fi Station mode  (page 62)
Connecting to the Internet using a LAN cable
Connect the camcorder to the Internet via a router
using the network connector.
Station mode and connect to the Internet.
 (page 65)
 (page 60)
Station mode and connect to the Internet.
 (page 65)
1 Attach the USB extension adaptor of the
CBK-NA1 (option).
 (page 63)
2 Connect the modem.
 (page 64)
 (page 71)
 (page 72)
Configuring from the web menu
The web menu of the camcorder appears when
the camcorder is accessed from a browser
on a device connected using a wireless LAN
connection.
 (page 75)
Supported network functions and operating
limitations
 (page 80)
000
60
5. Network Configuration
Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
The camcorder can connect to smartphones,
tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN
connection by attaching the IFU-WLM3 USB
Wireless LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02
Wireless LAN Adaptor (option).
The following operations can be performed
between the camcorder and devices connected
using a wireless LAN.
[Note]
USB wireless LAN modules/adaptors other than the IFUWLM3 or CBK-WA02 cannot be used.
Remote operation via wireless LAN
The camcorder can be operated remotely from a
smartphone, tablet, or computer that is connected
using a wireless LAN.
File transfer via wireless LAN
Proxy files (low-resolution files) stored on the
camcorder SD card and original files (highresolution files) recorded on the camcorder can be
transferred to a server via a wireless LAN.
ˎˎ Streaming is not supported when the video format is set
to MPEG-IMX or DVCAM.
ˎˎ Obstructions and electromagnetic interference between
the camcorder and wireless LAN access point or terminal
device, or the ambient environment (such as wall
materials) could shorten the communication range or
prevent connections altogether. If you experience these
problems, check the connection/communication status
after moving the camcorder to a new location, or bringing
the camcorder and access point/terminal device closer
together.
“Content Browser Mobile” is an application that
can operate the camcorder remotely on the device
screen, while streaming content, and can be used
to configure the camcorder.
You can also transfer a cutout part of a file by
specifying In and Out points in the proxy file
(page 68).
Always check that you have the latest version of
the “Content Browser Mobile” application.
For details about the “Content Browser Mobile” application,
contact your Sony sales or service representative.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Proxy files (low-resolution files) recorded on the SD card in
the camcorder can be streamed via a wireless LAN.
in the position shown in the following
diagram.
For attachment of the attachment bracket
(Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a Sony
service representative.
Attachment bracket
You can use a smartphone, tablet, or computer
to configure and operate the camcorder. The
supported devices, OS, and browsers are shown in
the following table.
Device
OS
Browser
Smartphone
Android 11/12
Chrome
iOS 15.x
Safari
Tablet
Computer
Attaching the CBK-WA02
1 Attach the attachment bracket to the handle
Compatible Devices
Monitoring video via wireless LAN
You can create a stream (H.264) of the camera
picture or playback picture of the camcorder for
monitoring from a device via wireless LAN using the
“Content Browser Mobile” application.
Guard (supplied)
Android 10/11
Chrome
iPadOS 15.x
Safari
Microsoft
Windows 10/11
Chrome
macOS 12.x
Safari
2 Attach the protective cap to the IFU-WLM3.
3 Plug the IFU-WLM3 into the connector.
with the CBK-WA02 (option), to the
attachment bracket.
3 Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure the
[Notes]
ˎˎ The picture may not be depicted correctly, depending on
the version of your browser.
Operation with the following browser versions has been
verified.
Safari: 15
Chrome: 103
ˎˎ Playback may not be supported, depending on the
operating system of the terminal device used and the
browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser
Mobile.”
2 Attach the USB extension adaptor, supplied
USB extension adaptor.
Fixing screw
USB extension adaptor
[Note]
Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the IFU-WLM3.
If not using the IFU-WLM3
Attaching the IFU-WLM3
1 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN
module connector.
Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard, and
close the connector cover.
You can adjust the position of the USB
extension adaptor over the range shown in the
following diagram.
000
61
5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
CBK-WA02 is permitted in your country or region. For
details, refer to the CBK-WA02 operation manual.
If not using the CBK-WA02
Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard, and
close the connector cover.
One-touch connection using NFC-equipped
devices
Devices that support NFC can be connected by
one touch using NFC.
1 Select [Settings] on the device and enable the
[NFC] function.
4 Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the
USB connector of the USB extension adaptor.
7 Plug the CBK-WA02 into the USB connector of
the USB extension adaptor.
Connecting using Wireless LAN
Access Point (Wi-Fi Access Point
Mode)
The camcorder can connect to devices that are set
up as an access point.
Smartphone/
Tablet
Computer
5 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN
Guard (supplied)
8 Set the wireless LAN channel in Maintenance
adaptor into the USB wireless LAN module
connector.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the CBK-WA02.
ˎˎ Attaching the CBK-WA02 and selecting Wi-Fi Station in
Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode in the setup menu
enables connection to a 5 GHz access point.
ˎˎ The Ch setting “Auto(5GHz)” in Wi-Fi Access Point mode
may not be displayed, depending on the CBK-WA02 used.
ˎˎ “Auto(5GHz)” is not displayed in the menu if use of the
CBK-WA02 in the 5 GHz band is prohibited for outdoor
use in your country or region. Check that the use of the
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to
Wi-Fi Access Point.
4 Activate the NFC function.
[Note]
>Network >Channel in the setup menu
(page 115).
6 Plug the USB connector of the USB extension
>Network >Setting to On.
Set NFC connection mode by executing
Maintenance >Network >NFC in the setup
menu or by pressing and holding an
assignable switch that has been assigned with
the NFC function for three seconds.
The NFC function can be used only when is
displayed on the screen.
module connector.
For details about using the CBK-WA02, refer to the instruction
manual supplied with the CBK-WA02.
2 Turn the camcorder on, and set Maintenance
Install “Content Browser Mobile” on the device
to connect before starting the connection
configuration.
[Note]
The default Wi-Fi Access Point password should not be
used as-is. Use a password generated using the following
procedure.
1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to Wi-Fi Access
Point.
3 Execute Maintenance >Network >Regenerate Password.
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) for
to
appear on the screen. Wait until the network “AP” (access
point) wireless network indicator (page 18) stops flashing
on the viewfinder screen.
000
62
5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
5 Touch the device against the camcorder.
The device connects to the camcorder, and
“Content Browser Mobile” launches.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
5 Open the device Network Settings or Wi-Fi
Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on.
6 Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi
network SSID list, display Option, and select
WPS Push Button.
[Note]
The steps will vary depending on the device used.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Wake a sleeping device and unlock the lock screen
beforehand.
ˎˎ Continue to hold the device against the camcorder
without moving it until “Content Browser Mobile”
launches (1 to 2 seconds).
ˎˎ If a device with identical SSID has already been registered,
the device may not be able to be connected, depending
on the OS version of the device. In this case, you can
connect the device by deleting the registered SSID from
the device.
Connecting using SSID and password on the
device
Connect by entering the SSID and password on
the device.
1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to
Wi-Fi Access Point.
Connecting Using Wireless LAN
Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode)
The camcorder can connect to an existing wireless
LAN access point as a client.
The device connects via the access point.
The connection can be established using the
setup menu or the web menu. This section
describes the method using the WPS function in
the setup menu.
For details about connecting using the web menu,
see “Connecting to an access point in station
mode without using WPS” (page 77).
For details about connecting using the network
auto detection function or by manual entry, see
“Connecting to an Access Point using the Setup
Menu” (page 65).
Smartphone/
Tablet
Computer
Devices that support WPS can be connected using
WPS.
1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to
Wi-Fi Access Point.
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) to enable
access point mode. Wait until the network “AP” (access point)
indicator (page 18) stops flashing on the LCD monitor or
in the viewfinder.
3 Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the
setup menu.
Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on.
[Note]
The steps will vary depending on the device used.
Wi-Fi Station.
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable
station mode. Wait until the network indicator (page 18)
signal strength icon stops flashing on the LCD monitor or in
the viewfinder.
5 Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the
setup menu.
7 Press the access point WPS button.
3 Open the device Network Settings or Wi-Fi
network SSID list, then enter a password to
connect.
For the camcorder SSID and password, see
Maintenance >Network >SSID & Password
(page 115) in the setup menu.
1 Turn the access point on.
2 Turn the camcorder on.
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
4 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to
press the knob.
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) to enable
access point mode. Wait until the network “AP” (access point)
indicator (page 18) stops flashing on the LCD monitor or
in the viewfinder.
4 Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi
If an access point supports the WPS function, you
can connect using a basic setting.
6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
[Note]
Connecting using WPS-equipped devices
Connecting to an access point using WPS
Access
point
For details about WPS button operation, refer
to the instruction manual for the access point.
When the connection is successful, the
network indicator (page 18) signal strength
icon will show a strength of 1 or higher on the
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
[Note]
If the connection fails, perform the procedure again from
step 1.
8 Connect the device to the access point.
For details about how to connect, refer to the
instruction manual for each device.
000
63
5. Network Configuration
Connecting to the Internet
You can connect to the Internet using a wired LAN
or wireless LAN.
For wired LAN, connect a LAN cable (not supplied)
to the network connector on the camcorder, and
connect to the Internet via a router.
For wireless LAN, connect to the Internet using the
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied),
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option), or
modem (option).
For details, see “Limitations on Simultaneous Use
of Network Functions” (page 80).
Required device for network connection
You can connect to the Internet using a wired LAN
connection via a router connected to the network
connector on the camcorder.
Wireless LAN connection
One of the following devices is required.
ˎˎIFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied)
ˎˎCBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) +
CBK-NA1E USB Extension Adaptor supplied with
the CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option)
ˎˎModem (option) + CBK-NA1E USB Extension
Adaptor supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network
Adaptor Kit (option)
[Notes]
ˎˎ For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral
device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this
port. Follow the instructions for this port.
ˎˎ When you connect the LAN cable of the unit to peripheral
device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent malfunction
due to radiation noise.
Computer
[Notes]
The camcorder can connect to a network using
wireless LAN or wired LAN methods.
However, there are limits on the simultaneous use
of these connection functions.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Wired LAN to
Enable.
An IP address is automatically assigned to the
camcorder.
[Notes]
Wired LAN connection
Limitations on simultaneous use of network
connection function
camcorder and a router using a LAN cable.
Connecting Using a LAN Cable
(Wired LAN Connection)
ˎˎLAN cable (not supplied)
ˎˎ The wireless LAN module may not be available in some
countries/regions.
ˎˎ The frequency band for the wireless LAN module is shared
by various devices. Depending on the use environment,
transmission speed and distance may be decreased, or
communication may be disconnected, by using other
devices.
ˎˎ To use the 3G/4G/LTE services, you need to contract with
a cell phone company.
ˎˎ For details about the required compatible device for the
network connection, contact your Sony dealer or a Sony
service representative.
1 Connect the network connector of the
Router
Internet
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) for the
wired LAN connection to become enabled. Wait until
the network status indicator (page 18) LAN icon stops
flashing on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
ˎˎ To transfer original files/proxy files recorded on the
camcorder, use Wi-Fi remote control, operate the web
menu, or monitor output using the “Content Browser
Mobile” application, set Maintenance >Network >Wired
LAN Remote in the setup menu to On (page 116).
ˎˎ When connected to a network, using a LAN cable, that will
not be used to connect to the Internet, it is recommended
that Wired LAN Remote be set to On to prevent
unauthorized access from the Internet. When connecting
to the Internet, check that the network connection is to a
secure network before use.
ˎˎ A wired LAN connection is not possible if a modem
(option) is attached to the USB wireless LAN module
connector. For wired LAN connection, first remove the
modem (option).
ˎˎ When connected to the Internet using Wi-Fi Station mode
and the wired LAN is not connected to the Internet, a
network error may occur and Internet-related functions
may not operate. In this case, set Wired LAN to Disable,
and connect to the Internet using Wi-Fi Station mode
only.
Preparation for Connection to the
Internet Using a Modem
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet
via a 3G/4G network by connecting an optional
modem to the unit.
You can connect the CBK-NA1E USB Extension
Adaptor, supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network
Adaptor Kit (option), to the USB wireless
LAN module connector on the camcorder in
preparation for connection using the following
procedure.
You can also connect to the Internet using a
smartphone network by attaching a USB cable to
the USB wireless LAN module connector of the
unit and connecting a smartphone.
1 Attach the attachment bracket to the handle
in the position shown in the following
diagram.
For attachment of the attachment bracket
(Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a Sony
service representative.
Attachment bracket
2 Attach the USB extension adaptor to the
attachment bracket.
000
64
5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet
3 Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure the
Guard (supplied)
USB extension adaptor.
Fixing screw
Connecting Using a Modem
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet via
a 3G/4G network by attaching a modem (option)
to the camcorder using a CBK-NA1 Network
Adaptor Kit (option).
USB extension adaptor
Internet
6 Plug the USB connector of the USB extension
You can adjust the position of the USB
extension adaptor over the range shown in the
following diagram.
adaptor into the USB wireless LAN module
connector.
CBK-NA1
+
Modem
Connecting
1 Connect the modem (option) to the USB
connector of the CBK-NA1E USB extension
adaptor.
USB connector of the USB extension adaptor.
Using the network setup assist tool, you can create
a QR code with the information required to access
the camcorder via a C3 Portal connection. Loading
the created QR code onto a smartphone allows
you to quickly connect to the camcorder via C3
Portal connection.
To use this function, first install the C3 Portal
dedicated app on your smartphone using the
following procedure.
1 Plug the USB cable connected to a
smartphone into the USB wireless LAN module
connector.
>Setup in the menu.
A screen appears showing the settings that
will be changed automatically to enable
connection with C3 Portal.
For details about connecting a modem, refer to the
instruction manual supplied with the modem.
module connector.
Connecting Using the Network Setup
Assist Tool
2 Turn the camcorder on.
3 Select Maintenance >Setup for Mobile App
4 Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the
5 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN
[Notes]
ˎˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the CBK-NA1 and modem.
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable
modem mode. Wait until the 3G/4G modem settings/
connection status indicator (page 17) stops flashing on
the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Modem to On.
[Note]
Setup cannot be executed when both Maintenance
>Network Client Mode is set to On in the menu and
streaming is in progress.
000
65
5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet
Connecting Using Wireless LAN
Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode)
4 Check the settings and select OK.
The configuration starts. A “Processing”
message appears while configuration is in
progress.
When the configuration is completed, the
required information and a QR code for
accessing the unit is displayed.
You can connect to the Internet using Wi-Fi station
mode by attaching the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless
LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN
Adaptor (option) to the camcorder, and using a
3G/4G/LTE-compatible access point (option) or
using device tethering.
For details about attaching devices, see “Attaching
the IFU-WLM3” (page 60) and “Attaching the
CBK-WA02” (page 60).
Smartphone/
Tablet
First, turn the access point and device on, and
configure the device tethering function if planning
to use tethering.
Computer
Connecting to an Access Point using
the Setup Menu
Access
point
Internet
You can connect to an access point using the
setup menu.
The connection can be established using the
network auto detection function or by manual
entry.
Connection using network auto detection function
1 Perform steps 1 to 4 in “Connecting to an
access point using WPS” (page 62).
[Notes]
2 Select Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Station
Smartphone/
Tablet
ˎˎ Take care that the password cannot be viewed and
the QR code image cannot be copied by others.
ˎˎ The QR code screen appears on the LCD monitor,
but it is not displayed when the LCD monitor is set to
“Video without superimposed information (MONI)”
or “Status display (STATUS)” mode. Switch to “Video
with superimposed information (CHAR)” mode using
the DISP SEL button (page 8).
Internet
[Note]
Close the list display first if you want to turn the
camcorder off.
5 Launch the C3 Portal dedicated app installed
on your smartphone, and scan the QR code
using the camera of the smartphone.
For details about using the dedicated app,
refer to the dedicated app Help Guide.
The required information for accessing the
camcorder is loaded into the smartphone.
For details about the dedicated app, visit the C3
Portal site.
https://www.c3p.sony.net
Detail Settings >Scan Networks in the setup
menu, then select [Execute].
The camcorder starts detection of connection
destinations. Detected destinations for
connection are displayed in the Scan Networks
result list.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination to
Connecting Using a Device
If the access point and device supports WPS,
connect using the procedure in “Connecting to
an access point using WPS” (page 62). If WPS is
not supported, connect using the procedure in
“Connecting to an access point in station mode
without using WPS” (page 77).
which to connect, then press the knob.
When the connection is established, the
Password input screen appears.
4 Set the password on the Password input
screen.
After setting the password, the display returns
to the Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings screen.
If information about a previous connected
destination is stored in the device history,
000
66
5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet
selecting the SSID for that destination displays
the Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings screen.
5 Configure the following connection settings
on the Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings screen.
Item
Description
DHCP
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to On, an IP address
is automatically assigned to
the camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
address manually, set to Off.
IP Address
Subnet mask
Gateway
Enter the IP address of the
camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
Enter the subnet mask of the
camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
Enter the gateway for the
access point.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
DNS Auto
Obtains DNS address
automatically.
When set to On, the address
of the DNS server is obtained
automatically.
Primary DNS
Server
Enter the primary DNS server
for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto
is [Off].
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the secondary DNS
server for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto
is [Off].
6 When finished, select Set >Execute to apply
the settings.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the connection settings are changed, always select
Set >Execute. If Execute is not selected, the configured
settings are not applied.
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to
enable station mode. Wait until the network indicator
(page 18) signal strength icon stops flashing on the LCD
monitor or in the viewfinder.
ˎˎ The connection station setup information is stored in the
history. The history can be cleared using ALL Reset and
Network Reset.
Connection by manual entry
1 Perform steps 1 to 4 in “Connecting to an
access point using WPS” (page 62).
2 Configure the following connection settings
Item
Description
Gateway
Enter the gateway for the
access point.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
DNS Auto
Obtains DNS address
automatically.
When set to On, the address
of the DNS server is obtained
automatically.
Primary DNS
Server
Enter the primary DNS server
for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto
is [Off].
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the secondary DNS
server for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto
is [Off].
using Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Station
Detail Settings in the setup menu.
Item
Description
SSID
Enter the SSID for the
destination to which to
connect.
Password
Enter the password for the
access point to connect.
The entered password is
displayed using asterisks. The
entered characters are visible
while the SHIFT key is
pressed.
DHCP
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to On, an IP address
is automatically assigned to
the camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
address manually, set to Off.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the
camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask of the
camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
3 When finished, select Set >Execute to apply
the settings.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the connection settings are changed, always select
Set >Execute. If Execute is not selected, the configured
settings are not applied.
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to
enable station mode. Wait until the network indicator
(page 18) signal strength icon stops flashing on the LCD
monitor or in the viewfinder.
000
67
5. Network Configuration
Transferring Files
You can transfer proxy files recorded on an SD card
and original files recorded on SxS memory cards
to a server on the Internet when connected to the
Internet via a 3G/4G/LTE network, access point, or
wired LAN router.
Transferring Proxy Files using the
Thumbnail Screen
2 Select OK.
Setting a Transfer Destination
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 60) and “Connecting to
the Internet” (page 63).
2 You must first register a server to which you
want to transfer files.
For details about registering a server, see “To
register a destination server” (page 78).
Configuring the Transfer Destination
Using the Dedicated App
(smartphone connection)
You can send the settings required for file transfer
from a smartphone to the camcorder when
connected to C3 Portal using a smartphone
(page 64).
1 Send the file transfer information to the
camcorder using the dedicated app on a
smartphone.
For details about using the dedicated app,
refer to the dedicated app Help Guide.
If the camcorder receives the file transfer
information successfully, the following
message appears.
The setup information starts loading.
When the setup is loaded successfully, a
“Network File loaded.” message appears.
Items configured automatically
For items configured automatically, see “To
register a destination server” (page 78).
[Note]
Service, Show Password, and Load Certification are not
included in the items that are configured automatically.
For details about the dedicated app, visit the C3
Portal site.
https://www.c3p.sony.net
Transferring Proxy Files using the
Web Menu
You can upload proxy files recorded on an SD card
to a server using the web menu.
1 Connect the camcorder and device using a
Using “Content Browser Mobile” application
version 2.0 or later, you can quickly display a
thumbnail for a proxy file on an SD card by
using the still image of the first frame.
4 Select the files you want to transfer.
Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second time to
de-select it. You can double-tap a file to play
the file to check its content.
5 Tap [Transfer].
The default destination server specified in
[Default Setting] appears (see “To register a
destination server” (page 78)).
To change the destination server, tap the
destination server to display a list and then
select a different server. Enter the directory on
the destination server, as required.
You can select a transfer destination using
Maintenance >File Transfer >Default Upload
Server in the setup menu.
LAN connection, then launch a browser on the
device to access the camcorder.
2 Display a file list screen to select files.
3 Tap and select [Media Info], then tap [SD
Card].
The SD Card screen appears.
You can upload proxy files recorded on an SD
card to a server using the thumbnail screen of the
camcorder.
Transferring a specific proxy file
1 Select a transfer destination previously
registered in the web menu.
You can select a transfer destination using the
web menu or using Maintenance >File
Transfer >Default Upload Server in the setup
menu.
2 Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the
thumbnail screen.
3 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy) >Select
Clip in the setup menu.
A transfer file selection screen appears.
4 Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor to a
file (clip) to be transferred, then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
To clear the check mark from a selected clip,
press the MENU knob again.
5 Press and hold the SHIFT button, and press the
6 Tap [Transfer].
Transfer of the selected files begins. To cancel
file transfer, tap [Cancel].
SET button.
A confirmation screen appears.
6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
The selected file is registered in the job list, and
a registration completed message appears.
000
68
5. Network Configuration: Transferring Files
Transferring all proxy files
You can transfer all proxy files recorded on an SD
card at the same time.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Proxy files for which there are no original files cannot be
selected for transfer on the thumbnail screen.
ˎˎ Proxy files that are not displayed on the transfer file
selection screen cannot be transferred.
1 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy) >All
Clips in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
All files are registered in the job list, and a
registration completed message appears.
The file transfer starts transferring files in the
order the files were registered in the job list.
You can check the registered files by
displaying the transfer job list using
Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job List in
the setup menu.
Transferring automatically when recording
finishes
If Maintenance >File Transfer >Auto Upload(Proxy)
in the setup menu is set to On beforehand, the file
is automatically uploaded to the specified server
when proxy recording finishes.
If a proxy file with an identical duration as the
original file, inheriting the information from
the original file, is recorded based on planning
metadata, a folder is created on the transfer
destination with a name defined by the content of
the <Title> tag of the planning metadata file, and
the proxy file is transferred to that folder.
When transferring, the ID of the recording media
is automatically appended to the file name of the
planning metadata file.
Transferring parts of proxy files
Using “Content Browser Mobile” application
version 2.0 or later, you can specify In/Out points in
proxy files to cut out and transfer the cutout parts.
You can also transfer the cutout portions of
multiple files using the Storyboard.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Margins of up to 15 frames are added before and after the
cutout region in the created file.
ˎˎ Files created from cutouts from proxy files recorded using
network function software (V1.25 or earlier) may not be
imported into non-linear editors.
ˎˎ When partial transfer is performed using the Storyboard,
the file for sending Storyboard information to a non-linear
editor is displayed in the Job List.
ˎˎ When transferring, a General/Sony/tmp folder is created
automatically on the SD card. The file is temporarily stored
in this folder, and is automatically deleted after the file
transfer is completed.
ˎˎ Files cannot be transferred under the following
conditions.
–– When Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode is set to
Wi-Fi Access Point, and Wired LAN is set to Disable in
the setup menu
–– When the streaming function is enabled (Maintenance
>Streaming >Setting is set to On)
–– When network client mode is enabled and high-quality
streaming is in progress (streaming when Maintenance
>Network Client Mode >Setting is set to On)
1 Connect the camcorder and device using a
LAN connection, then launch a browser on the
device to connect to the camcorder
“Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN”
(page 60).
2 Select Maintenance >File Transfer >File
Transfer in the setup menu.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
Original file transfer mode is initiated.
4 Display a file list screen to select files in the
browser on the device.
You can upload original files recorded on an SxS
memory card to a server using the web menu.
8 Tap [Transfer].
Transfer of the selected files begins. To cancel
file transfer, tap [Cancel].
When the transfer of all files is completed,
transfer mode is automatically released, and
the display returns to the camera shooting
screen.
5 Tap
and select [Media Info], then tap Slot A
(for files recorded on media in slot A) or Slot B
(for files recorded on media in slot B).
The Slot A or Slot B screen appears.
Example: Slot A screen
Transferring Original Files using the
Thumbnail Screen
You can upload original files recorded on an SxS
memory card to a server using the thumbnail
screen.
Transferring an original file
6 Select the files you want to transfer.
Transferring Original Files using the
Web Menu
You can select a transfer destination using
Maintenance >File Transfer >Default Upload
Server in the setup menu.
Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second time to
de-select it.
7 Tap [Transfer].
The default destination server specified in
[Default Setting] appears (see “To register a
destination server” (page 78)).
To change the destination server, tap the
destination server to display a list and then
select a different server.
Enter the directory on the destination server in
[Directory].
1 Select a transfer destination previously
registered in the web menu.
You can select a transfer destination using the
web menu or using Maintenance >File
Transfer >Default Upload Server in the setup
menu.
2 Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the
thumbnail screen.
3 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip >Select Clip in
the setup menu.
A transfer file selection screen appears.
000
69
5. Network Configuration: Transferring Files
4 Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor to a
file (clip) to be transferred, then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
To clear the check mark from a selected clip,
press the MENU knob again.
5 Press and hold the SHIFT button, and press the
SET button.
A confirmation screen appears.
6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
The selected file is registered in the job list, and
a registration completed message appears.
Transferring all original files
You can transfer all original files recorded on an
SxS memory card at the same time.
1 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip >All Clips in
the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
All files are registered in the job list, and a
registration completed message appears.
The file transfer starts transferring files in the
order the files were registered in the job list.
You can check the registered files by
displaying the transfer job list using
Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job List in
the setup menu.
If Maintenance >File Transfer >Remote File
Transfer in the setup menu is set to Enable
beforehand, original file transfer mode is initiated
automatically without having to set file transfer
mode.
[Note]
Files cannot be transferred under the following conditions.
ˎˎ During recording, playback, or when displaying the
thumbnail screen
ˎˎ When both Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network is
set to Wi-Fi Access Point and Wired LAN >Disable is set to
Disable in the setup menu.
ˎˎ When the streaming function is enabled (Maintenance
>Streaming >Setting is set to On)
ˎˎ When network client mode is enabled and high-quality
streaming is in progress (streaming when Maintenance
>Network Client Mode >Setting is set to On)
Checking the Status of File Transfer
Item
Description
Status
Transfer status
Completed: Transfer completed
Transferring: Transfer in progress
Aborted: Transfer aborted
Waiting: Transfer pending
Server Cap. Over: Transfer destination
server capacity exceeded (“E03006” displayed in Job List
(page 79) in the web menu)
Upload Error: Transfer destination
server upload error (“E03-003”
displayed in Job List (page 79)
in the web menu)
Dest. Auth. Failed: Transfer destination
server authentication error
(“E03-005” displayed in Job List
(page 79) in the web menu)
Dest. Cert. Err.: Transfer destination
certificate error (“E03-008”
displayed in Job List (page 79)
in the web menu)
Monitoring using the web menu
Tap [Job List] on the SD Card, Slot A, or Slot B
screen to display the Job List screen to check the
status of the file transfer (page 79).
Monitoring using the setup menu
Select Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job List in
the setup menu to display the Job List screen.
You can check the status of file transfer on the Job
List screen.
Transferring parts of original files
Using “Content Browser Mobile” application
version 2.0 or later, you can specify In/Out points
in original files recorded by the camcorder to cut
out and transfer the cutout parts.
You can also transfer the cutout portions of
multiple files using the Storyboard.
The following formats of original files are
supported.
ˎˎXAVC-I
ˎˎXAVC-L
ˎˎHD422 (exFAT/UDF)
ˎˎHD420HQ (exFAT/UDF)
[Note]
To transfer a part of an original file using “Content Browser
Mobile,” a proxy file with the same file name as the original
file is required.
Enable the creation of proxy files before you start to record.
The relevant settings are shown below.
ˎˎ Set Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Setting in the
setup menu to On.
ˎˎ When network client mode is enabled, set Maintenance
>Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3
>NCM with Proxy in the setup menu to Enable.
Item
Description
Src.
Transfer clip source media indicator
A: Slot A media
B: Slot B media
P: PROXY SD card slot media
Clip Name
Name of transfer clip
Destination Transfer clip destination server
Deleting Transfer Files on the Job List
Screen of the Camcorder
You can select and delete any registered transfer
files on the Job List screen.
[Note]
Delete files one at a time. Multiple files cannot be deleted
simultaneously.
1 On the Job List screen, turn the MENU knob to
move the cursor to a file you want to delete.
2 Press the MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you
want to delete.
000
70
5. Network Configuration: Transferring Files
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A deletion completion message appears.
Deleting all registered transfer files
Tap [Clear All jobs] on the Job List screen.
Deleting all completed transfer jobs
Tap [Clear Completed jobs] on the Job List screen.
000
71
5. Network Configuration
Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio
You can transmit the video and audio captured/
played back with the camcorder via the Internet or
local network.
Preparation for Streaming
Transmission
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 60) and “Connecting to
the Internet” (page 63).
2 Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3) in
Maintenance >Streaming in the setup menu.
The streaming connection destination setup
screen appears.
3 Set Size, Bit Rate, Type, and items according to
Type on the screen.
For details and limitations about settings, see
“Streaming Settings” (page 76).
4 Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3), set in steps
1 and 2, in Maintenance >Streaming >Preset
Select in the setup menu.
Starting Streaming
1 Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting in the
setup menu to On.
Streaming starts according to the settings.
You can assign Streaming to an assignable
switch. For details about assignment, see
“Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches”
(page 121).
[Notes]
ˎˎ Streaming cannot be started under the following menu
settings.
–– When Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup
menu is set to Off
–– When Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting in
the setup menu is set to On
–– When Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup
menu is set to On, but Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi
Mode is set to Off and Maintenance >Network >Wired
LAN is set to Disable
ˎˎ It may take several tens of seconds to stream actual video
or audio after starting streaming.
ˎˎ You cannot start streaming when playing back an SD
format clip.
ˎˎ If you set the streaming transmission destination is set
incorrectly or the camcorder does not connect to the
network, “×” appears on the screen as the streaming
status indicator.
ˎˎ Streaming in network client mode (page 72),
monitoring, proxy recording, and file transfer are not
available after switching to streaming mode.
ˎˎ Starting streaming while monitoring, proxy recording, or
transferring files will stop the corresponding function.
Stopping Streaming
Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting to Off to
stop streaming.
When Streaming is On, streaming can also be
stopped by pressing the assignable switch to
which Streaming has been assigned.
When the camcorder is connected to a device
via Wireless LAN (page 60) or is connected to
the Internet using wireless LAN station mode
(page 62), you can also set the streaming
transmission destination and start/stop streaming
from the web menu (page 75).
000
72
5. Network Configuration
Streaming High Quality Video
High-quality streaming using Sony QoS
technology is supported by enabling network
client mode and connecting to the Connection
Control Manager (CCM) of either a Sony Network
RX Station (option) or C3 Portal. Higher quality,
stable streaming can be achieved using multiple
networks.
Item
Description
CCM Port
Enter the port number of the
CCM to connect.
User Name
Enter the user name.
Password
Enter the password.
The entered password is
displayed using asterisks. The
entered characters are visible
while the SHIFT key is
pressed.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Use V1.18.2 or later for the Network RX Station.
ˎˎ To stream stably using multiple networks, use a different
carrier line for each network.
ˎˎ When using multiple networks, the target bit rate may be
exceeded depending on the scene being shot.
ˎˎ C3 Portal is a cloud service that is provided by Sony.
To use this service, registration is required.
C3 Portal is not provided in some regions. For details on
areas where the service is provided, refer to the following
site.
https://www.c3p.sony.net
In addition, refer to the following sites for the privacy
policy of C3 Portal.
–– Terms of service
https://www.c3p.sony.net/site/tos_eu.html
–– C3 Portal privacy policy
https://www.c3p.sony.net/site/c3p_privacy_policy.
html
–– Professional ID privacy policy
https://www.pro-id.sony.net/#/privacyPolicy
ˎˎ For more details, contact a Sony professional sales
representative.
1 Connect the camcorder to the network.
For details, see “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 60) and “Connecting to
the Internet” (page 63).
2 Configure the network settings of the
destination to which to connect in
Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1,
Preset 2, or Preset 3 in the setup menu.
You can save network settings of a destination
to which to connect as a preset in Preset 1,
Preset 2, or Preset 3.
Item
Description
CCM Address
Enter the IP address of the
CCM to connect. (Host name
or IP address)
NCM with Proxy Enable/disable proxy
recording when connected
with a CCM.
Camera Control
Enables/disables camera
control when a CCM is
connected.
Camera Setting
Enables/disables ALL file
handling when a CCM is
connected.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Network client mode cannot be set if values are not
entered for all items.
ˎˎ Setting Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset
1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup
menu to Enable enables proxy recording, even when
network client mode is enabled. To enable the NCM
with Proxy setting, set Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec
Mode >Setting in the setup menu to On.
ˎˎ If Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1,
Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup
menu is set to Disable, proxy recording stops if
network client mode is set to On during recording.
If original file recording is continuing, set both to Off
to restart proxy recording.
ˎˎ If Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Proxy File >Size
in the setup menu is set to HD Auto(9Mbps) or HD
Auto(6Mbps), NCM with Proxy cannot be enabled.
If HD Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps) is set after
NCM with Proxy is set to Enable, the setting is
maintained, but proxy recording is not performed.
3 Select one of the presets, set in step 1, in
Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset
Select in the setup menu.
4 Set Maintenance >Network Client Mode
>Setting in the setup menu to On.
Network client mode is enabled, and the
camcorder connects to the Network RX Station
or C3 Portal.
Live streaming starts in response to Network
RX Station operation. An ALL file can also be
saved/loaded using remote control of the unit
by the Network RX Station.
For details about operation, refer to the
instruction manual for the Network RX Station
or the Help Guide for C3 Portal.
You can assign Setting (On/Off) for Network
Client Mode to an assignable switch. For
details about assignment, see “Assigning
Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 121).
[Notes]
ˎˎ Changing to network client mode during normal
streaming (page 71) is not possible.
ˎˎ After changing to network client mode, normal streaming
(page 71) and monitoring are not available.
ˎˎ Changing to network client mode while monitoring will
stop the monitoring.
ˎˎ File transfer is not supported during streaming in network
client mode. File transfer is supported after stopping
streaming.
ˎˎ If streaming in network client mode is started during file
transfer, the file transfer stops. File transfer restarts after
stopping streaming.
ˎˎ The available streaming bit rates that can be configured
by the Network RX Station are limited to the following,
depending on the proxy recording format.
–– If the proxy recording format is 1280×720
9Mbps/6Mbps, the streaming bit rate is set to 1 Mbps
or lower.
–– If the proxy recording format is 640×360 3Mbps, the
streaming bit rate is set to 3 Mbps or lower.
ˎˎ The proxy format cannot be changed in network client
mode. To change the format, first set Network Client
Mode to Off.
ˎˎ Network client mode cannot be set to On when
Maintenance >Network >Modem Remote is set to On in
the menu.
Transferring files in network client mode
You can transfer files to a server set by a CCM by
connecting the camcorder in network client mode
to the CCM of either a Network RX Station or C3
Portal.
1 Select the files you want to transfer.
ˎˎTo transfer a proxy recording: Follow steps
1 to 5 in “Transferring Proxy Files using the
Web Menu” (page 67).
ˎˎTo transfer original files: Follow steps 1 to 6
in “Transferring Original Files using the Web
Menu” (page 68).
2 Tap [Transfer].
“NCM: RX Server” is displayed as a destination.
Specify “NCM: RX Server” as the destination.
3 Tap [Transfer].
Transfer of the selected files to the server
specified on the CCM starts.
[Note]
The destination can also be set to “NCM: RX Server” when not
in network client mode.
In this case, transfer is placed on hold, and then transfer to
the server specified on the CCM starts after connecting to
the CCM in network client mode.
000
73
5. Network Configuration
Using Wi-Fi Remote Control
You can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into
the camcorder from a smartphone, tablet, or other
device over a wireless LAN connection.
Using the Wi-Fi remote control allows you to
operate the camcorder remotely. This allows
you to start/stop recording or configure settings
remotely, and is useful in applications where
the camcorder is fixed in a remote location or
mounted on a crane, for example.
Displaying the Wi-Fi Remote Control
The Wi-Fi Remote screen is automatically resized
to match the screen size of the connected device.
using [Cam Remote Control] (page 75) from
the web menu.
Wi-Fi Remote Screen (Smartphones)
[Notes]
ˎˎ To display the page for a smartphone, change “rm.
html” to “rms.html” in the URL. To display the page for a
tablet, change “rm.html” to “rmt.html” in the URL. When
“rm.html” is entered, the page automatically switches
for display on the corresponding device. However, the
appropriate page may not be displayed, depending on
the device.
ˎˎ The Wi-Fi Remote screen may not match the camcorder
settings under the following circumstances. If this occurs,
reload the browser window.
–– If the camcorder is restarted while connected
–– If the camcorder is operated directly while connected
–– If the device has been reconnected
–– If the browser Forward/Back buttons have been used
ˎˎ The Wi-Fi remote control may not function if the wireless
signal strength becomes weak.
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Shooting settings
Iris, Focus, Zoom, S&Q FPS,
Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto
Iris, Gain, ATW, Color Bars, Auto
Black, Auto White
Assign screen
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 60) and “Connecting to
the Internet” (page 63).
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Assignable switches
Assignable switch 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
2 Launch a browser on the device and enter
3 Enter the user name and password
(Maintenance >Access Authentication
(page 114) in the setup menu) on the
browser screen.
When connection is successful, the Wi-Fi
Remote screen appears on the device.
You use the Wi-Fi Remote screen to operate
the camcorder.
You can disable the REC button operation by
sliding the Lock knob to the right on the
screen.
You can also display the Wi-Fi remote control
ˎˎ Status indicators
ˎˎ Cursor control buttons, menu/
status display
Up, Left, Set, Right, Down,
Cancel/Back, Menu, Status,
Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT +
SET)
Main screen
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
“http://<IP_address>/rm.html” in the URL bar,
where “<IP_address>” is the IP address
(Maintenance >Network >IP Address (Wireless)
in the setup menu) of the camcorder.
For example, if the IP address is 192.168.1.1,
enter “http://192.168.1.1/rm.html” in the URL
bar.
Cursor screen
Playback screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Playback control buttons
F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev,
Stop, Next
000
74
5. Network Configuration: Using Wi-Fi Remote Control
Wi-Fi Remote Screen (Tablets)
Cursor screen
Main screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Cursor control buttons, menu/status display
Up, Left, Set, Right, Down, Cancel/Back, Menu, Status,
Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT + SET)
Assign screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Assignable switches
Assignable switch 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
ˎˎ Shooting settings
S&Q FPS, Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto Iris, Gain, ATW,
Color Bars, Auto Black, Auto White
Playback screen
ˎˎ Assignable switches
Assignable switch 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Playback control buttons
F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev, Stop, Next
000
75
5. Network Configuration
Configuring from the Web Menu
The web menu of the camcorder appears when
the camcorder is accessed from a browser
on a device connected using a wireless LAN
connection. Using the web menu, you can
configure settings related to wireless functions,
transfer files, and perform other actions.
Displaying the Web Menu
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 60) and “Connecting to
the Internet” (page 63).
2 Launch a browser on the device and enter
“http://192.168.1.1:8080/index.html” in the URL
bar.
The user name and password entry screen
appears.
3 Enter a user name and password, then select
[OK].
For the user name and password for access
authentication, see Maintenance >Access
Authentication (page 114) in the setup menu.
Setup Menu
Launch a browser on the device and enter
“http://<IP_address>:8080” in the URL bar, where
“<IP_address>” is the IP address (Maintenance
>Network >IP Address in the setup menu) of the
camcorder, to display the Media Info >SD Card
screen of the camcorder.
Tapping
in the top left of the web menu screen
will display the configuration menus. Tap the item
you want to configure.
The menu has the following items: Settings, Media
Info, Job List, and Cam Remote Control.
Settings
Used to configure the camcorder. This screen has
the following items.
Item
Description
See
Wireless
Module
>Streaming
Format
Streaming
format
settings
Streaming Format
Settings
(page 75)
Proxy format
Wireless
Module >Proxy settings
Format
Wireless
Module
>System
Settings
Proxy Format
Settings
(page 76)
Load Network System Settings
(page 76)
Client Mode
Settings
certificate
(execute
using Load
button of
Load
Certification)
Wireless LAN
Station Settings
(page 77)
Media Info
Video
Displays media information and is used to select
files to transfer from media.
ˎˎSD Card: Media inserted into the PROXY SD card
slot of the camcorder.
Double-clicking a file will start playback of the
selected file.
ˎˎAVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long GOP
ˎˎSize is selected in the following settings.
[Note]
Playback may not be supported, depending on the
operating system of the terminal device used and the
browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser
Mobile.”
Job List
Displays the Job List screen for managing file
transfers (page 79).
Cam Remote Control
Wireless LAN
settings
Wireless LAN
>Status
Wireless LAN Checking wireless
settings status LAN settings
(page 77)
Wired LAN
>Wired LAN
Settings
Wired LAN
settings
Wired LAN
>Status
Wired LAN
Checking wired
settings status LAN settings
(page 78)
Streaming Format Settings
Upload
Settings
Transfer
settings
You can configure the stream for monitoring
by devices, and set the format and transmission
destination of the stream for streaming via the
Internet or local network.
Transfer (Upload)
Settings
(page 78)
ˎˎAAC-LC compression
ˎˎSampling frequency: 48 kHz
ˎˎBit rate: 128 kbps for stereo
ˎˎSlot A: Media inserted into card slot A of the
camcorder
ˎˎSlot B: Media inserted into card slot B of the
camcorder
Wireless LAN
>Station
Settings
Wired LAN
Settings
(page 77)
Audio
Displays the Wi-Fi remote control screen
(page 73).
OSS Information
Displays copyright information.
Monitoring Settings
You can set the format for monitoring by devices.
Item
Description
Setting
Monitoring
Size
Sets the video size
and bit rate for
monitoring.
480×270(1Mbps)/
480×270(0.5Mbps)
Monitoring
Frame Rate
Displays the video
frame rate for
monitoring.
23.98fps/25fps/
29.97fps/50fps/
59.94fps
Monitoring
Bit Rate
Displays the video
bit rate for
monitoring.
1Mbps(VBR)/
0.5Mbps(VBR)
[Notes]
ˎˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be
exceeded at times.
ˎˎ A video frame rate of 24 fps is not supported.
ˎˎ 640×360 (3Mbps (VBR)) is not supported for Monitoring
Size.
000
76
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Streaming Settings
You can set the format and transmission
destination for streaming. Up to three settings can
be preset.
Item
Description
Setting
On/Off
Switches streaming On/Off
transmission on/off.
Preset
Selects the preset
from Preset 1 to
Preset 3. You can
edit Preset by
tapping Edit.
Preset1/Preset2/
Preset3
Type
Selects the type of MPEG-2 TS/UDP/
video for streaming. MPEG-2 TS/
RTP
Size
HD Auto/
Sets the size of
video for streaming. 1280×720/
640×360/
When HD Auto is
selected, the size is 480×270/
set to 1920×1080 or 320×180
1280×720,
according to the
setting of the
recording format
recorded on the
SxS memory card or
the format of the
clip to be played
back.
Bit Rate
Sets the bit rate of
video for streaming.
The selectable bit
rate varies
depending on the
Size setting.
Destination
Address
Enter the address of Host name or IP
address
the transmission
destination server
for streaming data.
9Mbps/6Mbps/
3Mbps/2Mbps/
1Mbps/0.5Mbps/
0.3Mbps(Mono L)/
0.3Mbps(Mono R)/
0.2Mbps(Mono L)/
0.2Mbps(Mono R)
Item
Description
Setting
Destination
Port
Enter the port
number of the
transmission
destination server
used for streaming.
1 to 65535
Audio
Channel
Select
Selects the audio
channels for the
streaming output.
Ch-1 & Ch-2/
Ch-3 & Ch-4
[Notes]
Proxy Format Settings
You can set the format of the proxy file that is
recorded on the SD card of the camcorder.
ˎˎ When Streaming is set to On, the monitoring function
cannot be used.
ˎˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the Internet.
Accordingly, the data may potentially be exposed to other
parties.
Always check that the transmission destination can
receive the streaming data.
The data may be sent to an unintended party if the
address or other settings are configured incorrectly.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the status of
the network.
ˎˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with
excessive motion.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is set to a
large size with a small bit rate.
To reduce this, select a smaller size for the Size setting.
ˎˎ If a network with bandwidth of less than 500 kbps is used,
Size and Bit Rate are set to the following.
–– When Size is 480×270, Bit Rate is set to 0.3Mbps(Mono
L), 0.3Mbps(Mono R), 0.2Mbps(Mono L), or
0.2Mbps(Mono R).
–– When Size is 320×180, Bit Rate is set to 0.2Mbps(Mono
L) or 0.2Mbps(Mono R).
When this occurs, video is set to a frame rate of 10 fps, and
audio is set to a sampling frequency of 48 kHz and a bit
rate of 56 kbps Mono.
ˎˎ When Bit Rate is 0.3Mbps(Mono L) or 0.2Mbps(Mono L),
Audio Channel Select >Ch-1 & Ch-2 is set to Ch-1 or Ch-3
& Ch-4 is set to Ch-3.
When Bit Rate is 0.3Mbps(Mono R) or 0.2Mbps(Mono R),
Audio Channel Select >Ch-1 & Ch-2 is set to Ch-2 or Ch-3
& Ch-4 is set to Ch-4.
Video
ˎˎXAVC Proxy (AVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long
GOP)
ˎˎSize is selected in the following settings.
Audio
ˎˎAAC-LC compression
ˎˎSampling frequency: 48 kHz
ˎˎBit rate: 128 kbps for stereo
Item
Description
Setting
Proxy File
recording
>Audio
Channel
Select
Sets the audio
channel to record
to proxy data.
Ch-1 & Ch-2/
Ch-3 & Ch-4
[Notes]
ˎˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be
exceeded at times.
ˎˎ 24 fps is not supported.
ˎˎ When HD Auto is selected for Size in the proxy format
settings, the proxy format is set according to the setting of
the recording format recorded on the SxS memory card or
the format of the clip to be played back.
ˎˎ Proxy files recorded with Size set to HD Auto in the proxy
format settings may not be able to be played in a browser
or Content Browser Mobile. Insert SD cards for recording
proxy files directly into a computer to play the files.
System Settings
Item
Description
Setting
Proxy File
recording
>Size
Sets the video size
and bit rate for
proxy files.
HD Auto(9Mbps)/
HD Auto(6Mbps)/
1280×720(9Mbps)/
1280×720(6Mbps)/
640×360(3Mbps)/
480×270(1Mbps)/
480×270(0.5Mbps)
Proxy File
recording
>Frame
Rate
Displays the video 23.98fps/
frame rate for proxy 25fps/
29.97fps/
files.
50fps/
59.94fps
Proxy File
recording
>Bit Rate
Displays the video
bit rate for proxy
files.
9Mbps(VBR)/
6Mbps(VBR)/
3Mbps(VBR)/
1Mbps(VBR)/
0.5Mbps(VBR)
Use to load the Network Client Mode Settings
certificate.
000
77
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Network Client Mode Settings
ˎˎLoad Certification: Load button
Write the “CCM_certification.pem” CCM
certificate to be loaded to the root directory of
an SD card beforehand. For details about CCM
certificates, contact a Sony professional sales
representative.
Wireless LAN Station Settings
Use this screen to make settings for connecting
the camcorder to a wireless LAN.
Item
Description
Host Name
Name of the camcorder (can be
modified)
SSID
Displays the SSID selected in
[Access Point].
Key
Enter the password for the
access point.
2 Configure settings on the Station Settings
Item
Description
Show Key
When set to On, entered
characters are displayed.
DHCP
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to [On], an IP address
is automatically assigned to the
camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
address manually, set to [Off].
3 Tap [Submit].
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the
camcorder. Enabled only when
DHCP is [Off].
Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask of the
camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
4 Select Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode in
Gateway
Enter the gateway for the access
point.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
DNS Auto
Obtains DNS address
automatically.
When set to On, the address of
the DNS server is obtained
automatically.
Primary DNS
Server
Enter the primary DNS server for
the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is
[Off].
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the secondary DNS server
for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is
[Off].
Submit
Applies the wireless LAN
settings.
Connecting to an access point in station mode
without using WPS
1 Connect the camcorder and device using
access point mode (page 61).
Station mode
screen.
Configure settings to match the settings of the
access point connection.
For details about access point settings, refer to the
instruction manual for the access point.
The specified settings are applied.
the setup menu.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Wi-Fi Station],
then press the knob.
This step connects the camcorder to the
access point in station mode. Proceed to step
9 in “Connecting to an access point using WPS”
(page 62) to access the camcorder from the
device.
Wired LAN Settings
Use this screen to make settings for connecting
the camcorder to a wired LAN.
Checking wireless LAN settings
Use the Wireless LAN >Status tab to monitor the
wireless LAN status.
The displayed settings will vary depending on the
wireless LAN mode of the camcorder.
Item
Description
DHCP
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to [On], an IP address
is automatically assigned to the
camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
address manually, set to [Off].
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the
camcorder.
Enabled when DHCP is [Off].
Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask of the
camcorder. Enabled when
DHCP is [Off].
Gateway
Enter the gateway for the access
point.
Enabled when DHCP is [Off].
Access point mode
000
78
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Item
Description
DNS Auto
Obtains DNS address
automatically.
When set to On, the address of
the DNS server is obtained
automatically.
Primary DNS
Server
Enter the primary DNS server of
the router.
Enabled when DNS Auto is [Off].
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the secondary DNS server
of the router.
Enabled when DNS Auto is [Off].
Web/Cam
Remote
Enables/disables access to the
camcorder web menu and Wi-Fi
remote control.
When set to On, access is
permitted.
Submit
Sets the wired LAN settings.
[Note]
To prevent unauthorized access from the Internet, it is
recommended that Web/Cam Remote be set to On only
when the wired LAN network is not connected to the
Internet. When connecting to the Internet, check that the
network connection is a secure network before use.
Checking wired LAN settings
Use the Wired LAN >Status tab to monitor the
wired LAN status.
Transfer (Upload) Settings
You can register and set servers for transferring
proxy files or original files recorded on the
camcorder.
Use the following procedure to register with “Sony
Ci.”
For details about registering, visit www. SonyMCS.
com/wireless.
1 Check that “Sony Ci” is displayed on the
[Upload Settings] tab, then click [Edit].
The “Sony Ci” setup screen appears.
After specifying settings, tap [OK] to apply the
settings. Tapping [Cancel] discards the settings.
Auto transfer ON/OFF
If [Auto upload] is [On] and an Internet connection
exists, proxy files are automatically transferred to
the default server specified on the Upload Settings
tab when recording ends.
“Sony Ci,” “NCM: RX Server,” “Server Settings1,”
“Server Settings2,” and “Server Settings3” are
registered as transfer destination servers. The
default value is “Sony Ci.”
“Sony Ci” is the Media Cloud Services provided by
Sony. You can transfer files to the “Sony Ci” cloud
service.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The service may not be available in some regions.
ˎˎ A subscription is required in order to use the “Sony Ci”
cloud service. For details, visit www.SonyMCS.com/
wireless.
For details about the Sony Ci privacy policy, visit the
following sites.
–– Terms of service
https://www.sonymcs.com/terms/
–– Usage policy
https://www.sonymcs.com/use/
–– Privacy policy
https://www.sonymcs.com/privacy/
ˎˎ The name of the transfer destination folder is specified in
[Destination Directory]. If not specified, a folder name with
the current date is used. To change the setting, see “To
change registered server settings” (page 79).
2 Enter a user name in User, and a password in
Password.
The entered characters are visible when Show
Password is set to On.
Load Certification: Load button
Write the “Ci_certification.pem” Ci certificate to
be loaded to the root directory of an SD card
beforehand. For details about Ci certificates,
contact a Sony professional sales
representative.
3 Tap [OK].
After registering with “Sony Ci,” [Unlink]
appears on the Settings screen. Tapping
[Unlink] releases the user account to enable
other user accounts to link with the
camcorder.
Item
Description
Default Server
Set to [On] to set the default
file destination server.
(Displayed at the top of the
server list for file transfers.)
Display Name
Enter the name of the server
to display in the list.
Service
Displays the type of server.
FTP: FTP server
Host Name
If a port number other than the
default number of 21 is used,
append a colon and the port
number at the end of the address
(for example, “:123”).
User
Enter the user name.
Password
Enter the password.
Show Password
When set to On, entered
characters are displayed.
PASV Mode
Enable/disable PASV mode.
Destination
Directory
Specify the destination
directory.
[Note]
To register a destination server
You can select “Server Settings1,” “Server
Settings2,” or “Server Settings3” (registered in
Upload Server) as the destination server.
Select the server settings, tap Edit, and configure
the server information on the displayed screen
(below).
Enter the address of the server.
[Note]
If an invalid character is entered
in the directory name, the
directory is not created and files
are transferred to the top level of
the default transfer destination
directory.
Using Secure
Protocol
Set whether to use secure FTP.
000
79
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Item
Description
Load Certification
Load an intermediate CA
certificate.
Displayed when Using Secure
Protocol is set to On.
Loading Certificates Troubleshooting
[Notes]
ˎˎ Communication using FTP is
not encrypted. The use of FTPS
is recommended.
ˎˎ An intermediate CA certificate
containing a root certificate is
required.
ˎˎ The certificate to be loaded
must be in PEM format, and
should be written to the root
directory of the SD card with
“certification.pem” file name.
Item
Description
Total
Progress status of the transfer
of all files
Status
Progress status of the file
being transferred
Remain time
Predicted remaining transfer
time
Communication using FTP is not encrypted. The use of FTPS
is recommended.
Transfer data rate
Transfer rate
To change registered server settings
To stop/restart file transfer or delete a file from
the transfer list
[Note]
Select the server whose settings you want to
change on the Upload Settings screen, then
tap [Edit]. Change the setting on the displayed
configuration screen.
For details about items, see “To register a
destination server”.
Monitoring File Transfers (Job List)
You can monitor file transfer status, manage files in
the transfer file list, and start/stop file transfers.
The camcorder supports the FTP resume function
(for continuing file transfer if transfer stops).
1 Select a file.
2 Tap on the top right of the screen.
Select a menu item.
ˎˎAbort selected: Stop file transfer.
ˎˎDelete from list: Delete the file from the
transfer list.
ˎˎStart selected: Start file transfer.
ˎˎSelect All: Select all files in the list.
ˎˎClear completed: Delete all files that have
been transferred from the list.
Symptom
Solution
“Invalid certification
file.” appears.
The certificate being loaded
is invalid.
Check the certificate.
“Certification file not
found.” appears.
Check that the file name of
the certificate file is correct.
000
80
5. Network Configuration
Supported Network Functions and Operating Limitations
Network Functions and Network Connection Settings
Limitations on Simultaneous Use of Network Functions
The supported network functions and corresponding network connection settings (Maintenance
>Network >Wi-Fi Mode, Modem, and Wired LAN settings) are shown below.
To enable the network functions, set Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu to On.
The following limitations apply to the simultaneous use of network functions.
Wireless LAN connection
Wired LAN
connection
Operation
Network function
None
Disabled
Network function stopped
Maintenance >Network >Wireless
Network in the setup menu
Maintenance
Maintenance >Network
>Network >Modem >Wired LAN
Wi-Fi Access
Point
Wi-Fi
Station
Off
On
Off
Enable
Disable
Proxy recording 1)
(page 54)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Proxy playback
(page 75)
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
No
No
No
Yes 2)
No
1) Streaming and file transfer operate using wired LAN. The USB wireless LAN module is reserved for Wi-Fi remote control
operation.
File transfer
(page 67)
No
Yes 2)
No
Yes 2)
No
Yes 2)
No
[Note]
Streaming
transmission
(page 71)
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Monitoring
(page 75)
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
No
No
No
Yes 2)
No
Network client mode
(page 72)
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Camcorder remote
control
(page 73)
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
No
No
No
Yes 2)
No
1) Proxy recording is enabled when Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode> Setting in the setup menu is set to On.
2) Supports camcorder and network-connected device functions.
USB wireless LAN module
Disabled
USB wireless LAN module operating
3G/4G/LTE USB modem
Disabled
3G/4G/LTE USB modem operating
None
Enabled
Wired LAN operating
USB wireless LAN module
Enabled
USB wireless LAN module and wired LAN operating 1)
Wired LAN connection is not possible when the USB extension adaptor of the CBK-NA1R Ethernet Adaptor, supplied with the
CBK-NA1 (option), is attached to the USB wireless LAN module on the camcorder.
000
81
6. Clip Operations
Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Thumbnail Screen
Cursor
(yellow)
1
2
3
4
5
6
78
OK S Sub
9
The thumbnail screen appears if you press the
THUMBNAIL button in E-E or playback mode.
Thumbnail screens display lists of the index
pictures of clips stored on SxS memory cards as
thumbnails.
You can select any clip (page 82) on the
thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip
(page 82).
You can also add a clip flag to any clip on the
thumbnail screen to filter clips according to the
flags. You can also switch to the Essence Mark
thumbnail screen from the thumbnail screen and
add essence marks (for example, shot marks) to
any frame in the clip.
10
11
To hide the thumbnail screen, press the
THUMBNAIL button.
1. Thumbnail (index picture)
When a clip is recorded, its first frame is
automatically displayed as the index picture.
You can change the index picture to any frame
(page 86).
2. Selected media icon/media status
A
mark is displayed if the media is protected.
If two SxS memory cards are inserted in the
camcorder, you can switch between them using
the SLOT SELECT button.
3. Clip number / total number of clips
12
13
4. Battery / Voltage status
5. Playback disabled indicator
6. Clip status
Displays the clips status using an icon.
7. Clip select checkbox
Place a check mark in the checkbox to select a clip
(thumbnail).
8. Thumbnail information
Displays thumbnail information. The displayed
information varies according to the Customize
View setting (page 87).
Icon
Meaning
S, OK, NG, KP
icons
Essence mark or clip flag attached
to a clip
Sub icon
Subclip recording (1-slot Simul Rec)
9. Clip name / title
Displays the name or title of the selected clip.
Lock icon
Clip is locked (protected)
10. Recording video format
000
82
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
11. Special recording information
Displays the recording mode if the clip was
recorded using a special recording mode (Slow &
Quick Motion).
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the [Recording
frame rate/Playback frame rate] are displayed on
the right.
12. Clip duration
13. Creation date
Selecting Clips
To select a clip thumbnail, do one of the following
to move the yellow cursor to the thumbnail that
you want to select.
ˎˎPress the , , ,  buttons.
ˎˎTurn the MENU knob.
ˎˎPress the PREV or NEXT button.
Selecting the First Thumbnail
Press and hold the F REV button, and press the
PREV button.
Selecting the Last Thumbnail
Playing Clips Sequentially Starting
from the Selected Clip
1 Select the thumbnail of the clip that you want
to play first.
Playing at High Speed
Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F REV
button (page 7).
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
2 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Playback begins from the start of the selected
clip.
It plays all clips sequentially starting from the
selected clip.
When playback of the last clip finishes, the
camcorder switches to the camera image or
external input state.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the
thumbnail screen.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Not all clips may be played back sequentially if the clips
on the SxS memory cards were recorded with a mixture of
different recording formats.
ˎˎ Clips with an playback disabled icon (page 81)
displayed on the thumbnail screen are not played. The
corresponding clips are skipped and sequential playback
continues.
ˎˎ There may be momentary picture breakup or still image
display at the boundary between clips. During this time,
the play controls and the THUMBNAIL button cannot be
operated.
ˎˎ When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and begin
playback, there may be momentary picture breakup at
the start of the clip. To view the start of the clip without
breakup, put the camcorder into playback mode, pause,
use the PREV button to return to the start of the clip, and
start play again.
Returning to the Start of the Current
Clip
Press the PREV button.
ˎˎDuring playback, this jumps to the start of the
current clip and starts playback.
ˎˎDuring F FWD, this jumps to the start of the
current clip and pauses playback.
ˎˎDuring F REV or pause, this jumps to the start of
the current clip and displays a still image.
ˎˎEach subsequent press of the button moves to
the previous clip.
Pausing Playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play is
paused.
Press the button again to return to play mode.
Jumping to the Last Clip
Simultaneously press the F FWD and NEXT
buttons. This jumps to the last frame of the last clip
recorded on the SxS memory card.
Adding a Shot Mark during Playback
You can add shot marks to clips during playback
by using the same method used during recording
(page 49).
[Note]
Playing from the Start of the First Clip
Simultaneously press the PREV and F REV buttons.
This jumps to the start of the first clip on the SxS
memory card.
Jumping to the Start of the Next Clip
Press and hold the F FWD button, and press the
NEXT button.
last clip, this jumps to the end of the clip and
pauses playback.
ˎˎDuring F REV or pause, this jumps to the start of
the next clip and displays a still image.
ˎˎEach subsequent press of the button moves to
the next clip.
Press the NEXT button.
ˎˎDuring playback, this jumps to the start of the
next clip and starts playback.
ˎˎDuring F FWD, this jumps to the start of the next
clip and pauses playback. During playback of the
Shot marks cannot be recorded when the SxS memory card
is write protected.
Stopping Playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the
camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops and
the thumbnail screen (page 81) appears in
the viewfinder.
Play also stops if you eject the memory card. In this
case, the camera picture appears in the viewfinder.
000
83
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Basic Thumbnail Menu Operations
The Thumbnail menu is used to protect/delete
clips, check properties, add/delete clip flags and
essence marks to frames in a clip, and other tasks.
1 Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears.
2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press
the MENU button.
The menu screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Thumbnail],
then press the knob.
You can also press the  or  button to
select [Thumbnail], and press the SET button.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When an SxS memory card is write protected, it is not
possible to copy, delete, change index pictures, or add
and delete clip flags marks and shot marks.
ˎˎ Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state
when the menu was displayed.
For details about the thumbnail screen structure,
see “Thumbnail Menu” (page 87).
Protecting Clips
You can protect a specified clip or all clips to
protect the clips from being deleted.
is added to the thumbnails of protected clips.
Clips can be protected on the thumbnail screen or
the filtered clip thumbnail screen (page 85).
[Notes]
ˎˎ This function is not available when the file system is set
to FAT.
ˎˎ For clips created in 1-slot Simul Rec mode, subclips are
also protected.
Protecting a specific clip
To hide the Thumbnail menu, press the MENU
button again.
To select a menu item/sub-item, do one of the
following.
ˎˎTurn the MENU knob to select an item or subitem, then press the knob.
ˎˎPress the arrow buttons (, , , ) to select
an item or sub-item, then press the SET button.
A selection list or a clip properties screen appears
(page 85) according to the selected item or
sub-item.
To return to the previous screen, push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE
position.
1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Select
Clip in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The clip is protected, and a completion
message appears.
6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Protecting all clips
4 Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT
button.
A confirmation screen appears.
You can copy clips to another SxS memory card.
Clips are copied to destination SxS memory cards
using the same names as the original clips.
[Notes]
Unlocking all clips
ˎˎ If a clip with the same name already exists at the copy
destination SxS memory card, a one-digit number in
parentheses is added to the original name.
The number in parentheses is the smallest number that
does not exist at the copy destination.
Example:
ABCD0002ABCD0002(1)
ABCD0002(1)ABCD0002(2)
ABCD0005(3)ABCD0005(4)
ˎˎ If the parenthetical numbers (1) to (999) already exist at
the copy destination, because a clip has been copied
more than 1000 times, it is not possible to copy any more
clips under that name.
ˎˎ A message appears if there is not enough free space on
the copy destination SxS memory card. Exchange the card
for one with more free space.
ˎˎ When multiple clips are recorded on the source SxS
memory card, it may not be possible to copy all clips even
when the source and destination memory cards have the
same capacity, depending on the memory characteristics
and usage of the memory cards.
ˎˎ When clips created in 1-slot Simul Rec mode are copied,
both the main clip and subclips are copied.
1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Unlock
Copying a specific clip
1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Lock All
Clips in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
All clips are protected, and a completion
message appears.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
All Clips in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to protect, 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
Copying Clips
press the knob.
All clips are unlocked, and a completion
message appears.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
1 Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >Select Clip in
the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to copy,
then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
4 Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT
button.
A confirmation screen appears.
000
84
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The clip is copied, and a completion message
appears.
6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Copying all clips
You can copy all clips stored on the same SxS
memory card at the same time to another SxS
memory card.
1 Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >All Clips in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
All clips are copied, and a completion message
appears.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
The clip selection screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to delete,
then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
4 Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT
button.
A confirmation screen appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The clip is deleted, and a completion message
appears.
6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
The clips below the deleted clip on the thumbnail
screen move up one position.
Deleting all clips
You can delete all clips stored on the same SxS
memory card at the same time.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Deleted clips cannot be restored.
ˎˎ If the media or clip is protected, this function is disabled.
1 Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >All Clips in the
Deleting Clips
You can delete clips from SxS memory cards. Clips
can be deleted on the thumbnail screen or the
filtered clip thumbnail screen (page 85).
[Note]
When clips created in 1-slot Simul Rec mode are deleted,
both the main clip and subclips are deleted.
1 Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >Select Clip in
the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
All clips are deleted, and a completion
message appears.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Transferring Clips
Clips (original files) recorded on SxS memory
cards and proxy files recorded on SD cards can be
uploaded to a server using Thumbnail >Transfer
Clip and Transfer Clip(Proxy), respectively, in the
setup menu.
For the Thumbnail >Transfer Clip procedure, see
“Transferring Original Files using the Thumbnail
Screen” (page 68).
For the Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy)
procedure, see “Transferring Proxy Files using the
Thumbnail Screen” (page 67).
[Note]
When clips created in 1-slot Simul Rec mode are transferred
using Thumbnail >Transfer Clip, only the main clip is
transferred.
000
85
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
[Note]
Displaying Clip Properties
This function is not available when the file system is set to
FAT.
The clip properties screen for the selected clip appears when you select Thumbnail >Display Clip
Properties in the setup menu.
1
4
OK S Sub
2
5
6
7
3
1. Current clip image
Displays the index picture and status of the
selected clip.
6. Special recording information
2. Timecode display
TC Index: Timecode of the displayed image
Start: Timecode of the recording start point
End: Timecode of the recording end point
Duration: Duration between start and end points
To hide the clip properties screen, do one of the
following.
Press the RESET/RETURN button: Returns to the
Thumbnail menu screen.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Sets the camcorder
to E-E mode and displays the camera picture.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button: Starts playback of
the selected clip.
3. Creation date and modified date
4. Clip name
5. Recording format
Video Codec: Video codec
Size: Picture size
FPS: Frame rate
Audio Codec: Audio codec
Ch/Bit: Audio recording channel/Number of bits
for audio recording
1 Select the thumbnail for the clip to which you
want to add the clip flag, then select
Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag, then
1 Select Thumbnail >Filter Clips in the setup
menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag used
to filter clips, then press the knob.
Setting
Filter clip flag
OK
OK
press the knob.
NG
NG
Setting
Added clip flag
KEEP
KP
Add OK
OK
None
(Clips are not filtered)
Add NG
NG
Add KEEP
KP
The clip flag is added to the thumbnail of the
selected clip.
You can also use an assignable switch assigned
with the clip flag function to add clip flags
(page 121).
The clip screen appears showing the clips
filtered by the selected clip flag. This screen is
referred to as the filtered clip screen.
To cancel filtering, do one of the following.
ˎˎPress the RESET/RETURN button.
ˎˎSelect Thumbnail >Thumbnail View >All in the
setup menu.
7. Recording device name
Deleting a Clip Flag
1 Select the thumbnail for the clip from which
you want to delete a clip flag, then select
Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag >Delete Clip Flag in
the setup menu.
The clip flag is deleted.
Adding/Deleting Essence Marks in
Clips
You can add (and delete) essence marks (shot
marks, recording start marks) to any frame in a clip.
You add/delete essence marks on the essence
mark thumbnail screen.
[Note]
Adding Clip Flags to Clips
You can add clip flags (OK, NG or KP marks) to clips
to filter the display of clips based on the clip flags.
You can perform this operation on the thumbnail
screen or the filtered clip thumbnail screen
(page 85).
This function is not available when the file system is set to
FAT.
Filtering the Clips Displayed using the
Filtered Clip Screen
[Note]
This function is not available when the file system is set to
FAT.
Adding a shot mark
1 Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View > Essence
Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [All], and then
press the knob.
000
86
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
3 Select the thumbnail for the frame to which
you want to add the essence mark on the
essence mark thumbnail screen, then select
Thumbnail >Set Shot Mark in the setup menu.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select one of the
following, then press the knob.
Setting
Operation
Add Shot Mark1
Adds Shot Mark 1
Add Shot Mark2
Adds Shot Mark 2
The shot mark is added to the selected frame.
Filtering Clips (Frames) using the
Essence Mark Thumbnail Screen
The essence mark thumbnail screen displays only
those frames in a clip where an essence mark has
been recorded in thumbnail view. Display the
thumbnail screen, then either press the ESSENCE
MARK button (page 9) or use the following
procedure to display the essence mark thumbnail
screen.
[Note]
This function is not available when the file system is set to
FAT.
Deleting a shot mark
Thumbnail >Thumbnail View >Essence
1 Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View > Essence 1 Select
Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an essence
2 Select the type of shot mark to delete.
mark used to filter frames, then press the knob.
3 Select the thumbnail for the frame from which
Description
Setting
you want to delete a shot mark on the essence
mark thumbnail screen, then select Thumbnail
>Set Shot Mark in the setup menu.
All
All frames with added essence
marks
Rec Start
Frames with a recording start
mark and the first frame of
clips that do not have a
recording start mark
Shot Mark0 to
Shot Mark9
Frames with each shot mark
4 Turn the MENU knob to select one of the
following, then press the knob.
Setting
Operation
Delete Shot Mark1
Deletes Shot Mark 1
Delete Shot Mark2
Deletes Shot Mark 2
The shot mark is deleted from the selected
frame.
The essence mark thumbnail screen appears
filtered by the selected essence mark.
If a clip is recorded using planning metadata that
defines names for shot mark 0 to shot mark 9, the
selection options in the list are displayed by the
defined names.
Changing the Index Picture of a Clip
You can set the frame selected on the essence
mark thumbnail screen as the index picture for the
clip.
Select the thumbnail of the frame you want to
set as the index picture for the clip, then select
Thumbnail >Set Index Picture in the setup menu.
000
87
6. Clip Operations
Thumbnail Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
Item
Sub-item setting
Description
Display Clip Properties
–
Displays clip properties (page 85).
Set Index Picture
–
Sets/changes the index picture of a clip
(page 86).
Thumbnail View
Changes the thumbnail
screen displayed.
Displays the essence mark thumbnail screen
Essence Mark Thumbnail
All/Rec Start/Shot Mark1/Shot with clips filtered by essence mark (page 86).
Mark2/Shot Mark3/Shot Mark4/
Shot Mark5/Shot Mark6/Shot
Mark7/Shot Mark8/Shot Mark9/
Shot Mark0
Clip Thumbnail
Displays the thumbnail screen (clip thumbnail
screen) (page 81).
Add Shot Mark1
Adds Shot Mark 1 to a frame (page 85).
Delete Shot Mark1
Deletes Shot Mark 1 (page 86).
Add Shot Mark2
Adds Shot Mark 2 to a frame (page 85).
Delete Shot Mark2
Deletes Shot Mark 2 (page 86).
Add OK
Adds an OK flag to a clip (page 85).
Add NG
Adds an NG flag to a clip (page 85).
Add KEEP
Adds a KP (Keep) flag to a clip (page 85).
Delete Clip Flag
Deletes a clip flag (page 85).
Select Clip
Selects the clip to protect (page 83).
Lock All Clips
Protects all clips on the media (page 83).
Unlock All Clips
Unlocks all clips on the media (page 83).
Copy Clip
Copies clips.
Select Clip
Selects the clip to copy (page 83).
All Clips
Copies all clips on the media (page 84).
Copy Sub Clip
Copies subclips to other
media as main clips.
All Clips
Selects all the subclips to copy (page 53).
Delete Clip
Deletes clips.
Select Clip
Selects the clip to delete (page 84).
All Clips
Deletes all clips on the media (page 84).
Transfer Clip
Registers original files to
transfer in the job list.
Select Clip
Selects the original file to transfer (page 68).
All Clips
Selects all the original files in media to transfer
(page 69).
Transfer Clip(Proxy)
Registers proxy files to
transfer in the job list.
Select Clip
Selects the proxy file to transfer corresponding
to the selected original file (page 67).
All Clips
Selects all the proxy files in media to transfer
corresponding to the original files (page 68).
Set Shot Mark
Adds/deletes shot marks.
Set Clip Flag
Adds/deletes clip flags.
Lock/Unlock Clip
Protects/unlocks a clip.
Item
Sub-item setting
Description
Filter Clips
Filters the display of clips
by clip flag.
OK
Filters the display of clips by OK flags
(page 85).
NG
Filters the display of clips by NG flags
(page 85).
KEEP
Filters the display of clips by KP (Keep) flags
(page 85).
None
Thumbnail Caption
Date Time/Time Code/
Duration/Sequential
Number
Clips are not filtered (page 85).
Selects the information displayed beneath clip
thumbnails.
Date Time: Displays the date and time.
Time Code: Displays the timecode.
Duration: Displays the duration of the clip.
Sequential Number: Displays a sequential
number for each clip.
Customize View
000
88
7. Menu Display and Settings
Setup Menu Organization
On this camcorder, settings for shooting and
playback are made in the setup menu, which
appears in the viewfinder.
The setup menu can also be displayed on an
external video monitor (page 135).
Menu Structure
User menu
Menu used to arrange items from the setup
menu in any chosen order (page 92).
Operation menu
Menu used to make settings related to
shooting (excluding settings related to picture
quality).
Paint menu
Menu used to make settings related to picture
quality.
Thumbnail menu
Menu used to make settings related to clip
thumbnails (page 87).
Menu Items
Item
Description
Update Media
102
Operation menu
Update media
management
information
GPS
Location information
(GPS) settings
102
Item
Description
System settings
95
Planning
Metadata
Planning metadata
settings
103
Format
Base Setting
Dynamic range mode
settings
95
USB
Copy to USB media
settings
103
Flash Band
Reduce
Flashband correction
settings
103
Maintenance menu
Menu used to make settings related to
camcorder maintenance and system
management.
File menu
Menu used to make perform operations on
files.
Page
HDR Setting
HDR settings
95
Format Media
Media format settings
96
Input/Output
Input/output signal
settings
96
Super Impose
Superimposition
settings
97
LCD
LCD monitor settings
97
Rec Function
Special recording mode
settings
97
[Note]
The Thumbnail menu can be used only when a
thumbnail screen (page 81) is displayed. It is disabled
when the thumbnail screen is not displayed.
Page
Paint menu
Item
Description
Switch Status
Correction functions
and test signal on/off
settings
104
Page
XAVC Proxy Rec Proxy data settings
Mode
98
HDR Paint
Setting
HDR settings
104
Assignable
Switch
Assign functions to
assignable switches
98
White
Color temperature
settings
104
VF Setting
Viewfinder settings
98
Black
Black level settings
104
Flare
Flare correction
settings
104
Marker
Marker settings
99
Gain Switch
Gain value settings
99
Auto Iris
Auto iris settings
99
Zebra
Zebra pattern settings
100
Display On/Off
Viewfinder display item
settings
“!” LED
Gamma(HDR)
HDR gamma settings
105
Gamma
105
100
Gamma correction
settings
Black Gamma
105
Viewfinder “!” settings
101
Black gamma
correction settings
Knee
106
White Setting
White balance settings
101
Knee correction
settings
Offset White
Offset white settings
101
White Clip
White clip settings
106
Shutter
Shutter settings
102
Detail(QFHD)
QFHD detail settings
106
Slow Shutter
Slow shutter settings
102
Detail(HD)
HD detail settings
106
Time Zone
Time settings
102
Detail(SD)
SD detail settings
106
Clip
Clip settings
102
Aperture
Aperture correction
settings
107
000
89
7. Menu Display and Settings: Setup Menu Organization
Item
Description
Item
Description
Skin Detail
Skin detail correction
settings
107
Auto Shading
Auto black shading
correction settings
114
Matrix
Matrix correction
settings
107
APR
APR settings
114
Multi Matrix
Multi matrix correction
settings
107
Setup for
Mobile App
114
V Modulation
V modulation shading
correction settings
108
Connection settings
using the network
setup assist tool
Access
Authentication
Access authentication
settings
114
Low Key
Saturation
Low key saturation
correction settings
108
Network
Network connection
settings
115
Saturation
Mode
Saturation correction
settings
108
Network Client
Mode
Network client mode
settings
116
Noise
Suppression
Noise suppression
settings
108
File Transfer
Wi-Fi transfer settings
116
Streaming
Streaming settings
117
Clock Set
Internal clock settings
117
Language
Display language
settings
118
Hours Meter
Digital time counter
settings
118
Network Reset
Network reset
118
Page
Maintenance menu
Page
Item
Description
White Shading
White shading
correction settings
109
Black Shading
Black shading
correction settings
109
Fan Control
Fan control settings
118
Battery settings
109
Viewfinder display
settings
118
Battery
VF Display
Setting
DC Voltage
Alarm
External DC source
voltage alarm settings
109
Option
Software option
settings
118
Audio
Audio settings
109
Version
Version settings
118
WRR Setting
Wireless tuner settings
111
Time Code
Timecode settings
112
Essence Mark
Essence mark settings
112
Camera Config
Camcorder operation
settings
112
Preset White
Preset white settings
White Filter
DCC Adjust
Flicker Reduce
Genlock
Page
File menu
Item
Description
User File
User file settings
119
113
All File
ALL file settings
119
Filter settings
113
Scene File
Scene file settings
119
DCC settings
113
Reference File
Reference file settings
119
Flicker correction
settings
114
Lens File
Lens file settings
120
Genlock settings
114
User Gamma
Gamma file settings
120
Page
000
90
7. Menu Display and Settings
Basic Setup Menu Operations
Displaying the Setup Menu
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press the
MENU button.
The camcorder enters menu mode and the menu
list appears on the screen.
ˎˎThe menu item selection area displays a
maximum of seven lines. You can scroll
through menus with more than seven lines
by moving the cursor up and down.
4 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
button, to move the cursor to the sub-item
that you want to set, and then confirm by
pressing the MENU knob or the SET button.
The settings of the selected sub-item appear,
and the cursor moves to the currently selected
value.
Entering Text
When you select an item, such as a file name,
which requires character entry, the character entry
screen appears.
1
The following example shows the cursor
positioned at the Operation menu
Menu list
Displayed when there are
further menu items below.
Menu item selection area
ˎˎIf the selected item has sub-items,
they appear on the right.
ˎˎIf there are no sub-items, the current
setting appears on the right.
ˎˎSelect [Back] to return to the
previous level.
Menu item selection area
[Note]
The setup menu cannot be used when the camcorder is in
focus magnification mode. Exit focus magnification mode
by pressing the assignable switch to which the Focus Mag
function has been assigned.
Making Menu Settings
3 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
button, to move the cursor to the menu item
that you want to set, and then confirm by
pressing the MENU knob or the SET button.
The sub-items area appears to the right of the
menu item selection area, and the cursor
moves to the first sub-item.
1 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
button, to move the cursor to the desired
menu.
A list of selectable menu items appears in the
menu item selection area to the right of the
menu list.
2 Press the MENU knob or the SET button.
The menu item selection screen appears.
You can also display the menu item selection
screen by pressing the  button.
Settings area
ˎˎDisplays sub-items and their current
settings
ˎˎTo return to the previous level, select
[Back], press the  button, or push the
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
down to the ESCAPE position.
Settings area
ˎˎThe settings area displays a maximum of
nine lines. You can scroll through menus
with more than nine sub-items by moving
the cursor up and down.
ˎˎFor sub-items with a large settings range (for
example, –99 to +99), the settings area is not
displayed. The current setting is highlighted
to indicate that the value can be changed.
5 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
button, to select the value to set, and then
confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET
button.
The setting is changed, and the display is
updated to show the new setting.
If you select [Execute] for an executable item,
the corresponding function is executed.
If an item requires confirmation before execution,
selecting the item in step 3 hides the menu and
a confirmation message appears. Follow the
instructions in the message to execute or cancel
the operation.
2
3
1 Press the MENU knob to select the type of
character to enter, then press the MENU knob
or SET button.
ABC: Uppercase alphabetic characters
abc: Lowercase alphabetic characters
123: Numeric characters
!#$: Special characters
2 Select a character from the selected character
type, then press the knob.
The cursor moves to the next field.
Space: Enters a space character at the cursor
position.
/: Moves the position of the cursor.
BS: Deletes the character on the left of the
cursor (backspace).
3 When finished, select [Done] and press the
dial.
The character string is confirmed and the
character entry screen disappears.
000
91
7. Menu Display and Settings: Basic Setup Menu Operations
Canceling Changes to Settings
1 Push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
down to the ESCAPE position.
Exiting the Menu
1 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or press
the MENU button.
The normal camera picture reappears.
Locking/Unlocking the Menu
4 Enter an arbitrary passcode number.
The valid input range is 0000 to 9999. The
default value is 0000.
Enter a number and press the MENU knob to
move the cursor to the next digit.
When all digits have been entered, move the
cursor to [Set].
5 With [Set] selected, press the MENU knob.
The entry is applied.
A confirmation message appears.
Subsequently, only the User menu is displayed.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the menu is locked without registering the following
setup menu items in the User menu, assigning the menu
function to an assignable switch is not possible.
ˎˎ If some of the following setup menu items are assigned to
an assignable switch when the menu is locked, the setting
for the functions assigned to assignable switches are
forcibly set to Off when the menu is locked.
1 Press and hold the MENU knob and press the
MENU ON/OFF switch down to display the
setup menu.
2 Display Maintenance >Camera Config >User
Menu with Lock in the setup menu.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you press and hold the MENU knob and press
the MENU ON/OFF switch down, Camera Config
>User Menu Only changes to User Menu with Lock.
ˎˎ If you press the MENU ON/OFF switch down without
pressing the MENU knob or you press the MENU
button to display the menu, Camera Config >User
Menu with Lock is not displayed.
3 Select “On,” then press the MENU knob.
The viewfinder screen display switches to the
passcode number input screen.
Functions assignable
to assignable
switches
Maintenance >File Transfer
>Auto Upload(Proxy)
Auto Upload(Proxy)
Unlocking the menu
1 Press and hold the MENU knob and press the
MENU ON/OFF switch down to display the
setup menu.
2 Display User >Camera Config >User Menu
with Lock in the setup menu.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you press and hold the MENU knob and press
the MENU ON/OFF switch down, Camera Config
>User Menu Only changes to User Menu with Lock.
ˎˎ If you press the MENU ON/OFF switch down without
pressing the MENU knob or you press the MENU
button to display the menu, Camera Config >User
Menu with Lock is not displayed.
Setup menu
Functions assignable
to assignable
switches
Operation >Rec Function
>Picture Cache Rec
Picture Cache Rec
Operation >Rec Function
>Clip Continuous Rec
Clip Continuous Rec
The viewfinder screen display switches to the
passcode number input screen.
Operation >Rec Function
>Slow & Quick Motion
Slow & Quick Motion
4 Enter the passcode number used to lock the
You can lock the setup menu so that only the User
menu is displayed.
Locking the menu
Setup menu
Operation >VF Setting >Color VF Mode
Mode
Operation >Display On/Off
>Video Signal Monitor
Video Signal Monitor
Operation >Display On/Off
>Lens Info
Lens Info
Operation >Auto Iris >Mode
Spotlight
Backlight
Operation >Marker >Setting
Marker
Maintenance >Audio >Front
MIC Select
Front MIC
Maintenance >Network
Client Mode >Setting
Network Client
Mode
3 Select “Off,” then press the MENU knob.
menu.
The valid input range is 0000 to 9999.
Enter a number and press the MENU knob to
move the cursor to the next digit.
When all digits have been entered, move the
cursor to [Set].
5 With [Set] selected, press the MENU knob.
The entry is applied.
If the entered passcode number matches the
passcode number used to lock the menu, a
confirmation message appears and the display
of all menus is enabled.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the entered passcode number does not match the
passcode number used to lock the menu, the menu
is not unlocked.
ˎˎ It is recommended that you leave a record of the
passcode nearby, just in case it is forgotten. If you
do forget the passcode number, contact your Sony
service representative.
000
92
7. Menu Display and Settings
Editing the User Menu
You can edit the User menu, such as adding items,
deleting items, and rearranging items, to make the
User menu more useful using Edit User Menu.
You can select items in the Operation menu, Paint
menu, Maintenance menu, and some items in the
File menu, and add them to the User menu.
Up to 20 items can be registered in the User menu.
There are six items registered in the User menu
by factory default, one of which must always be
present, allowing you to add up to 19 new items.
[Note]
Editing is unavailable when the menu is locked.
Adding Items and Sub-Items
1 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User Menu
>Add Item, then press the knob.
The items that can be added are displayed.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to edit,
then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit Sub Item in
the edit function list, then press the knob.
The item is deleted.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item, then
press the knob.
A screen for selecting sub-items to add
appears.
Moving Items
The Edit Sub Item screen appears.
Displaying the Edit User Menu Screen
You edit the User menu on the Edit User Menu
screen.
1 Turn the MENU knob to select User >Edit User
Menu, then press the knob.
1 Display the Edit User Menu screen.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to
move, then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a sub-item, then
press the knob.
Place a check mark in the All checkbox to add
all sub-items.
Place a check mark in the individual
checkboxes to specify which sub-items to add.
All sub-items are checked when the screen is
first opened (function to display all sub-items).
Remove the check marks for the sub-items you
do not want to display in the User menu.
the knob.
The item/sub-item(s) are added.
Editing is completed.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select Move in the edit
function list, then press the knob.
the MENU knob to select [OK], then press
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [OK], then press 4 Turn
the knob.
The Edit User Menu screen appears.
[Note]
The same item or sub-item cannot be registered twice. Also,
the name of the item or sub-item cannot be changed.
Editing Sub-Items
You can specify the sub-items to display.
1 Display the Edit User Menu screen.
The item to move is highlighted, and a triangle
mark and line indicate the destination position.
Deleting Items
1 Display the Edit User Menu screen.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to edit,
then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select Delete in the
edit function list, then press the knob.
Triangle mark and line
indicating move destination
000
93
7. Menu Display and Settings: Editing the User Menu
4 Turn the MENU knob to move the triangle and
line to the desired destination, then press the
knob.
The item is moved.
Restoring the User Menu to Factory
Default State
1 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User Menu
>Customize Reset, then press the knob.
The Customize Reset screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Reset], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The User menu is restored to the factory
default state.
000
94
7. Menu Display and Settings
User Menu (Factory Default Configuration)
The User menu consists of the following items when it is in the factory default state.
ˎˎFormat Media (page 96)
ˎˎRec Function (page 97)
ˎˎInput/Output (page 96)
ˎˎClip (page 102)
ˎˎAssignable Switch1) (page 98)
ˎˎCamera Config2) (page 112)
1) Excluding sub-item 0
2) Contains only User Menu Only as sub-item
For details about editing the User menu, see “Editing the User Menu” (page 92).
000
95
7. Menu Display and Settings
Operation Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
Operation >Format
Sets the system frequency, file system, recording format, and recording aspect ratio.
Item
Setting
Description
Frequency
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
Selects the system frequency (execute by
selecting Execute).
Operation >Format
Sets the system frequency, file system, recording format, and recording aspect ratio.
Item
Setting
Description
Rec Format
HD422 50 1080i
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
MPEG IMX 50
DVCAM
When the file system is UDF and the system
frequency is 59.94 or 50.
HD422 50 1080P
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080P
When the file system is UDF and the system
frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98.
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
SP 1440×1080i
When the file system is FAT and the system
frequency is 59.94 or 50.
HQ 1920×1080P
When the file system is FAT and the system
frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98.
Aspect Ratio (SD)
16:9/4:3
Selects the SD mode aspect ratio.
Audio Length
24bit/16bit
Selects the audio bit rate for recording in IMX
format.
[Note]
Switching the system frequency also switches the Rec
Format setting to the value configured previously at that
frequency.
File System
exFAT/UDF/FAT
Switches the file system (execute by selecting
Execute).
Rec Format
Settings vary according to the
system frequency setting.
Selects the recording format (execute by selecting
Execute).
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
XAVC-I 1280×720P
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
HD422 50 1080i
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
MPEG IMX 50
DVCAM
When the file system is exFAT and the system
frequency is 59.94 or 50.
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080P
When the file system is exFAT and the system
frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98.
Operation >Base Setting
Sets the dynamic range for imaging.
Item
Setting
Description
Shooting Mode
SDR/HDR
SDR: Sets conventional standard dynamic range
mode.
HDR: Sets High Dynamic Range mode.
Operation >HDR Setting
Sets the 4K(QFHD) and HD recording and output system used during HDR operation. The color space is
ITU-R BT.2020 for HDR(HLG). The color space can be set to ITU-R BT.2020 or S-Gamut3/S-Gamut3.Cine for
HDR(S-Log3).
Item
Setting
Description
4K(QFHD) Rec/Out
HDR Setting
HDR(HLG)/HDR(S-Log3)
HDR(HLG): Sets HLG for 4K (QFHD) recording and
output.
HDR(S-Log3): Sets S-Log3 for 4K (QFHD) recording
and output.
000
96
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >HDR Setting
Sets the 4K(QFHD) and HD recording and output system used during HDR operation. The color space is
ITU-R BT.2020 for HDR(HLG). The color space can be set to ITU-R BT.2020 or S-Gamut3/S-Gamut3.Cine for
HDR(S-Log3).
Item
Setting
Description
HD Rec/Out
HDR(HLG)/HDR(S-Log3)/SDR
Enabled when 4K(QFHD) Rec/Out is set to
HDR(HLG) or HDR(S-Log3).
HDR(HLG): Sets HLG for HD recording and output.
HDR(S-Log3): Sets HDR(S-Log3) for HD recording
and output.
SDR: Sets SDR for HD recording and output.
Operation >Format Media
Formats the media.
Item
Setting
Description
Media(A)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SxS memory card in slot A (execute
by selecting Execute).
Media(B)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SxS memory card in slot B (execute
by selecting Execute).
SD Card(Utility)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SD card in the UTILITY SD card slot
(execute by selecting Execute).
SD Card(Proxy)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SD card in the PROXY SD card slot
(execute by selecting Execute).
[Notes]
ˎˎ When 4K(QFHD) Rec/Out is set to HDR(S-Log3),
HDR(HLG) cannot be selected.
ˎˎ When 4K(QFHD) Rec/Out is set to HDR(HLG),
HDR(S‑Log3) cannot be selected.
Operation >Input/Output
Sets input/output signals.
Item
Setting
Description
Output Format
Settings vary according to the
system frequency setting.
Selects the output format (execute by selecting
Execute).
Settings vary according to the recording format
setting (page 33).
Source Select
Camera/External
Selects the camera picture (Camera) or SDI IN
connector input signal for the video input source.
SDI Out1/3 Output
On/Off
Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT1/3
connectors on/off.
SDI Out2/4 Output
On/Off
Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT2/4
connectors on/off.
SDR Gain
0dB to –6dB to –15dB
Adjusts the SDR gain relative to the HDR value
when HD Rec/Out is set to SDR.
4K(QFHD) Color Space
BT.2020/
S-Gamut3(3200K)/
S-Gamut3(4300K)/
S-Gamut3(5500K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(3200K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(4300K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(5500K)/
BT.709
Sets the 4K output color space.
S-Gamut3: Wide color space that covers Sony’s
ITU-R BT.2020.
S-Gamut3.Cine: Color space adjustable for digital
cinema color space (DCI-P3).
The recommended settings based on the white
balance color temperature are as follows.
3700K or lower: S-Gamut3(3200K) or
S-Gamut3.Cine(3200K)
3700K to 4700K: S-Gamut3(4300K) or
S-Gamut3.Cine(4300K)
4700K or higher: S-Gamut3(5500K) or
S-Gamut3.Cine(5500K)
[Note]
When S-Gamut3 or S-Gamut3.Cine is used, select a
setting according to the color temperature of the
shooting environment.
HD Color Space
BT.2020/
S-Gamut3(3200K)/
S-Gamut3(4300K)/
S-Gamut3(5500K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(3200K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(4300K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(5500K)/
BT.709
HD output color space (display only).
S-Gamut3: Wide color space that covers Sony’s
ITU-R BT.2020.
S-Gamut3.Cine: Color space adjustable for digital
cinema color space (DCI-P3).
[Note]
When Output Format is 3840×2160P, this setting is
linked to the SDI Out1/3 Output setting.
HDMI Output
On/Off
Turns the output signal from the HDMI connector
on/off.
4K(QFHD) SDI Out
Super
Off/On
Turns character information (superimposed) from
the SDI OUT and HDMI connectors on/off in 4K
(QFHD) output mode.
SDI Out2/4/HDMI
Super
Off/On
Turns character information (superimposed) from
the SDI OUT2/4 and HDMI connectors on/off.
Video Out Super
Off/On
Turns character information (superimposed) from
the VIDEO OUT connector on/off.
000
97
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Input/Output
Sets input/output signals.
Operation >LCD
Sets the LCD monitor.
Item
Setting
Description
Down Converter
Edge Crop/Letter Box/Squeeze
Selects the signal conversion mode for output of
SD signals.
Edge Crop: Crops the edges of the 16:9 picture for
output as a 4:3 picture.
Letter Box: Masks the top and bottom of the 4:3
picture and displays a 16:9 picture in the
center of the screen.
Squeeze: Squeezes the 16:9 picture horizontally
for output as a 4:3 picture.
Wide ID
Wide Mode(Ext.)
Through/Auto
Auto/16:9
Selects whether to add a wide ID signal to the SD
output signal.
Through: Outputs without adding a wide ID
signal.
Auto: Adds and outputs a wide ID signal to the video
signal when the wide ID signal is set to Squeeze.
Item
Setting
Description
Super(VF Display)
On/Off
Super(Menu)
On/Off
When Input/Output >SDI Out2/4/HDMI Super or
Input/Output >Video Out Super is set to On, this
turns superimposition of character information on
the output from the SDI OUT connector or VIDEO
OUT connector on/off, respectively.
On/Off
Setting
Description
LCD Color
–99 to ±0 to +99
Adjusts the color depth of the LCD monitor.
LCD Marker&Zebra
On/Off
Turns the marker and zebra pattern display on the
LCD monitor on/off.
Operation >Rec Function
Sets the special recording mode.
Item
Setting
Description
Slow & Quick Motion
On/Off
Turns Slow & Quick Motion on/off. (When set to
On, the settings for other special recording modes
are set to Off.)
Frame Rate
Settings vary according to the
recording format setting.
When Slow & Quick Motion is On, selects the
frame rate for Slow & Quick Motion shooting.
1 to 60
When the file system is exFAT, and the recording
format is XAVC Intra or XAVC Long.
1 to 50
When the file system is UDF, and the recording
format is MPEG HD 422 50M (1280×720), 50P/25P.
1 to 30
When the file system is exFAT or UDF, and the
recording format is MPEG HD 422 50M
(1920×1080), 29.97P/23.98P.
1 to 25
When the file system is exFAT or UDF, and the
recording format is MPEG HD 422 50M
(1920×1080), 25P.
Clip Continuous Rec
On/Off
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off. (When
set to On, the settings for other special recording
modes are set to Off.)
Picture Cache Rec
On/Off
Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off. (When set
to On, the settings for other special recording
modes are set to Off.)
Cache Rec Time
Settings vary according to the
recording format setting.
Sets the time for accumulation of images in
picture cache memory (picture cache recording
time).
When the input signal is SD, sets the method that
determines wide screen information.
Auto: Records with 16:9 aspect ratio when the
wide screen information of the input signal is
Squeeze. Otherwise, records with 4:3 aspect
ratio.
16:9: Records with 16:9 aspect ratio.
Operation >Super Impose
Sets character information/markers to be superimposed.
Super(Marker)
Item
When Input/Output >SDI Out2/4/HDMI Super or
Input/Output >Video Out Super is set to On, this
turns superimposition of markers on the output
from the SDI OUT connector or VIDEO OUT
connector on/off, respectively.
For details, see “Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings”
(page 164) in the Appendix.
Interval Rec
On/Off
Turns Interval Rec mode on/off. (When set to On,
the settings for other special recording modes are
set to Off.)
000
98
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Rec Function
Sets the special recording mode.
Operation >Assignable Switch
Assigns functions to assignable switches.
Item
Setting
Description
Number of Frames
The available settings vary
depending on the Format
>Frequency setting.
When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the
number of frames to shoot in one Interval Rec
take.
2frames/6frames/12frames
When the recording format frame rate is 50P or
59.94P.
1frame/3frames/6frames/
9frames
Interval Time
Pre-Lighting
For details about assigning functions, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 121).
Item
Setting
Description
<0>
page 121
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 0 switch.
<1>
page 122
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 1 switch.
<2>
page 121
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch.
When the recording format frame rate is 23.98P,
25P, 29.97P, 50i, or 59.94i.
<3>
page 122
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 3 switch.
<4>
page 122
Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 4 switch.
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/
20/30/40/50 (sec)
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/
20/30/40/50/ (min)
1/2/3/4/6/12/24 (hour)
When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the
interval for Interval Rec shooting.
<5>
page 122
Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 5 switch.
Lens RET
page 123
Assigns a function to RET button on the lens.
Online
page 122
Assigns a function to the ONLINE button.
Zoom Speed
0 to 20 to 99
Off/2sec/5sec/10sec
Sets the number of seconds that the video light is
turned on prior to the start of Interval Rec
shooting. To not turn the video light on, select
Off.
When Zoom has been assigned to the
ASSIGNABLE 4 or 5 switch, this sets the zoom
speed.
Simul Rec
On/Off
Turns 2-slot simultaneous recording to slots A and
B on/off.
4K & HD (Sub) Rec
On/Off
Turns 1-slot simultaneous recording on/off.
HD (Sub) Playback
Mode
On/Off
Turns the playback function for subclips recorded
in 1-slot Simul Rec mode on/off.
Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
Sets proxy recording.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns proxy recording on/off.
Size
HD Auto(9Mbps)/
HD Auto(6Mbps)/
1280×720(9Mbps)/
1280×720(6Mbps)/
640×360(3Mbps)/
480×270(1Mbps)/
480×270(0.5Mbps)
Selects the size of the proxy recording format.
Frame Rate
23.98fps/25fps/29.97fps/50fps/
59.94fps
Selects the frame rate of the proxy recording
format.
Bit Rate
9Mbps/6Mbps/3Mbps/
1Mbps/0.5Mbps
Selects the bit rate of the proxy recording format.
Audio Channel
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
Selects the audio channel to record to proxy data.
Operation >VF Setting
Sets the viewfinder screen.
Item
Setting
Description
Color
–99 to ±0 to +99
Adjusts the color depth of the viewfinder image.
Color Mode
Color/B&W
Selects the viewfinder display mode (when using
CBK-VF02).
Color: Color
B&W: Black & white
Peaking Type
Normal/Color
Selects the type of peaking (when using CBKVF02).
Normal: Normal peaking
Color: Color peaking
Peaking Frequency
Normal/High
When Peaking Type is set to Normal, this selects
Normal or High peaking frequency (when using
CBK-VF02).
Peaking Color
B&W/Red/Yellow/Blue
Selects the peaking color when Peaking Type is
set to Color (when using CBK-VF02).
B&W: Black & white
Red: Red
Yellow: Yellow
Blue: Blue
VF Detail Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the detail level (set on the camcorder) of the
viewfinder (when using HDVF-20A).
000
99
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Marker
Sets the marker display in the viewfinder.
Operation >Gain Switch
Sets the gain value switch settings.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
Gain<L>
–9dB/–6dB/–3dB/0dB/
3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Selects the gain value for the L position of the
GAIN switch.
Gain<M>
–9dB/–6dB/–3dB/0dB/
3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Selects the gain value for the M position of the
GAIN switch.
[Note]
When Marker is assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 switch, this
setting is disabled.
Color
White/Yellow/Cyan/Green/
Magenta/Red/Blue
Selects the marker display color.
Center Marker
1/2/3/4/Off
When the center marker is displayed, selects the
type. Select Off if you do not want to display the
marker.
Gain<H>
–9dB/–6dB/–3dB/0dB/
3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Selects the gain value for the H position of the
GAIN switch.
Safety Zone
On/Off
Turns the safety zone indicator on/off.
Gain <Turbo>
Safety Area
80%/90%/92.5%/95%
Selects the safety zone range.
Selects the gain value when the Turbo Gain
function is assigned to an assignable switch.
Aspect Marker
Line/Mask/Off
When an aspect marker is to be displayed, selects
the display method. Select Off if you do not want
to display the marker.
Line: Show as white lines.
Mask: Displays a lower video signal level for areas
outside the marker area.
–9dB/–6dB/–3dB/0dB/
3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Shockless Gain
On/Off
Turns shockless gain (function that switches the
gain smoothly when the gain is switched) on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
Iris Override
On/Off
Turns iris override (setting opens or closes the iris
more than normal) on/off.
Mode
Backlight/Standard/Spotlight
Selects the control mode of the auto iris.
Backlight: Backlight mode (mode for reduced
darkening of a subject when the subject is
backlit)
Standard: Standard mode (cannot be selected
when using optional remote control
connection)
Spotlight: Spotlight mode (mode for reduced
blown out highlights when subject is lit by
spotlighting)
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the convergence target level (larger values
increase brightness.)
Speed
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the control speed (speed of response to
changes in the video). (Larger values specify
quicker reaction times.)
Clip High light
On/Off
Turns the function that ignores brightest areas to
provide a flatter reaction to high luminance on/
off.
Detect Window
1/2/3/4/5/6/Var
Selects the type of auto iris detection window.
Var: Variable
Aspect Select
15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/1.66:1/
1.85:1/2.35:1/2.4:1
Selects the aspect ratio of the marker.
Aspect Mask
0% to 12% to 15%
When the Aspect Marker setting is Mask, this sets
the video signal level of areas outside the marker
area as a percentage value relative to the video
signal level of areas inside the marker area.
Aspect Safety Zone
On/Off
Turns the aspect safety zone marker on/off.
Aspect Safety Area
80%/90%/92.5%/95%
Selects the size of the aspect safety zone marker
(as a percentage of total screen size).
100% Marker
On/Off
Turns the 100% safety zone marker indicator on/
off.
User Box
On/Off
Turns the box cursor display on/off.
User Box Width
40 to 500 to 999
Sets the box cursor width (distance from the
center to the left and right edges).
User Box Height
70 to 500 to 999
Sets the box cursor height (distance from the
center to the top and bottom edges).
User Box H Position
–479 to 0 to 479
Sets the horizontal position of the box cursor
center.
User Box V Position
–464 to 0 to 464
Sets the vertical position of the box cursor center.
Operation >Auto Iris
Sets the auto iris.
100
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Auto Iris
Sets the auto iris.
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Detect Window
Indication
On/Off
Turns the function that displays the auto iris
detection window frame using a marker on/off.
Frame Rate/Interval
On/Off
Turns the special recording mode indicator on/
off.
Iris APL Ratio
–99 to ±0 to +99
If the Mode setting for Auto Iris is set to Standard,
sets the mix ratio of peak to mean auto iris
detection value.
Battery Remain
Auto/Voltage/Off
Iris Var Width
40 to 500 to 999
Sets the width of the window when Iris Window is
set to Var.
Iris Var Height
70 to 500 to 999
Sets the height of the window when Iris Window
is set to Var.
Sets the mode of the remaining battery capacity
and input voltage indicators.
Auto: Displays the remaining capacity, according
to the battery type.
Voltage: Displays the input voltage, regardless of
the battery type.
Off: No display.
Iris Var H Position
–479 to 0 to 479
Sets the horizontal position of the window when
Iris Window is set to Var.
Timecode
On/Off
Turns the display of time data (timecode, user bits,
counter, duration) on/off.
Iris Var V Position
–464 to 0 to 464
Sets the vertical position of the window when Iris
Window is set to Var.
Audio Level Meter
On/Off
Turns the display of the audio level meter on/off.
Media Status
On/Off
Turns the media status indicator on/off.
SD Card(Utility)
On/Off
Turns the SD card (Utility) indicator on/off.
Focus Position
Meter/Feet/Off
Turns the lens focus position indicator on/off and
selects the display units.
Iris Position
On/Off
Turns the lens iris position indicator on/off.
Operation >Zebra
Sets the zebra display for video displayed in the viewfinder.
[Note]
The gamma display assist effect is not applied.
Item
Setting
Description
Zoom Position
On/Off
Turns the lens zoom position indicator on/off.
Zebra Select
1/2/Both
Selects the zebra pattern type (Zebra 1, Zebra 2,
Both).
Extender
On/Off
Turns the lens extender indicator on/off.
Zebra1 Level
0% to 70% to 107%
Sets the Zebra 1 display level.
ALAC
On/Off
Turns the lens aberration correction indicator on/
off.
Zebra1 Aperture Level
1% to 10% to 20%
Sets the Zebra 1 aperture level.
AE Mode
On/Off
Zebra2 Level
1% to 100% to 109%
Sets the Zebra 2 display level.
Turns AE mode and the AE level setting indicator
on/off.
Focus Mode
On/Off
Turns the focus mode indicator on/off.
White Balance Mode
On/Off
Turns the white balance mode indicator on/off.
On/Off
Turns the CC5600K indicator on/off.
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Item
Setting
Description
CC5600K
Video Level Warning
On/Off
Turns the warnings that appear when the video
level is too bright or too dark on/off.
Rec Format
On/Off
Turns the recording format indicator on/off.
Gamma
On/Off
Turns the selected gamma type indicator on/off.
Shutter Setting
On/Off
Turns the shutter mode and shutter speed
indicators on/off.
Timecode Lock
On/Off
Turns the timecode indicator on/off.
ND Filter Position
On/Off
Turns the ND filter setting indicator on/off.
Network Condition
On/Off
Turns the network connection status indicator on/
off.
Gain Setting
On/Off
Turns the gain setting indicator on/off.
Proxy Status
On/Off
Turns the proxy status indicator on/off.
Rec/Play Status
On/Off
Turns the recording and playback indicators on/
off.
NW Client Mode Status On/Off
Turns the color temperature indicator on/off.
Streaming Status
On/Off
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
GPS
On/Off
Turns the GPS reception status indicator on/off.
Color Temp.
On/Off
Turns the network client mode indicator on/off.
101
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Operation >White Setting
Makes settings related to white balance adjustment.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Video Signal Monitor
Off/Waveform/Vector/Histogram Turns the output video signal status indicator on/
off, and selects the type of video signal to display
(page 18).
White Switch<B>
Memory/ATW
Sets the operating mode selected by the B
position of the WHITE BAL switch.
Memory: Auto white balance
ATW: Auto tracing white balance
Not displayed in the following circumstances.
When Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1/3 Select and
SDI Out2/4 Select in the setup menu are both set to Off.
When Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the
setup menu is set to 720×480P or 720×576P.
Shockless White
Off/1/2/3
Selects the transition time when the WHITE BAL
switch setting is changed (1 is fastest).
ATW Speed
1/2/3/4/5
Selects the ATW (auto tracing white) transition
speed (1 is fastest).
ATW Mode
Natural/Pure
Sets the ATW (Auto tracing white balance) mode.
Natural: Automatically adjusts ATW to obtain a
natural ambiance according to the lighting of
the scene.
Pure: Automatically adjusts the ATW to obtain a
result closer to primary colors without
residual bluish or reddish colors.
AWB Fixed Area
On/Off
Runs AWB (auto white balance) for the center of
the screen.
Filter White Memory
On/Off
Sets the white balance memory area for each
FILTER knob position number when White
Balance is set to Preset or ATW.
ˎˎ When Electrical CC is assigned to an assignable
switch, this sets independent white balance
memory areas for Electrical CC A, B, C, and D
settings.
ˎˎ When Electrical CC is not assigned to an
assignable switch, this sets white balance
memory areas for each FILTER knob position
number.
[Note]
Clip Name
On/Off
Turns the clip name display on/off.
Focus Assist Indicator
On/Off
Turns the focus assist indicator on/off.
Focus Area Marker
On/Off
Turns the focus area marker indicator on/off.
Lens Info
Meter/Feet/Off
Selects whether to display depth of field and the
units to display.
WRR RF Level
On/Off
Turns the wireless tuner reception status indicator
on/off.
Clip Number
On/Off
Turns the clip information display on/off.
Operation >"!"LED
Sets the “!” indicator in the viewfinder. (Enabled when using HDVF-20A).
Item
Setting
Description
Gain <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
when the gain is set to other than 0 dB.
Shutter <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
when the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.
White Preset <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.
ATW Run <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
when ATW is used.
Extender <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
when the lens extender is used.
Filter <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
when the ND filter is set to other than 1.
Iris Override <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
when the auto iris override is not set to Standard.
Operation >Offset White
Makes settings related to white balance offset values.
Item
Setting
Description
Offset White<A>
On/Off
Selects whether to add (On) or not to add (Off) an
offset value to the white balance in memory A.
Warm Cool <A>
Approximate color temperature
display
(Approx. 1600K to 3200K to
16000K)
When Offset White<A> is set to On, this specifies
the offset (as a color temperature) to add to the
white balance in memory A. (Note that the error
increases for higher offset color temperatures.
Adjust while viewing the actual image.)
102
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Offset White
Makes settings related to white balance offset values.
Item
Setting
Operation >Clip
Makes settings relating to clip names and management.
Description
Warm Cool
Balance<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Offset White <B>
On/Off
When this is set to On, the offset adjusted here is
added to the white balance of channel B.
Warm Cool <B>
Approximate color temperature
display
(Approx. 1600K to 3200K to
16000K)
When Offset White<B> is set to On, this specifies
the offset (as a color temperature) to add to the
white balance in memory A. (Note that the error
increases for higher offset color temperatures.
Adjust while viewing the actual image.)
–99 to ±0 to +99
Specifies a more precise color temperature, for
use when a satisfactory image cannot be
obtained with the Warm Cool <B> setting.
Warm Cool
Balance<B>
Specifies a more precise color temperature, for
use when a satisfactory image cannot be
obtained with the Warm Cool <A> setting.
[Note]
Do not assign clip names that begin with the “.” (period) symbol. Clips with names in which the first character is “.”
cannot be viewed in the application software on a computer.
Item
Setting
Description
Clip Naming
Title/Plan
Selects the clip naming format.
Title: Name specified by Title Prefix.
Plan: Name specified in planning metadata (if no
name is specified in planning metadata, the
name specified by Title Prefix is used.)
Title Prefix
Text input
Sets the title part (4 to 46 alphanumeric
characters) of clip titles using a character string
entry screen (page 90).
Number Set
Settings vary according to the
Clip Naming setting.
Sets the numeric portion of the clip name.
When Clip Naming is set to Title:
0001 to 9999
When Clip Naming is set to Plan and a planning
metadata file is loaded:
00001 to 99999
Operation >Shutter
Sets the shutter operating mode.
Item
Setting
Description
Mode
Speed/Angle
Selects the operating mode of the electronic
shutter.
Speed: Sets the shutter speed as a time (units:
seconds).
Angle: Sets the shutter speed as an angle (units:
degrees).
Operation >Update Media
Updates the media’s management file.
Operation >Slow Shutter
Sets the slow shutter.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the slow shutter function on/off.
Number of Frames
2/3/4/5/6/7/8/16
Sets the number of accumulated frames for the
slow shutter function.
Operation >Time Zone
Sets the time zone.
Item
Setting
Description
Time Zone
UTC +14:00 to UTC Greenwich
to UTC –12:00
Selects the difference in time from UTC
(Greenwich Mean Time) in units of 30 minutes.
[Note]
This function is not available when the file system is set to FAT.
Item
Setting
Description
Media(A)
Execute/Cancel
Updates the management information of the SxS
memory card in slot A (execute by selecting
Execute).
Media(B)
Execute/Cancel
Updates the management information of the SxS
memory card in slot B (execute by selecting
Execute).
Operation >GPS
Turns location information (GPS) on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
GPS
On/Off
Turns the GPS function on/off.
103
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Planning Metadata
Makes settings relating to planning metadata operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Load from Media(A)
Execute/Cancel
Loads planning metadata from the SxS memory
card in slot A.
Execute to display a list of planning metadata files
stored on the SxS memory card in slot A. Select a
file to display the properties screen.
Operation >USB
Makes settings related to copying clips from the recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of the
camcorder to USB media.
Item
Setting
Description
Format USB
Execute/Cancel
Formats the USB media (execute by selecting
Execute).
Copy to USB
Media(A) to USB/
Media(B) to USB/
Media(A)(B) to USB
Selects the target slot when copying all clips from
an SxS card slot.
Media(A) to USB: Copy all clips from the recording
media inserted in slot A.
Media(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the recording
media inserted in slot B.
Media(A)(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the
recording media inserted in slot A and slot B.
Media Remain
(Free space: numeric display and
bar display)
Displays the remaining free space on the USB
media.
[Note]
This item is not displayed when the file system is set to
FAT.
Load from Media(B)
Execute/Cancel
Loads planning metadata from the SxS memory
card in slot B.
Execute to display a list of planning metadata files
stored on the SxS memory card in slot B. Select a
file to display the properties screen.
[Note]
This item is not displayed when the file system is set to
FAT.
Properties
Execute/Cancel
Displays the planning metadata content loaded in
the camcorder (execute by selecting Execute).
Clear Memory
Execute/Cancel
Clears the planning metadata loaded in the
camcorder (execute by selecting Execute).
Clip Name Disp
Title1(ASCII)/Title2(UTF-8)
Selects the display format if the clip name is
specified in planning metadata (page 56).
Sort by
Date/Time (0-9)/
Date/Time (9-0)
Date/Time (0-9): Sort the file list in ascending
order in the Date/Time column (oldest
creation date at the top).
Date/Time (9-0): Sort the file list in descending
order in the Date/Time column (newest
creation date at the top).
Operation >USB
Makes settings related to copying clips from the recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of the
camcorder to USB media.
Item
Setting
Description
Select Folder
Selects a folder on the USB media.
Creates a new folder on the USB media.
View Clip List
Displays a list of clips on the USB media.
Rename Folder
Renames a folder on the USB media.
Error Check
On/Off
Selects whether to perform error checking when
copying clips from the recording media inserted
in an SxS card slot of the camcorder to USB media.
Operation >Flash Band Reduce
Corrects the flashband phenomena.
[Note]
This item is disabled (grayed out) during recording and when Slow&Quick is set to On.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the flashband reduction function on/off.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Momentary noise may occur due to discontinuous
video and audio when switching Flash Band Reduce
on/off.
ˎˎ Even when Flash Band Reduce is set to On, the
function does not operate if the SHUTTER switch is
set to ON.
ˎˎ The setting returns to the default value when power
is switched off.
104
000
7. Menu Display and Settings
Paint Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
Paint >Switch Status
Turns various correction functions and the test signal on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
Color Temp <A>
1500K to 3200K to 50000K
Displays the white balance color temperature
saved in memory A.
Color Temp Balance
<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance gain value saved in
memory A (linked to R gain and B gain).
R Gain <A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance R gain value saved in
memory A.
B Gain <A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance B gain value saved in
memory A.
If set to Off, it is reset to On when power is next turned
on.
Color Temp <B>
1500K to 3200K to 50000K
Displays the white balance color temperature
saved in memory B.
Color Temp Balance
<B>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance gain values saved in
memory B (linked R gain and B gain).
R Gain <B>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance R gain value saved in
memory B.
B Gain <B>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance B gain value saved in
memory B.
Item
Setting
Description
Gamma
On/Off
Turns the gamma function on/off.
Black Gamma
On/Off
Turns the black gamma function on/off.
Matrix
On/Off
Turns the matrix function on/off.
Knee
On/Off
Turns the knee function on/off.
White Clip
On/Off
Turns the white clip function on/off.
[Note]
Detail(QFHD)
On/Off
Turns the QFHD detail function on/off.
Detail(HD)
On/Off
Turns the HD detail function on/off.
Detail(SD)
On/Off
Turns the SD detail function on/off.
Aperture
On/Off
Turns the aperture function on/off.
Flare
On/Off
Turns the flare correction function on/off.
Test Saw
On/Off
Turns the test signal on/off.
Paint >HDR Paint Setting
Sets HDR settings when Shooting Mode is set to HDR.
Item
Setting
Description
HLG Look
Natural/Mild/Live
Sets the HLG type in HDR mode.
Natural: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R
BT.2100(HLG)
Mild: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R
BT.2100(HLG) that delivers milder overall
picture quality than Live Look.
Live: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R
BT.2100(HLG) that delivers improved HDR
performance.
HDR Black Offset
–95 to ±0 to +103
Paint >White
Sets the color temperature, and adjusts white balance manually.
Paint >Black
Sets the black level (image level without lighting).
You can achieve a desired look by adjusting the black level for deeper or shallower blacks.
Item
Setting
Description
Master Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master black level.
R Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R black level.
B Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B black level.
Paint >Flare
Makes settings related to flare correction.
Flare is a phenomenon where the video level increases across the entire image due to the effects of bright
regions in the image, increasing the brightness of darker regions and reducing contrast. It is caused by
reflected light inside the lens.
Sets the HDR black offset relative to the SDR
setting (Master Black) in HDR mode.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the flare correction function on/off.
Master Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master flare correction level.
HDR Knee
On/Off
Turns the HDR signal knee correction function on/
off when in HDR mode.
HDR Knee Point
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee point for HDR signals when HDR
Knee is set to On.
R Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R flare correction level.
G Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the G flare correction level.
HDR Knee Slope
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee slope for HDR signals when HDR
Knee is set to On.
B Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B flare correction level.
HDR Black
Compression
On/Off
Turns the function to compress the Black level of
the HDR video to match the SDR video on/off.
105
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu
Paint >Gamma(HDR)
Displays HDR gamma settings.
Item
Setting
Description
Gamma Select
S-Log3
HLG(Natural)
HLG(Mild)
---
HDR gamma settings (display only)
Paint >Gamma
Makes settings related to gamma correction.
Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the impression of an
image.
Item
Setting
Description
Gamma Select
Settings vary according to the
Gamma Category setting.
Selects the gamma table used for gamma
correction.
Paint >Gamma
Makes settings related to gamma correction.
Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the impression of an
image.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the gamma correction function on/off.
Step Gamma
0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90
(0.05 steps)
Sets a gamma correction value in 0.05 steps.
Master Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master gamma level.
R Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R gamma level.
G Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the G gamma level.
B Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B gamma level.
Gamma Category
STD/HG/User/---
Selects the gamma category.
STD: Standard gamma curve for video signals
HG: Gamma curve that imitates gradation and
color reproduction of shooting with film
User: User-defined gamma curve created using
CvpFileEditorTM V4.2
---: No SDR output
When Gamma Category is STD
STD1 DVW: DVW camcorder equivalent
STD2 x4.5: ×4.5 gain
STD3 x3.5: ×3.5 gain
STD4 240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
STD5 R709: ITU-R709 equivalent
STD6 x5.0: ×5.0 gain
When Gamma Category is HG
HG1 3250G36: Compresses 325% video input to 100% video output.
HG2 4600G30: Compresses 460% video input to 100% video output.
HG3 3259G40: Compresses 325% video input to 109% video output.
HG4 4609G33: Compresses 460% video input to 109% video output.
When Gamma Category is User
User 1: Gamma table registered in User1
User 2: Gamma table registered in User2
User 3: Gamma table registered in User3
User 4: Gamma table registered in User4
User 5: Gamma table registered in User5
When there is no SDR output
--Paint >Black Gamma
Makes settings related to black gamma correction.
Black gamma correction allows you to reproduce gradations and colors in black or near-black (dark) parts
of the picture.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the black gamma correction function on/
off.
[Note]
To enable the black gamma function, set Saturation
Mode to Low Key.
106
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu
Paint >Black Gamma
Makes settings related to black gamma correction.
Black gamma correction allows you to reproduce gradations and colors in black or near-black (dark) parts
of the picture.
Paint >Detail(QFHD)/Detail(HD)/Detail(SD)
Makes settings related to detail adjustments in 4K/HD mode and SD mode.
Detail adjustment processing improves the clarity of images by adding a detail signal to the outline of the
subject.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Range
Low/L.Mid/H.Mid
Selects the effective range of the black gamma
correction.
Low: 0 to 3.6%
L.Mid: 0 to 7.2%
H.Mid: 0 to 14.4%
Master Black Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master black gamma level.
Paint >Knee
Makes settings related to knee correction.
Knee correction is processing that prevents blown out highlights by compressing the bright parts of the
image in response to the upper limit for the dynamic range of the recorded/output image. The signal level
where knee processing begins is called the “knee point,” and the slope of knee compression is called the
“knee slope.”
Setting
On/Off
Turns the detail adjustment function on/off.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the detail level.
H/V Ratio
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the mix ratio between the H detail level and
the V detail level.
Crispening
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the crispening level.
Level Depend
On/Off
Turns the level dependence adjustment function
on/off.
Level Depend Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the level dependence level.
Frequency
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the center frequency of the H detail signal
(larger values give finer detail).
Knee Aperture
On/Off
Turns the knee aperture correction function on/
off.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the knee correction function on/off.
Knee Aperture Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee aperture level.
Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the detail limiter for both the white-side and
black-side directions.
White Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white-side detail limiter.
Black Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the black-side detail limiter.
V Black Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the black-side V detail limiter.
V Detail Creation
NAM/Y/G/G+R
Selects the source signal used to generate the V
detail signal.
NAM: V detail signal created from the R signal, V
detail signal created from the G signal, or V
detail signal created from the B signal,
whichever signal has the highest level
Y: Y signal
G: G signal
G+R: Mixed signal comprising the G signal and R
signal in a 1:1 ratio
Cross Color Suppress
(SD mode)
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the cross color suppression level of the detail.
Point
75% to 95% to 109%
Sets the knee point when the DCC function is off.
Slope
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee slope when the DCC function is off.
Knee Saturation
On/Off
Turns the knee saturation function on/off.
[Note]
To enable the knee saturation function, set Saturation
Mode to Knee.
Knee Saturation Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee saturation level.
Paint >White Clip
Makes settings related to white clip adjustment.
White clip processing limits the maximum level of video output signals. The maximum video output signal
value is called the “white clip level.”
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the white clip adjustment function on/off.
Level
90.0% to 108.0% to 109.0%
Sets the white clip level.
The default setting is 108.0% when the system
frequency is 59.94, 29.97, 24, or 23.98. The setting
is 105.0% when the system frequency is 50.25.
[Note]
This setting is disabled if the detail adjustment function
is Off, and when Operation Format Frequency in the
setup menu is set to 50 or 25.
107
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu
Paint >Aperture
Makes settings related to aperture correction.
Aperture correction processing improves resolution by adding high-frequency aperture signals to the
video signal, which corrects deterioration due to high-frequency characteristics.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the aperture correction function on/off.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the aperture level.
Paint >Skin Detail
Makes settings related to skin detail correction.
Skin detail correction processing increases or decreases the detail level of a specified color range, for the
purpose of obtaining attractive reproduction of skin tones.
Item
Setting
Description
Paint >Matrix
Makes settings related to matrix correction.
Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction.
You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose from a parameter set predefined in “Preset Matrix.”
You can also define arbitrary parameters yourself in a “User Matrix.” The “Adaptive Matrix” function adjusts
the matrix to control color reproduction.
Item
Setting
Description
Preset Select
1: SMPTE240M
2: ITU-709
3: SMPTE Wide
4: NTSC
5: EBU
6: PAL
Selects a preset matrix.
1: SMPTE240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
2: ITU-709: ITU-709 equivalent
3: SMPTE Wide: SMPTE WIDE equivalent
4: NTSC: NTSC equivalent
5: EBU: EBU equivalent
6: PAL: PAL equivalent
User Matrix
On/Off
Turns the user matrix correction function on/off.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the saturation of the color of the entire
image.
Setting
On/Off
Turns the skin detail correction function on/off.
Area Detection
Execute/Cancel
Displays a color detection screen for detecting
colors for skin detail correction (execute by
selecting Execute).
Area Indication
On/Off
Turns the display of a zebra pattern in areas
targeted for skin detail correction on/off.
Phase
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the color tone (phase) of the entire image.
User Matrix R-G
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined R-G user matrix.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the skin detail level.
User Matrix R-B
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined R-B user matrix.
Saturation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the saturation of the color targeted for skin
detail correction.
User Matrix G-R
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined G-R user matrix.
Hue
0 to 359
Sets the hue of the color targeted for skin detail
correction.
User Matrix G-B
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined G-B user matrix.
User Matrix B-R
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined B-R user matrix.
Width
0 to 40 to 90
Sets the range for the hue of the color targeted
for skin detail correction.
User Matrix B-G
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined B-G user matrix.
Paint >Matrix
Makes settings related to matrix correction.
Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction.
You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose from a parameter set predefined in “Preset Matrix.”
You can also define arbitrary parameters yourself in a “User Matrix.” The “Adaptive Matrix” function adjusts
the matrix to control color reproduction.
Paint >Multi Matrix
Makes settings related to multi matrix correction.
Multi-matrix correction sets the saturation using a 16-axis hue space.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the multi matrix correction function on/off.
Area Indication
On/Off
Turns the display of a zebra pattern in the color
area targeted for multi matrix correction on/off.
Color Detection
Execute/Cancel
Displays a color detection screen for detecting
colors for multi matrix correction (execute by
selecting Execute).
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the matrix correction function on/off.
Adaptive Matrix
On/Off
Turns the adaptive matrix function on/off.
Tracing Matrix
Type A/Type B
Selects the correction method for color
reproduction due to changes in white balance.
Type B provides enhanced correction compared
to Type A.
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Sets all hue and saturation on each axis to default
values (execute by selecting Execute).
Axis
B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/R/R+/YL–/
YL/YL+/G–/G/G+/CY/CY+/B–
Sets the color targeted for multi matrix correction
(16-axis mode)
Turns the preset matrix function on/off.
Hue
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the hue of the color targeted for multi matrix
correction for each 16-axis mode.
Preset Matrix
On/Off
108
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu
Paint >Multi Matrix
Makes settings related to multi matrix correction.
Multi-matrix correction sets the saturation using a 16-axis hue space.
Paint >Noise Suppression
Makes settings related to noise suppression (noise compression).
This allows you to effectively suppress noise components while preserving fine edge components of the
subject.
Item
Setting
Description
Saturation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the saturation of the color targeted for multi
matrix correction for each 16-axis mode.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the noise suppression function on/off.
Paint >V Modulation
Makes settings related to V modulation shading correction.
V modulation shading corrects the vertical slope of the sensitivity arising from the relationship between
the lens and prism.
Level
Low/Mid/High/Super
Selects the noise suppression level.
Gain Link
On/Off
Sets whether to link the noise suppression level to
the gain.
–9dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets –9 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the V modulation shading correction
function on/off.
–6dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets –6 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
Master V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master V modulation level.
–3dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
R V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the V modulation level of the R signal.
Sets –3 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
G V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the V modulation level of the G signal.
0dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
B V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the V modulation level of the B signal.
Sets 0 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
3dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
Paint >Low Key Saturation
Makes settings related to low key saturation correction.
Corrects the saturation of colors in dark parts of the image.
Sets 3 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
6dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 6 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
Item
Setting
Description
9dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
Setting
On/Off
Turns the low key saturation correction function
on/off.
Sets 9 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
12dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 12 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
To enable the low key saturation function, set Saturation
Mode to Low Key.
18dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 18 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
[Note]
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the saturation of colors in low luminance
areas.
24dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 24 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
Range
Low/L.Mid/H.Mid
Selects the luminance level for which low key
saturation is enabled.
30dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 30 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
36dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 36 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
42dB
Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 42 dB noise suppression level when Gain Link
is set to On.
Paint >Saturation Mode
Makes settings related to saturation correction.
Item
Setting
Description
Saturation Mode
Knee/Low Key
Selects whether the saturation function operates
at high levels (Knee) or low levels (Low Key).
Knee Saturation
On/Off
Turns the knee saturation function on/off.
Black Gamma
On/Off
Turns the black gamma correction function on/
off.
Low Key Saturation
On/Off
Turns the low key saturation function on/off.
109
000
7. Menu Display and Settings
Maintenance Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
Maintenance >White Shading
Makes settings related to white shading correction.
White shading is required for each different lens to correct luminance and color irregularities in bright
areas arising from lens characteristics.
Item
Setting
Description
Channel Select
Red/Green/Blue
Selects the target for white shading correction.
White H Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW white shading correction value for
the horizontal direction.
White H Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola white shading correction value
for the horizontal direction.
White V Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW white shading correction value for
the vertical direction.
White V Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola white shading correction value
for the vertical direction.
White Saw/Para
On/Off
Turns the white shading SAW/parabola correction
function on/off.
Maintenance >Black Shading
Makes settings related to black shading correction.
Item
Setting
Description
Channel Select
Red/Green/Blue
Selects the target for black shading correction.
Black H Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW black shading correction value for
the horizontal direction.
Black H Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola black shading correction value
for the horizontal direction.
Black V Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW black shading correction value for
the vertical direction.
Black V Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola black shading correction value
for the vertical direction.
Black Saw/Para
On/Off
Turns the black shading SAW/parabola correction
function on/off.
Master Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master black level.
Master Gain (TMP)
–9dB/–6dB/–3dB/0dB/
3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Sets a temporary master gain value.
Maintenance >Battery
Makes settings related to batteries.
Item
Setting
Description
Near End:Info Battery
5%/10%/15%...95%/100%
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using a BP-FLX75/
GL65A/GL95A/GL95B battery pack.
End:Info Battery
0%/1%/2%/3%/4%/5%
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using a BP-FLX75/GL65A/
GL95A/GL95B battery pack.
Near End:Sony Battery
11.5V to 17V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using a BP-L60S/L80S
battery pack.
End:Sony Battery
11.0V to 12.5V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using a BP-L60S/L80S battery
pack.
Near End:Other Battery 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using a non-Sony
battery pack.
End:Other Battery
11.0V to 14.0V
(0.1V steps)
Detected Battery
Sony Info Battery/
Displays the result of automatic battery pack type
Sony Battery/Other Battery/DC IN detection.
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using a non-Sony battery
pack.
Maintenance >DC Voltage Alarm
Sets alarms relating to external DC supply voltage.
Item
Setting
Description
DC Low Voltage1
11.5V to 17V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using an external power
source connected to the DC IN connector.
DC Low Voltage2
11.0V to 14.0V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using an external power
source connected to the DC IN connector.
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
Setting
Description
Front MIC Select
Mono/Stereo
Selects whether the front microphone is
monaural (Mono) or stereo (Stereo).
Rear XLR Auto
On/Off
Turns the automatic detection function on/off for
detecting cable connections on the AUDIO IN
CH-1/CH-2 connectors on the rear panel.
110
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Front MIC CH1 Ref
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB
Selects the reference level of the front
microphone for channel 1.
Output Limiter
On/Off
Turns the audio output limiter on/off.
Front MIC CH2 Ref
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB
Selects the reference level of the front
microphone for channel 2.
CH1 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 1 wind noise reduction filter
on/off.
Rear MIC CH1 Ref
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB
Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO
IN CH1 switch is set to MIC.
CH2 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 2 wind noise reduction filter
on/off.
Rear MIC CH2 Ref
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB
Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO
IN CH2 switch is set to MIC.
CH3 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 3 wind noise reduction filter
on/off.
Line Input Ref
+4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL
Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO
IN CH1 and AUDIO IN CH2 switches are set to
LINE.
CH4 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 4 wind noise reduction filter
on/off.
1kHz Tone on Color
Bars
On/Off/Auto
Sets whether to output (On) or not output (Off) a
1 kHz test signal in color bar mode.
Auto: Outputs a test signal only when the AUDIO
SELECT CH1 switch is set to AUTO.
MIC CH1 Level
Side1/Front/Front+Side1
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
when recording input audio from the front
microphone on channel 1.
Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked control)
MIC CH2 Level
Side2/Front/Front+Side2
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
when recording input audio from the front
microphone on channel 2.
Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked control)
Rear1/WRR Level
Side1/Front/Front+Side1
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level of a
wireless microphone or a device connected to the
AUDIO IN CH-1 connector on the rear panel.
Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked control)
Min Alarm Volume
Off/Set
Selects the volume when the ALARM knob is
turned all the way down.
Off: Inaudible
Set: Audible
Speaker Attenuate
Off/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB
Selects the volume from the monitor speakers
(does not affect earphone volume).
Headphone Out
Mono/Stereo
Selects whether the earphones are monaural
(Mono) or stereo (Stereo).
Reference Level
–20dB/–18dB/–16dB/
–12dB/EBUL
Sets the reference input level. It also sets the
output level of the 1 kHz test signal.
Reference Out
+4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL
Sets the output level relative to the reference
input level.
CH1&2 AGC Mode
Mono/Stereo
Automatically adjusts the input level of analog
audio signals recorded on channels 1 and 2, and
selects whether to make the adjustments
separately for each channel (Mono) or in stereo
mode (Stereo).
CH3&4 AGC Mode
Mono/Stereo
Automatically adjusts the input level of analog
audio signals recorded on channels 3 and 4, and
selects whether to make the adjustments
separately for each channel (Mono) or in stereo
mode (Stereo).
AGC Spec
–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/
–15dB/–17dB
Selects the AGC characteristic (saturation level).
Limiter Mode
Off/–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/
–15dB/–17dB
Selects the limiter characteristic (saturation level)
for large input signals when adjusting the audio
input level manually. Select Off if not using the
limiter.
111
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Maintenance >WRR Setting
Makes settings related to the wireless tuner.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Rear2/WRR Level
Side2/Front/Front+Side2
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level of a
wireless microphone or a device connected to the
AUDIO IN CH-2 connector on the rear panel.
Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked control)
TX Input Level
---/Mic/Line
Displays whether the input level of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select is set to microphone
(Mic) or line (Line).
TX ATT Level
---
Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals
are being received on the channel selected by
WRR CH Select. (The setting range varies
depending on the transmitter.)
TX LCF Frequency
---
Sets the low cut filter frequency of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select. (The setting range
varies depending on the transmitter.)
TX System Delay
Auto/0.0ms to 8.0ms
Sets the amount of audio delay.
Auto: Automatically corrects for the amount of
delay so that the delay in the audio from the
wireless tuner is zero.
0.0ms to 8.0ms: Sets the amount of estimated
wireless system delay, for cases in which
several wireless systems are being used via a
device such as an audio mixer.
TX RF Power
High (Power value) mW/Mid
(Power value) mW/Low (Power
value) mW
Sets the RF power level of the transmitter
communicating on the channel selected by WRR
CH Select. (The setting range varies depending on
the transmitter.)
TX Power Save
Active/Sleep
Sets the power saving mode of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select.
Active: Set the transmitter to startup mode.
Sleep: Set the transmitter to power saving mode.
TX-Cam Power Sync
Off/On
Sets whether the transmitter power-save state is
also switched in sync with the POWER switch of
the camcorder.
Audio CH3 Level
Audio CH4 Level
Side3/Front/Front+Side3
Side4/Front/Front+Side4
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
recorded on channel 3.
Side3: LEVEL knob on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side3: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob
(linked control)
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
recorded on channel 4.
Side4: LEVEL knob on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side4: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob
(linked control)
Maintenance >WRR Setting
Makes settings related to the wireless tuner.
Item
Setting
Description
WRR Valid CH Sel
All/CH1
Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the
wireless tuner (All) or channel 1 only (CH1).
WRR CH Select
TX1/TX2
Selects the reception channel for display in the
menu.
TX1: Displays channel 1.
TX2: Displays channel 2.
WRR Delay Comp
On/Off
Selects whether to enable (On) or disable (Off) the
delay compensation function for wireless input
audio. (When On is selected, all E-E output audio
is delayed by about 8 ms.)
TX
---
Displays the name of the transmitter whose
signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select.
TX Audio Peak
---/Peak
Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select are over peak.
112
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Time Code
Makes settings related to timecode.
Maintenance >Camera Config
Makes settings related to various camcorder operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
TC Out
Auto/Generator
Selects the timecode output.
Auto: Outputs the timecode generator value
during recording, and the timecode reader
value during playback.
Generator: Outputs the timecode generator value
during recording and playback.
HD SDI Remote I/F
Off/Characters/
Green Tally/Red Tally
DF/NDF
DF/NDF
Selects drop-frame mode (DF) or non-drop-frame
mode (NDF).
LTC UBIT
Fix/Time
Sets the data recorded in LTC user bits.
Fix: Records user-specified data.
Time: Records the current time.
Counter Display
Counter/Duration
Select the method used to reset the counter value
displayed on the viewfinder screen.
Counter: Continue to increment until the RESET
button is pressed.
Duration: Reset each time that recording is
started.
Sets whether to enable the recording control
function for an external device connected to the
SDI OUT 1/2 connector (HD SDI output) of the
camcorder. If enabled, it selects the indicator used
to display the recording state of the external
device.
Off: Recording control function is disabled.
Chara: Displayed using the external device control
indicator on the status display in the
viewfinder.
G-Tally: Displayed using the TALLY indicator
(green tally) in the viewfinder.
R-Tally: Displayed using the REC indicator
(recording red tally) in the viewfinder.
Color Bars Select
ARIB/100%/75%/SMPTE
Selects the color bar type.
User Menu Only
On/Off
Selects whether to display the User menu only
(On) or display the menu list (Off) when the
camcorder is displaying the menu.
User Menu with Lock
On/Off
Selects whether to lock the menu display,
showing the User menu only.
On: Enter an arbitrary passcode number to lock
the menu display. (Only the User menu is
displayed.)
Off: Enter the passcode number entered when
“On” was selected to unlock the menu
display. (When unlocked, the normal menu
list is displayed.)
Maintenance >Essence Mark
Makes settings related to essence marks.
Item
Setting
Description
Find Mode
Clip/Rec Start
Sets the operation when the NEXT/PREV button is
pressed.
Rec Start: Moves to the next or the previous
recording start mark, respectively.
Clip: Moves to the start of the next clip when the
NEXT button is pressed. Moves to the start of
the current clip when the PREV button is
pressed (or moves to the start of the previous
clip if the PREV button is pressed at the start
of the clip).
[Note]
In normal menu display operation, this item is not
displayed.
For details about menu display operation, see
page 91.
RM Common Memory
On/Off
Selects whether to share (On) or not share (Off)
settings between when using a remote control
unit connection and when the camcorder is
operated locally.
113
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Camera Config
Makes settings related to various camcorder operations.
Maintenance >Preset White
Makes settings related to white balance preset values.
Item
Setting
Description
RM Rec Start
RM/Camera/PARA
Selects which of the recording start/stop buttons
are enabled when a remote control unit is
connected.
RM: Remote control unit
Camera: Camcorder
PARA: Both
Detail Control(RM/RCP) HD/QFHD
SET Key on Thumbnail
ALAC
Pause/Play
Auto/Off
Description
R Gain <P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R gain preset value.
B Gain <P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B gain preset value.
AWB Enable <P>
On/Off
Turns execution of the AWB (auto white balance)
function on/off when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to PRST.
Maintenance >White Filter
Makes settings related to filters.
Selects the operation when the MENU knob is
pressed with only one thumbnail selected.
Item
Setting
Description
ND Filter C.Temp
On/Off
Turns the function that assigns electrical CC filters
to ND filters on/off.
ND FLT C.Temp<1>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when electrical CC
filters are assigned to ND filters (filter 1).
ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when electrical CC
filters are assigned to ND filters (filters 2 to 4).
Electrical CC<A>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Electrical CC<B>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Electrical CC<C>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K/
---
Contact a Sony service representative for information about
aberration correction lenses.
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch. Select “----” if not using C.
Electrical CC<D>
Sets the video resolution of the HD output signal
down-converted from the QFHD signal.
High: High resolution characteristic that uses
QFHD oversampling to emphasize detail.
Normal: Characteristic relatively close to existing
HD cameras (such as the PDW-750).
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K/
---
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch. Select “----” if not using D.
Maintenance >DCC Adjust
Makes settings related to DCC (dynamic contrast control).
Sets whether to execute ALAC (Auto Lens
Aberration Correction) automatically.
Auto: Execute ALAC automatically when an
ALAC-compatible lens is attached and ALAC
is enabled.
Off: Do not execute.
Depending on the aberration correction lens, the
aberration correction function may not be activated
immediately (“ALAC” does not appear on the viewfinder
screen) after turning the power on, even when this
setting is set to Auto. If this occurs, turn the lens zoom
ring and focus ring to the end stop and back, and check
whether the “ALAC” indicator appears on the viewfinder
screen.
High/Normal
Setting
Sets the signal format for detail control by an RM/
RCP in QFHD recording format to HD or QFHD.
[Note]
HD Modulation
Item
Maintenance >Preset White
Makes settings related to white balance preset values.
Item
Setting
Description
Color Temp <P>
1500K to 3200K to 50000K
Sets the white balance preset value.
Color Temp Balance
<P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the fine color temperature settings, for use
when a satisfactory image cannot be obtained
using Color Temp <P>.
Item
Setting
Description
DCC Function Select
DCC/Fix
Selects the setting method for the knee point
when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to CAM with
DCC on.
DCC: Automatically adjusts the knee point to
match the luminance of the subject.
Fix: Sets the knee point to a fixed value.
DCC D Range
400%/450%/500%/550%/
600%
Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT/DCC
switch is set to CAM with DCC on.
DCC Point
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the DCC minimum knee point.
114
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >DCC Adjust
Makes settings related to DCC (dynamic contrast control).
Maintenance >APR
Makes settings related to automatic pixel noise reduction.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
APR
Execute/Cancel
Executes the automatic pixel noise reduction
function to suppress white flecks in SLS mode
(execute by selecting Execute).
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Deletes white flecks data that were added by
execution of the APR and automatic black balance
adjustment functions (execute by selecting
Execute).
DCC Gain
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the gain relative to the DCC detected value.
DCC Delay Time
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the DCC control speed (speed of response to
changes in the video).
DCC Peak Filter
–99 to ±0 to +99
Adjusts the response sensitivity relative to the
peaks in DCC detected values.
Maintenance >Flicker Reduce
Makes settings related to the flicker correction function.
You can correct the flicker created when shooting a subject under lighting where the brightness varies
periodically, such as fluorescent lighting, due to the relationship between the frequency and the recording
frame rate.
Maintenance >Setup for Mobile App
Configures connection settings using the network setup assist tool.
Item
Setting
Description
Setup
Mode
Auto/On/Off
Sets the operation of the flicker correction
function.
On: Always operating.
Auto: Operates when flicker is detected.
Off: Does not operate.
Maintenance >Access Authentication
Makes settings related to access authentication.
Frequency
60Hz/50Hz
Synchronizes with the power supply frequency of
lighting causing flicker.
The factory setting is 60Hz when System
Frequency is set to 59.94, 29.97, or 23.98.
The factory setting is 50Hz when System
Frequency is set to 50 or 25.
Item
Setting
Starts configuring connection settings using the
network setup assist tool.
Item
Setting
User Name
(Displays the current user name.) Sets the user name (arbitrary name for access
authentication). Set to “admin” by factory default.
Password
*******
Maintenance >Genlock
Makes settings related to genlock.
Item
Setting
Description
Genlock
On/Off
Turns the genlock function on/off.
Reference
Internal/External(HD)/
External(SD)/SDI IN/CA
Displays the type of reference signal used by the
camcorder.
Maintenance >Auto Shading
Executes auto black shading correction.
Setting
Description
Auto Black Shading
Execute/Cancel
Executes auto black shading correction (execute
by selecting Execute).
Reset Black Shading
Execute/Cancel
Clears the black shading correction value (execute
by selecting Execute).
Master Gain (TMP)
–9dB/–6dB/–3dB/0dB/
3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Sets a temporary master gain value. (The value is
the same as the value selected with the GAIN
switch.)
Description
Sets the password for access authentication.
Valid passwords must be 8 characters or longer,
and contain at least one alphanumeric character
and at least one numeric character.
The entered password is displayed using asterisks.
The entered characters are visible while the SHIFT
key is pressed.
[Note]
The password setting is reset when updating the
firmware of the unit from a version prior to 5.0 to version
5.0 or later, or a version prior to 6.1 to version 6.1 or later.
In this case, set the password again.
Generate Password
Item
Description
Show Settings
Execute/Cancel
Automatically generates a password for access
authentication.
Displays the user name and password for access
authentication.
115
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Network
Makes settings related to network connections.
Maintenance >Network
Makes settings related to network connections.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Wi-Fi Station Detail
Settings
DHCP (On/Off)
Enter the password of the access point of the
destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi Station
mode.
The entered password is displayed using asterisks.
The entered characters are visible while the SHIFT
key is pressed.
The following characters are valid.
Alphabetic (upper case): A to Z
Alphabetic (lower case): a to z
Numeric: 0 to 9
Symbols: !"#$%&'*+,/:;<=>?[\]^`{|}~
Setting
On/Off
Turns the network function on/off.
Wi-Fi Mode
Wi-Fi Access Point/
Wi-Fi Station/Off
Sets the operating mode for wireless LAN
connections.
NFC
Execute/Cancel
Initiates a one-touch connection using NFC
(execute by selecting Execute).
WPS
Execute/Cancel
Starts Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) (execute by
selecting Execute).
Channel
Auto(5GHz)/Auto/CH1/CH2/
CH3/CH4/CH5/CH6/CH7/CH8/
CH9/CH10/CH11
Sets the wireless LAN channel.
SSID & Password
(SSID display)
(Password display)
Displays the SSID and password.
IP Address (DHCP/On: obtain
automatically, DHCP/Off:
192.168.1.50)
Enter the IP address of the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
SSID
(SSID display)
Displays the SSID of the access point of the
destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi Station
mode.
Subnet Mask (DHCP/On: obtain
automatically, DHCP/Off:
255.255.255.0)
Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Wi-Fi Station Remote
On/Off
Enables/disables operation from a Wi-Fi remote
control, web menu, and the “Content Browser
Mobile” application when connected to a network
using Wi-Fi Station mode.
Gateway (DHCP/On: obtain
Enter the gateway for the access point.
automatically, DHCP/Off: 0.0.0.0) Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Wi-Fi Station Detail
Settings
[Note]
“Auto(5GHz)” may not be displayed, depending on the
wireless LAN module used.
Scan Networks (Execute/Cancel)
Starts auto detection of network destinations for
connection (execute by selecting Execute).
SSID (SSID of access point)
Enter the SSID of the access point of the
destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi Station
mode.
Password (password of access
point)
Enter the SSID of the access point of the
destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi Station
mode.
The following characters are valid.
Alphabetic (upper case): A to Z
Alphabetic (lower case): a to z
Numeric: 0 to 9
Symbols: !"#$%&'*+,/:;<=>?[\]^`{|}~
DNS Auto (On/Off)
Enables/disables automatic DNS.
When set to On, the address of the DNS server is
obtained automatically.
Primary DNS Server (DNS Auto/
On: obtain automatically, DNS
Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0)
Enter the primary DNS server for the router.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Secondary DNS Server (DNS
Auto/On: obtain automatically,
DNS Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0)
Enter the secondary DNS server for the router.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Device Name (Wi-Fi)
Displays the name of network device attached to
the USB wireless LAN module connector
IP Address (Wi-Fi)
Displays the IP address when connected to a
wireless LAN.
Subnet Mask (Wi-Fi)
Displays the subnet mask when connected to a
wireless LAN.
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
Displays the MAC address of the USB Wireless LAN
Module attached to the camcorder.
Regenerate Password
Execute/Cancel
Regenerates a password (execute by selecting
Execute).
Modem
On/Off
Enables/disables the network connection using a
3G/4G modem or USB tethering.
116
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Network
Makes settings related to network connections.
Item
Modem Remote
Setting
On/Off
Maintenance >Network Client Mode
Makes settings related to network client mode for connection with C3 Portal or Sony Network RX Station.
Description
Enables/disables the web UI, Wi-Fi remote control,
and CBM remote control when a modem is
connected.
[Note]
Network client mode cannot be set if values are not entered for all items.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns network client mode on/off.
[Note]
[Note]
The functions are disabled regardless of this setting
when a 3G/4G modem is connected.
Public Key Creation
Execute/Cancel
Generates a public key/private key.
When set to On, the firmware version cannot be
updated.
Preset Select
Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3
Selects preset settings (Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3)
comprising network client mode connection
settings configured beforehand.
Preset 1
[Note]
The generated public key/private key will be deleted
when Maintenance >Network Reset is executed.
Public Key Clear
Execute/Cancel
Create Key Date
(Preset name display)
Enter the preset name.
Clears a public key/private key.
CCM Address
Displays the creation date of the public key/
private key.
Sets the address of the CCM to connect.
Host name or IP address
CCM Port (1 to 65535 (8443))
Sets the port number of the CCM to connect
Wired LAN
Enable/Disable
Enables/disables wired LAN connection.
User Name
Wired LAN Remote
On/Off
Enables/disables operation from a Wi-Fi remote
control, web menu, and the “Content Browser
Mobile” application when connected to a network
using a LAN cable.
Sets the user name for authentication of the CCM
to connect.
Password
Sets the password of the CCM to connect.
The entered password is displayed using asterisks.
The entered characters are visible while the SHIFT
key is pressed.
Wired LAN Detail
Settings
DHCP (On/Off)
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to On, an IP address is automatically
assigned to the camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP address manually, set
to Off.
NCM with Proxy (Enable/Disable) Enable: Enable proxy recording when connected
with a CCM.
Disable: Disable proxy recording when connected
with a CCM.
IP Address (DHCP/On: obtain
automatically, DHCP/Off:
192.168.2.50)
Enter the IP address of the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Camera Control (Enable/Disable) Enables/disables camera control operation when
connected with a CCM.
Subnet Mask (DHCP/On: obtain
automatically, DHCP/Off:
255.255.255.0)
Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Camera Setting (Always/
Onetime/Off)
Enables/disables ALL file operations when
connected with a CCM.
Always: Enable ALL file operations all the time.
Onetime: Enable ALL file operations one time.
Off: Disable ALL file operations.
Gateway (DHCP/On: obtain
Enter the gateway for the access point.
automatically, DHCP/Off: 0.0.0.0) Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Preset 2
Same as Preset 1
Same as Preset 1
DNS Auto (On/Off)
Enables/disables automatic DNS.
When set to On, the address of the DNS server is
obtained automatically.
Preset 3
Same as Preset 1
Same as Preset 1
Primary DNS Server (DNS Auto/
On: obtain automatically, DNS
Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0)
Enter the primary DNS server for the router.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Secondary DNS Server (DNS
Auto/On: obtain automatically,
DNS Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0)
Enter the secondary DNS server for the router.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Maintenance >File Transfer
Makes settings related to network file transfer.
Item
Setting
Description
File Transfer
Execute/Cancel
Switches to transfer mode (execute by selecting
Execute).
117
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >File Transfer
Makes settings related to network file transfer.
Maintenance >Streaming
Makes settings related to streaming.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Remote File Transfer
Enable/Disable
Sets whether to enable/disable switching to
transfer mode to transfer original files recorded on
the camcorder by remote operation over a
network.
Enable: Enable switching to transfer mode by
remote operation over a network.
It is not necessary to execute a transfer using
Maintenance >File Transfer.
Disable: Disable switching to transfer mode by
remote operation over a network.
It is necessary to execute a transfer using
Maintenance >File Transfer.
Size
HD Auto/
1280×720/
640×360/
480×270/
320×180
Sets the size of video for streaming.
When “HD Auto” is selected, the size is set to
1920×1080 or 1280×720, according to the setting
of the recording format recorded on the SxS
memory card or the format of the clip to be
played back.
Bit Rate
9Mbps/
6Mbps/
3Mbps/
2Mbps/
1Mbps/
0.5Mbps/
0.3Mbps(Mono L)/
0.3Mbps(Mono R)/
0.2Mbps(Mono L)/
0.2Mbps(Mono R)
Sets the bit rate of video for streaming.
The selectable bit rate varies depending on the
Size setting.
Type
MPEG-2 TS/UDP/
MPEG-2 TS/RTP
Selects the type of video for streaming.
Destination Address
Character string (0.0.0.0)
Enter the address of the transmission destination
server for streaming data.
Destination Port
1 to 65545 (1234)
Enter the port number of the transmission
destination server used for streaming.
Audio Channel
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
Selects the audio channel for the streaming
output.
Auto Upload (Proxy)
Off/On
Default Upload Server
Selects the destination server for uploading
Sony Ci/NCM RX Server/Server
Settings1/Server Settings2/Server original files and proxy files.
For Server Settings1 to 3, the name of the servers
Settings3
entered in Display Name on the Upload Settings
page of the web menu are displayed. For details,
see “To register a destination server” (page 78).
Clear Completed Jobs
Execute/Cancel
Clears the transfer completed jobs from the job
list.
Clear All Jobs
Execute/Cancel
Clears all jobs registered in the job list.
View Job List
Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off.
Displays the transfer job list.
Maintenance >Streaming
Makes settings related to streaming.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
[Notes]
ˎˎ This setting is set to Off when you turn the power on
again.
ˎˎ When set to On, the monitoring function of Content
Browser Mobile is not available.
Preset Select
Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3
Selects a streaming preset.
The settings are common to Preset 1/Preset 2/
Preset 3. See below for descriptions for the
settings in a preset.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the Internet.
Accordingly, the data may potentially be exposed
to other parties. Always check that the transmission
destination can receive the streaming data.
ˎˎ The data may be sent to an unintended party if the
address or other settings are configured incorrectly.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the
status of the network.
ˎˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with
excessive motion.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is set
to a large size with a small bit rate. To reduce this,
select a smaller size for the Size setting.
Maintenance >Clock Set
Sets the internal clock.
Item
Setting
Description
Date Mode
YYMMDD/MMDDYY/DDMMYY
Selects the display format for dates.
12H/24H
12H/24H
Selects the clock display format.
Date
Displays the date setting screen.
Time
Displays the time setting screen.
118
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Language
Selects the display language for messages.
Item
Setting
Select
English/
Espanol/Русский
Maintenance >Option
Performs checks and actions on software options.
/
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Selects the display language for messages.
Type 3
(Option model name)
Displays the model name of the third installed
option.
Install Option
Execute/Cancel
Displays the screen for installing options (execute
by selecting Execute).
Maintenance >Hours Meter
Makes settings related to the digital hours meter.
Item
Setting
Description
Hours (System)
xxxxH
(xxxx hours)
Displays the cumulative hours of use (cannot be
reset).
Hours (Reset)
xxxxH
(xxxx hours)
Displays the cumulative hours of use (can be
reset).
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Resets the Hours (Reset) display to 0 (execute by
selecting Execute).
Maintenance >Network Reset
Returns network-related settings to their factory default state.
Item
Setting
Description
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Resets network related settings (execute by
selecting Execute).
Remove Option
Displays the screen for removing software
options.
Maintenance >Version
Displays the version of the camcorder, and updates the camcorder.
Item
Setting
Number
Version Up
Displays the software version of the camcorder
(Vx.xx).
Execute/Cancel
Maintenance >Fan Control
Sets the fan control mode.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
Auto/Minimum/Off in Rec
Selects the fan control mode.
Maintenance >VF Display Setting
Makes settings related to the viewfinder display.
[Note]
Cannot be selected when the version updater SD card is
not inserted or when Network Client Mode >Setting in
the Maintenance menu is set to On.
Net-Func Version
Number
Setting
Description
Chara/Marker
Brightness
5/4/3/2/1
Sets the brightness of character strings, icons, and
markers superimposed in the viewfinder image.
Maintenance >Option
Performs checks and actions on software options.
Item
Setting
Description
Type 1
(Option model name)
Displays the model name of the first installed
option.
Type 2
(Option model name)
Displays the model name of the second installed
option.
Displays the firmware version of the wireless LAN
connection function of the camcorder (Vx.xx).
[Note]
Not displayed when XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Setting in
the Operation menu is set to Off and Network >Setting
in the Maintenance menu is set to Off.
Net-Func Ver.Up
Item
Updates the software version of the camcorder,
using a card in the UTILITY SD card slot (execute
by selecting Execute).
The following SD cards are supported.
ˎˎ SDHC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher, nonUHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB)
[Note]
The public key/private key generated using Maintenance
>Network >Public Key Creation will be deleted when
this item is executed.
Description
Execute/Cancel
Updates the software for the wireless LAN
connection function of the camcorder, using a
card in the PROXY SD card slot (execute by
selecting Execute).
The following SD cards are supported.
ˎˎ SDHC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher, nonUHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB)
ˎˎ SDXC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher, nonUHS, Capacity: 64 GB to 256 GB)
[Note]
Cannot be selected when Network Client Mode >Setting
in the Maintenance menu is set to On.
119
000
7. Menu Display and Settings
File Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
File >All File
Makes settings related to ALL file operations.
File >User File
Makes settings relating to user file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading user file settings
from an SD card.
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving user file settings onto
an SD card.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
of user files.
Recall User Preset
Execute/Cancel
Description
3Sec Clear Preset
On/Off
Turns the function that clears the currents settings
and presets of each item on/off, when the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch is pushed up and
held for three seconds in the CANCEL/PRST
position.
File >Scene File
Makes settings related to scene file operations.
Item
Recall Internal Memory
Displays a screen for recalling scene files from
internal memory.
Store Internal Memory
Displays a screen for storing scene files in internal
memory.
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading scene files from an
SD card.
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving scene files onto an SD
card.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
of scene files.
Execute/Cancel
Stores the value of menu items registered in the
User menu items as the preset values (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Clear User Preset
Execute/Cancel
Returns the current settings and preset values of
menu items registered in the User menu to the
factory default values (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Load Customize Data
On/Off
Sets whether to load User menu customized
information when [Load SD Card] is executed.
Load White Data
On/Off
Sets whether to load white balance information
when [Load SD Card] is executed.
File >All File
Makes settings related to ALL file operations.
Setting
Setting
Returns the value of menu items registered in the
User menu to the preset values (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Store User Preset
Item
Item
Description
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading All File settings from
an SD card.
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving All File settings onto
an SD card.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
of All Files.
Scene White Data
Setting
On/Off
Description
Sets whether to reflect the while balance data of
scene files when recalling scene files.
File >Reference File
Makes settings related to reference file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Store Reference
Execute/Cancel
Stores the current settings of reference file target
menu items as the preset values (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Clear Reference
Execute/Cancel
Returns the current settings and preset values of
reference file target menu items to the factory
default values (execute by selecting [Execute]).
Load Reference(SD
Card)
Execute/Cancel
Loads reference file settings from and SD card and
sets the preset values (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Execute/Cancel
Stores the preset values of reference file target
menu items to an SD card (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
All Preset
Execute/Cancel
Returns all items to their preset values (execute by
selecting Execute).
Store All Preset
Execute/Cancel
Stores the current settings of all items as the
preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]).
Save Reference(SD
Card)
Clear All Preset
Execute/Cancel
Returns the current settings and presets of All File
menu items to their factory default values
(execute by selecting Execute).
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
of reference files.
120
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: File Menu
File >Lens File
Makes settings related to lens file operations.
File >Lens File
Makes settings related to lens file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Display Mode
Model Name/Lens ID
Selects the items to display in the list box that
appears when saving or loading a file.
Shading H SAW
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW white shading correction value in
the horizontal direction in the lens file.
Recall Internal Memory
Displays a screen for recalling lens files from
internal memory.
Shading H PARA
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola white shading correction value
in the horizontal direction in the lens file.
Store Internal Memory
Displays a screen for storing lens files in internal
memory.
Shading V SAW
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW white shading correction value in
the vertical direction in the lens file.
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading lens files from an SD
card.
Shading V PARA
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola white shading correction value
in the vertical direction in the lens file.
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving lens files onto an SD
card.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
of lens files.
File >User Gamma
Makes settings related to user gamma.
File Source
Displays the number of the selected file.
Clear Lens Offset
Execute/Cancel
Clears the lens file (execute by selecting Execute).
Lens Auto Recall
Off/On(Lens Name)/
On(Serial Number)
Sets whether to automatically recall a lens file
when a lens that supports serial communication is
attached.
Lens Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the attached lens
(lenses that support serial communication only).
Lens Name
Displays the model name of the attached lens
(lenses that support serial communication only).
Lens Manufacturer
Displays the name of the manufacturer of the
attached lens (lenses that support serial
communication only).
Master V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW shading correction value in the
vertical direction in the lens file.
Lens Center H
–40 to ±0 to +40
Sets the horizontal position of the center marker
in the lens file.
Lens Center V
–40 to ±0 to +40
Sets the vertical position of the center marker in
the lens file.
R Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R flare level in the lens file.
G Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the G flare level in the lens file.
B Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B flare level in the lens file.
White Offset R
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance offset R channel correction
value for the lens in the lens file.
White Offset B
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance offset B channel correction
value for the lens in the lens file.
Shading Ch Select
Red/Green/Blue
Selects the target for white shading correction.
Item
Setting
Description
Current Settings
Displays a list screen of the current user gamma
file settings (file names).
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading User Gamma
settings from an SD card.
Reset
1/2/3/4/5/All
Resets the settings in the selected user gamma
file (execute by selecting Execute).
Select All to reset all user gamma files.
121
000
7. Menu Display and Settings
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Using the Assignable Switch item of the Operation menu, you can assign user-specified functions to the
ASSIGN. 0 to 3 switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches, the ONLINE button, and the RET button on the
lens.
The following tables lists the functions that are assigned when the camcorder is shipped from the factory.
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch
Switch or button
Function
Assignable Switch setting
ASSIGN. 0 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGN. 1 switch
No assignment
Off
Immediately after you assign a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch or you switch the recording format, the setting of the switch at
that point may not match the camcorder’s internal state. After assigning a function, switch the ASSIGN. 2 switch or power the
camcorder off and on again.
ASSIGN. 2 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGN. 3 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGNABLE 4 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGNABLE 5 switch
No assignment
Off
RET button
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
Lens RET
ONLINE button
Auto transfer proxy clip
Network Client Mode
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch
[Note]
Assignable Switch setting
Function
Off
No assignment
Front Mic
Switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected.
Marker
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
Picture Cache Rec 1)
Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off.
Zebra
Turns zebra display on/off.
Clip Continuous Rec
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off.
Rec Source
Switches the signals to be recorded between the camera picture and external
input. (If the camcorder is currently recording or playing, the switch takes effect
after recording or playback ends.)
TX Power Save
Switches the wireless transmitter power saving mode.
1) When Picture Cache Rec is assigned, Operation >Rec Function is disabled (grayed out) and cannot be set.
Assignable Switch setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Off
No assignment
–
Marker
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
Setting retained
ATW Hold
Holds the white balance setting in the ATW
(auto-tracking white balance) mode
–
Picture Cache Rec
Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off.
Setting retained
Focus Magnifier
Turns the focus magnification function on/off.
Setting not retained
Zebra
Turns zebra display on/off.
Setting not retained
Shot Mark1
Writes Shot Mark1.
–
Shot Mark2
Writes Shot Mark2.
–
Clip Flag OK
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag NG
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag Keep
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Flash Band Reduce 1)
Turns the flashband correction function on/off.
Setting not retained
1) Even when Flash Band Reduce is set to On, the function does not operate if the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.
122
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches, the
ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the ONLINE Button
Assignable Switch setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Zoom Wide/Tele
–
Assignable Switch setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
When a lens that supports serial communication
is installed, assigns the Zoom Wide function to
ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns the Zoom Tele
function to ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when
<4> and <5> are set).
Off
No assignment
–
[Note]
Front Mic
Switches between stereo (On) and monaural (Off) Setting retained
when a stereo microphone is connected.
Marker
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
Setting retained
Last Clip Delete
Deletes the last recorded clip.
–
ATW
Turns ATW (auto tracing white balance) mode on/ Setting not retained
off.
ATW Hold
Hold the white balance setting in the ATW mode.
–
Turbo Gain
Executes Turbo Gain according to the setting of
Operation >Gain Switch >Gain <Turbo>.
Setting not retained
Rec Review
Executes recording review.
–
Rec
Starts or stops recording.
–
NFC
Executes the NFC function.
–
Network Client Mode
Turns network client mode on/off.
Setting retained
Streaming
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
Setting not retained
Auto Upload(Proxy)
Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off.
Setting retained
Picture Cache Rec
Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off.
Setting retained
Spotlight
Turns the spotlight function in auto iris mode on/
off.
Setting retained
Backlight
Turns the backlight function in auto iris mode on/ Setting retained
off.
VF Mode
Switches the viewfinder screen between B&W
(On) and color (Off).
Setting retained
Video Signal Monitor
Switches the video signal monitor display
function.
Setting retained
Lens Info
Switches the depth of field indication between
off, displayed in meters, and displayed in feet.
Setting retained
Zoom Tele/Wide
When a lens that supports serial communication
is installed, assigns the Zoom Tele function to
ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns the Zoom Wide
function to ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when
<4> and <5> are set).
–
[Note]
Do not modify the assignment during independent
proxy recording.
Do not modify the assignment during independent
proxy recording.
Manual Focus Assist
Turns the manual focus assist function on/off.
Focus Magnifier
Turns the focus magnification function on/off.
Setting retained
Setting not retained
Zebra
Turns zebra display on/off.
Setting not retained
Lens RET
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
–
Shot Mark1
Writes Shot Mark1.
–
Shot Mark2
Writes Shot Mark2.
–
Clip Flag OK
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag NG
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag Keep
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Color Temp SW 3200K
Adjusts white balance using 3200K preset value.
Setting retained
Color Temp SW 4300K
Adjusts white balance using 4300K preset value.
Setting retained
Color Temp SW 5600K
Adjusts white balance using 5600K preset value.
Setting retained
Color Temp SW 6300K
Adjusts white balance using 6300K preset value.
Setting retained
Electrical CC
Function that switches the electrical CC filter
(3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) applied to white
balance adjustment values.
Sequence with each press of the switch/button:
3200K4300K5600K6300K
Can be changed using menu settings (Electrical
CC<A><B><C><D>).
Setting retained
[Note]
This function is not available when Maintenance >White
Filter >ND Filter C.Temp in the setup menu is set to On.
If you set ND Filter C.Temp to On after assigning the
function, the assignable switch ceases to function.
CC5600K
Applies a 5600K electrical CC filter to white
balance adjustment values.
Setting retained
Clip Continuous Rec
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off.
Setting not retained
Slow & Quick Motion
Turns Slow & Quick Motion on/off.
Setting retained
123
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Assignable Switch setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Slot Select
When recording media is loaded in both card
slots A and B, selects the card you want to use.
–
TX Power Save
Switches the wireless transmitter power saving
mode.
Setting not retained
Flash Band Reduce
Turns the flashband correction function on/off.
Setting not retained
[Note]
Even when Flash Band Reduce is set to On, the function
does not operate if the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the RET Button on the Lens
Assignable Switch setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Off
No assignment
–
Lens RET
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
–
Rec Review
Executes recording review.
–
Shot Mark1
Writes Shot Mark1.
–
Writes Shot Mark2.
–
XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
Turns the proxy data recording function on/off.
Setting retained
Shot Mark2
XAVC Proxy Rec Start
Starts/stops proxy recording.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag OK
Adjusts the display on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder to the appropriate contrast for HLG
when HLG is configured or for S-Log3 when
S-Log3 is configured.
Setting not retained
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Gamma Display Assist
Clip Flag NG
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag Keep
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Focus Magnifier
Turns the focus magnification function on/off.
Setting not retained
XAVC Proxy Rec Start
Starts/stops proxy recording.
Setting not retained
Gamma Display Assist
Adjusts the display on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder to the appropriate contrast for HLG
when HLG is configured or for S-Log3 when
S-Log3 is configured.
Setting not retained
[Note]
Not available in SDR mode or during playback.
[Note]
Not available in SDR mode or during playback.
HD (Sub) P/B Mode
Turns subclip playback mode on/off.
Setting retained
124
000
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
User Configuration Data
You can save setup menu settings in the
camcorder’s internal memory and on SD cards.
This allows you to quickly recall an appropriate set
of menu settings for the current situation.
To save setup data on an SD card, insert a writable
SD card (page 31) into the UTILITY SD card slot
before proceeding.
For details about the settings saved in each file,
see “Items Saved in User Data” (page 152).
Inserting an SD card (for saving configuration
data)
1 Open the switch cover.
2 Insert the SD card (for saving configuration
data) in the UTILITY SD card slot.
3 Close the switch cover.
Ejecting an SD card (for saving configuration data)
1 Open the switch cover.
2 Press the SD card in slightly, then remove the
card.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the camcorder is turned off or the SD card is removed
while the SD is being accessed, the integrity of data on
the card cannot be guaranteed. All data recorded on the
card may be discarded. Always make sure the ACCESS
indicator is off before turning off the camcorder or
removing the SD card.
ˎˎ Take caution to prevent the SD card from flying out when
inserting/ejecting the card.
The following user data is supported.
User Files
Reference Files
User files save the setting items and data of the
customizable User menu. You can save up to 64
files on an SD card. By loading this file into the
camcorder memory, you can customize the setup
of the User menu.
Reference files save the scene file standard settings
(when File ID is Standard). You can save one file in
the camcorder’s internal memory and one file on
an SD card.
ALL Files
ALL files save the configuration data of all menus.
You can save up to 64 files on an SD card.
[Note]
Device specific data (shading, output levels, and other data
that requires adjustment for the specific device) is not saved.
Scene Files
Scene files save adjustments to Paint menu items
for the purpose of shooting a particular scene. You
can save up to five files in the camcorder’s internal
memory and up to 64 files on an SD card.
Scene files allow you to save the following types
of data.
ˎˎValues set in the Paint menu
ˎˎShutter speeds set in standard mode or ECS
mode
ˎˎWhite balance data
The data that is saved and loaded depends on
the setting of File >Scene File >Scene White
Data in the setup menu.
Scene files can be stored in internal memory on
the camcorder or on an SD card.
Scene files can also be loaded into the camcorder.
Lens Files
You can set the following data for correcting for
the lens characteristics, and save the data as a
lens file. You can save up to 32 lens files in the
camcorder’s internal memory and up to 64 lens
files on an SD card.
Configuration data
Sub-items
V modulation shading
correction values
M V Modulation
Center marker position
Lens Center H
Lens Center V
Flare level
R Flare
G Flare
B Flare
White balance correction
value
White Offset R
White Offset B
White shading correction
value
Shading Ch Select
Shading H SAW
Shading H PARA
Shading V SAW
Shading V PARA
Gamma Files
You can save up to five user-defined gamma
table data files (User Gamma Data File) in internal
memory.
000
125
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
User Files
Saving a User File
Loading a User File
1 Select File > User File >Save SD Card in the
1 Select File >User File >Load SD Card in the
setup menu.
A screen for selecting a user file save
destination appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID
name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you
can modify it.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >User File >File ID in the setup
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then
press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
setup menu.
A user file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading
configuration data.
000
126
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
ALL Files
Saving Configuration Data as an ALL
File
1 Select File >All File >Save SD Card in the setup
menu.
A screen for selecting an ALL file save
destination appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID
name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you
can modify it.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
[Note]
The current values and preset values are stored in an ALL file.
If an error message appears
One of the following error messages may appear
during execution of the save, or as soon as you
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not saved.
Error message Problem
File Access
NG
Solution
No recordable
Insert recordable
media is inserted. media.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >All File >File ID in the setup menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then
press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
Loading Configuration Data
Restoring All Current Settings to
Preset Values
Resetting Current Settings and Preset
Values to Factory Default Settings
In this document, initial setup menu settings
configured/saved by the user are referred to as
“preset values.”
Even after loading files to set up the camcorder,
and overwriting original files with new settings,
you can reset the contents of the files by
recovering the preset values.
1 Select File >All File >Clear All Preset in the
1 Select File >All File >Load SD Card in the setup 1 Select File >All File >All Preset in the setup
menu.
An ALL file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you load a file from an SD card, the current values
and preset values saved in the camcorder’s internal
memory are overwritten.
ˎˎ Do not load a file on a device that is an older version than
the device from which the file was saved. Doing so could
cause a malfunction.
ˎˎ The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading
configuration data.
If an error message appears
menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
Saving All Current Settings as Preset
Values
1 Select File >All File >Store All Preset in the
setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
One of the following error messages may appear
during execution of the load, or as soon as you
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not loaded.
Error
message
Problem
Solution
File Access
NG
Insert the media
There is no
that contains the
readable media
The specified file file you want.
does not exist on
the media
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing.
setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing.
000
127
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Scene Files
Saving a Scene File in Internal
Memory
1 Select File >Scene File >Store Internal Memory
in the setup menu.
A scene file list screen appears.
If the File ID is set to “Standard” destination,
preconfigured standard settings are saved.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
then press the knob.
The scene file is saved, overwriting any existing
file, in the selected destination.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >Scene File >File ID in the setup
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then
press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the Loading a Scene File from Internal
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
Memory
1 Select File >Scene File >Recall Internal Memory
Saving a Scene File on an SD Card
in the setup menu.
A scene file list screen appears.
1 Select File >Scene File >Save SD Card in the
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
setup menu.
A scene file save destination screen appears.
then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID
name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you
can modify it.
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
press the knob.
Load a Scene File from an SD Card
File >Scene File >Load SD Card in the
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the 1 Select
setup menu.
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
A scene file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
000
128
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Reference Files
Saving Current Settings as Preset
Values
Loading a Reference File from an SD
Card
1 Select File >Reference File >Store Reference in 1 Select File >Reference File >Load Reference(SD
the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
Card) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
Saving Current Settings as Preset
Values on an SD Card
Resetting Current Settings and Preset
Values to Factory Default Settings
press the knob.
press the knob.
1 Select File >Reference File >Save Reference(SD 1 Select File >Reference File >Clear Reference in
Card) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >Reference File >File ID in the setup
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then
press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
000
129
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Lens Files
Saving a Lens File in Internal Memory
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >Lens File >Store Internal Memory
1 Select File >Lens File >File ID in the setup
in the setup menu.
A lens file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with File ID of “No
offset.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID
name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you
can modify it.
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then
press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the Loading a Lens File from Internal
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
Saving a Lens File on an SD Card
Memory
1 Select File >Lens File >Recall Internal Memory
in the setup menu.
A lens file list screen appears.
1 Select File >Lens File >Save SD Card in the
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
setup menu.
A lens file save destination screen appears.
then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID
name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you
can modify it.
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
press the knob.
Loading a Lens File from an SD Card
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the 1 Select File >Lens File >Load SD Card in the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
setup menu.
A lens file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
Loading a Lens File Automatically
When you are using a lens that supports serial
communication, you can set up the camcorder
by automatically loading the lens file that
corresponds to the lens settings (Lens Auto Recall
function).
To use the Lens Auto Recall function, set File >Lens
File >Lens Auto Recall in the setup menu to one of
the following.
Off: Do not use the Lens Auto Recall function.
On (Lens Name): Load the lens file that
corresponds to the lens model name.
On (Serial Number): Load the lens file that
corresponds to the lens model name and
serial number (when the lens supports
communication of the serial number).
If the lens does not support communication of
the serial number, even when set to On (Serial
Number), load the lens file that corresponds to the
lens model name.
000
130
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Gamma Files
Checking the Current Gamma File
Settings (File Names)
Using User Gamma Files Created
Using CvpFileEditorTM V4.3
Select File >User Gamma >Current Settings in
the setup menu to display a list of the currently
configured user gamma files.
Save created user gamma files to be loaded in the
“PRIVATE/SONY/PRO/CAMERA/HD_CAM” directory
of the SD card.
Loading a User Gamma File from an
SD Card
Resetting a User Gamma File to Initial
State
1 Select File >User Gamma >Load SD Card in the 1 Select File >User Gamma >Reset in the setup
setup menu.
A user gamma file list screen appears.
menu.
A gamma file number reset screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the number of
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
the gamma file to reset (1 to 5).
To reset all gamma files, select [All].
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
131
000
9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting a Remote Control Unit
When an RM-B170 Remote Control Unit,
RCP-1001/1501 Remote Control Panel, or other
control unit is connected, some camcorder
functions can be controlled from that unit.
You can also operate the menu and monitor the
picture on a monitor screen connected to the
MONITOR connector on the RM-B170.
Releasing Remote Control Mode
Turn off the camcorder and disconnect the remote
control unit.
The switch settings on the camcorder become
enabled.
Connecting a Remote Control Unit
Connecting a Monitor to an RM-B170
Using a remote control cable, connect between
the REMOTE connector (8-pin) of the camcorder
and the camera connector of the remote control
unit.
When you turn on the camcorder after making the
connection, the camcorder enters remote control
mode, enabling menu operations and shooting
operations.
The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RMB170 outputs the same signal as the output from
the VIDEO OUT connector.
To connect a monitor to the MONITOR connector
on the RM-B170, set the VIDEO OUT connector of
the camcorder to Composite signal, and use the
black cable supplied with the RM-B170.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Remote control operation is not supported if USB
connection to the camcorder is enabled.
ˎˎ If a USB connection to the camcorder is enabled during
remote control, remote control mode is released.
ˎˎ Do not connect or disconnect the remote control unit
when the camcorder is on.
ˎˎ A remote control cable is not supplied with the RCP1001/1501 Remote Control Panel.
The following switches of the camcorder are
disabled when a remote control unit is connected.
ˎˎGAIN switch
ˎˎWHITE BAL switch
ˎˎAUTO W/B BAL switch
ˎˎSHUTTER switch
ˎˎOUTPUT/DCC switch
ˎˎASSIGN. 1/3 switches, ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches,
and the ONLINE button to which the Turbo Gain
or ATW function has been assigned
Image Quality Adjustment when an
RM-B170 is Connected
When the RM-B170 is connected, the parameters
for camera image quality adjustment items (paint
data) are set to the parameters that were specified
the last time that the RM-B170 was connected.
Function of Recording Start/Stop
Buttons when an RM-B170 is
Connected
Set the function of the buttons using Maintenance
>Camera Config >RM Rec Start in the setup menu.
The functions of the buttons for the RM Rec Start
settings are given below.
Button
Camcorder setup menu
RM-B170
RM Rec Start setting
RM
Camera
PARA
Camcorder REC
START button
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Lens VTR button
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ASSIGN. 1/3
switches,
ASSIGNABLE 4/5
switches, and
ONLINE button
assigned with
recording start/
stop function
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
RM-B170 MEDIA
START button
Enabled
Main data block
Remote control data
block
Camcorder non-volatile memory
Camera unit hardware
Disabled
Enabled
Data Structure of Image Quality
Adjustment Data
The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used
for storing camera image quality adjustment data
(paint data) consists of the two regions shown
below: a “main data block” that is used when
a remote control unit is not connected, and a
“remote control data block” that is used when a
remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment
data is automatically selected and output to the
camera section depending on whether or not
a remote control unit, such as the RM-B170, is
connected.
RM-B170 connected
RM-B170 not connected
When a remote control unit is connected, the
“remote control data block” is selected as the
current paint data block, and the paint adjustment
parameters that were in effect the last time the
remote control unit was used are loaded.
However, when the settings of absolute value
controls 1) and absolute value switches 2) are set
on the remote control unit, the settings on the
remote control unit override the settings on the
camcorder.
When the remote control unit is disconnected
from the camcorder, the “main data block” is reenabled, and the camcorder returns to the settings
that were in effect before the remote control unit
was connected.
1) Absolute value controls: Data corresponding to the
angular position of the control is output. Controls for
which data corresponding to the amount of rotation is
output are called relative value controls.
2) Absolute value switches: Switches (or knobs), such
as toggle switches or slide switches (except most
momentary switches) whose positions must coincide with
their functions are called absolute value switches.
When Maintenance >Camera Config >RM
Common Memory in the setup menu is set to
[On], you can use settings of the paint adjustment
000
132
9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit
data stored in the main data block even if a
remote control unit is connected. In this case,
the settings stored in the main data block will
be updated when you change the settings on
the remote control unit. Thus, the settings of the
paint data made with the remote control unit will
be retained even after the remote control unit is
removed. However, if the switch position on the
remote control unit differs from the one on the
camcorder, the switch position on the camcorder
takes precedence.
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in
effect before you connect the remote control unit.
In this case, you must set the control knobs to
relative value mode on the remote control unit.
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with the
remote control unit.
Operating the Menu from the
RM‑B170
1 Press the CHARACTER button on the RM-B170,
turning it on, then press the MENU button.
The menu is displayed on the monitor
connected to the MONITOR connector of the
RM-B170.
2 Select and set menu items using the
adjustment knob and CANCEL/ENTER button.
3 When finished, set the MENU button to OFF to
exit the menu.
For details about RM-B170 operation, refer to the operation
manual of the RM-B170.
000
133
9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit
Major Functions Supported on the RCP-1001/1501, RM-B170
Table legend
Signal support is indicated by the following.
Yes: Available
–: Not available
Item
Sub-item
Settings
Function
RCP-1001
RCP-1501
Panel Active
Panel Active
On/Off
Turns panel operation on/off.
Yes
Yes
RM-B170
Yes
Bars
Bars
On/Off
Turns color bar output on/off.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Call
Call
On/Off
Calls camcorder from RCP/RM.
Yes
Yes
Yes 1)
Standard
Standard
On/Off
Turns standard mode on/off.
Yes
Yes
Yes 1)
Yes
ND Filter
ND Filter
1/2/3/4
Displays the selected ND filter.
Yes
Yes
CC Filter
CC Filter
A/B/C/D
Displays the selected CC filter.
–
–
–
Gain
Step Gain
–9/–6/–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/
36/42dB
Master gain setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
White Balance
AWB
Start/Stop
Starts auto white balance.
During execution, this stops auto white balance.
Yes
Yes
Yes
White Memory
A/B/PRESET
Switches the white balance preset memory.
Yes
Yes
Yes
ATW
On/Off
Turns ATW on/off.
Yes 1)
Yes
Yes 1)
5600K
On/Off
Turns electrical color temperature conversion on/off.
Yes
Yes
Yes 1)
Black
ABB
Start/Stop
Starts black balance auto adjustment.
During execution, this stops black balance.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Knee
Point
75% to 90% to 109%
Sets the knee point.
–
Yes
Yes 1)
Detail
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the QFHD or HD detail level.
Yes
Yes 3)
Shutter
Iris
Yes
3)
3)
Shutter Setting
On/Off
Turns the shutter on/off.
–
Yes
Yes
Shutter Speed
–
Sets the shutter speed.
–
Yes
Yes
ECS Setting
On/Off
Turns ECS mode on/off.
–
Yes
Yes
ECS Frequency
–
Sets the ECS mode frequency.
–
Yes
Yes
SLS Setting
On/Off
Turns SLS mode on/off.
–
Yes
Yes
SLS Speed
–
Sets the SLS mode speed (number of frames)
–
Yes
Yes
Iris Mode
Auto/Manual
Sets the iris mode.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Iris Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Adjusts the auto iris target level.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Close
On/Off
Turns iris control closing on/off.
Yes
Yes
–
000
134
9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit
Item
Sub-item
Settings
Function
Switch Status
Gamma
On/Off
Turns the gamma correction function on/off.
Black Gamma
On/Off
Turns the black gamma correction function on/off.
Matrix
On/Off
Turns the matrix function on/off.
Knee
On/Off
White Clip
White
Black
Camcorder Menu
Media
RCP-1001
RCP-1501
RM-B170
–
Yes
Yes 1)
Yes
Yes 1)
–
Yes
Yes 2)
Turns the knee correction function on/off.
–
Yes
Yes 1)
On/Off
Turns the white clip adjustment function on/off.
–
Yes
Yes 2)
Detail(QFHD)
On/Off
Turns the QFHD detail adjustment function on/off.
–
Yes
Yes
Detail(HD)
On/Off
Turns the HD detail adjustment function on/off.
–
Yes
Yes
Flare
On/Off
Turns the flare correction function on/off.
–
Yes
Yes 1)
Test Saw
On/Off
Turns the test signal on/off.
–
Yes
Yes 1)
Yes
1)
R Gain
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance R gain value.
Yes
Yes
Yes
B Gain
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance B gain value.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Master Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master black level.
Yes
Yes
Yes
R Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R channel black level.
Yes
Yes
Yes
B Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B channel black level.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Menu
On/Off
Displays the camcorder menu.
–
–
Yes
Cancel/Preset
Cancel/Preset
–
–
Yes
Select/Set
Select(Up/Down)/Set
–
–
Yes
Rec
Start/Stop
Starts/stops recording.
–
–
Yes
Play
Play/Pause
Starts playback.
–
–
Yes
FREV
–
Fast reverse playback
–
–
Yes
FFWD
–
Fast forward playback
–
–
Yes
STOP
–
Stops playback.
–
–
Yes
Rec Review
–
Starts recording review.
–
–
Yes
PREV
–
Jumps to the start of the current clip.
–
–
Yes
NEXT
–
Jumps to the start of the next clip.
–
–
Yes
Shot Mark1
–
Sets shot mark 1.
–
–
Yes
Shot Mark2
–
Sets shot mark 2.
–
–
Yes 1)
ZOOM
–
–
Zoom operation (with compatible lens)
–
–
Yes 1)
FOCUS
–
–
Focus operation (with compatible lens)
–
–
Yes 1)
Shot Mark
1) Operation supported when the function is assigned to an assignable switch on the RCP/RM.
2) Camcorder menu operation supported from the RM.
3) You can control the QFHD or HD detail, according to the setting of Maintenance >Camera Config >Detail Control(RM/RCP) in the setup menu.
000
135
9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting an External Monitor
Select the output signal and use an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected.
of that external device to match the analog
composite signal setting for the VIDEO OUT
connector.
To input camcorder output audio to an external
device such as a monitor, VTR, or other recording
device, connect the audio output of the AUDIO
OUT connector to the audio input of that external
device.
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
BNC cable (not supplied)
HDMI OUT Connector (Type A
Connector)
BNC cable (not supplied)
Regardless of whether the signal is 4K, HD, or SD,
the same status information and menus can be
displayed on the external monitor as those on the
viewfinder screen.
>SDI Out1/3 Output/SDI Out2/4 Output in the
setup menu (page 96).
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
[Note]
The SD signal down-converted output is enabled when
Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup
menu is set to 720×486i or 720×576i.
SDI OUT Connector (BNC)
The SDI OUT connector can be used to connect a
device that supports SDI. The device type can be a
monitor, switcher, VTR, or other recording device.
The output signal from this connector can be
turned on and off using Operation >Input/Output
VIDEO OUT Connector
The VIDEO OUT connector can be used to connect
a device that supports analog composite signals.
The device type can be a monitor, VTR, or other
recording device.
The output signal changes in conjunction with
the setting of Operation >Input/Output >Output
Format in the setup menu.
To input the VIDEO OUT connector output signal
to an external analog composite device, it may
be necessary to change the input signal setting
You can turn the output signal from the
camcorder on/off using Operation >Input/Output
>HDMI Output in the setup menu.
The output signal format is set using Operation
>Input/Output >Output Format in the setup
menu.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable for
connection.
000
136
9. Connecting External Devices
Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer
The clips recorded on SxS memory cards with this
camcorder can be controlled on a computer or
edited using optional nonlinear editing software.
You can copy clips on SxS memory cards to
portable storage or other USB media if portable
media/USB media is connected to the external
device connection connector.
USB Connection with a Computer
When you connect the camcorder to a computer
using a USB cable (not supplied), the memory card
in the slot is recognized as an extended drive by
the computer.
When two memory cards are mounted in
the camcorder, they are recognized as two
independent extended drives by the computer.
To start USB connection
When you connect a computer to the PC
connector with a USB cable (not supplied), the
message “Connect USB Now?” is displayed to
prompt you to confirm that you wish to enable the
USB connection.
If you select “Cancel” or push the MENU CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position,
or if you disconnect the USB cable, the message
“Connect USB Now?” disappears.
If you select “Execute” and press the MENU knob,
the USB connection is enabled and the camcorder
is recognized as an extension drive.
If the USB connection is enabled during recording/
playback operation, the operation is stopped and
the message “USB Connecting” appears on the
viewfinder screen.
At this time, the output signal from the VIDEO
OUT connector and SDI OUT 1/2/3/4 connectors
changes to a black signal.
[Notes]
USB cable
(not supplied)
ˎˎ The camcorder cannot be operated for recording,
playback, and so on while the message “USB Connecting”
is displayed.
ˎˎ When the computer accesses the media loaded in
the camcorder, do not try to carry out the following
operations.
–– Operating the camcorder (turning the power on/off,
switching the operating mode, etc.)
–– Removing or loading a media from an active slot
(being accessed from the computer)
–– Removing or connecting the USB cable
Releasing the USB connection
[Notes]
ˎˎ Turn the camcorder on and wait until the image and
information are displayed on the screen, then connect the
USB cable to the camcorder.
ˎˎ When connecting the USB cable to the computer, be
careful to check the form and direction of the USB
connector.
ˎˎ The camcorder does not work on the bus power from the
computer.
To release the USB connection, follow the same
procedure as that for removing a device from the
computer.
To enable the USB connection again, first
disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it.
The message “Connect USB Now?” appears again.
To remove an SxS memory card
On Windows
1 Click on the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon on
the task bar of the computer.
2 Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card Drive(X:)” from the displayed menu.
3 Check that the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of
your computer in advance, using the supplied
application software.
Some editing software may not operate properly.
Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to
the recording formats used with this camcorder.
Connecting Portable Storage/USB
Media
message appears, then remove the card.
On Macintosh
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to
the Trash.
If the SxS memory card icon is displayed in the
Finder, click on the eject icon.
To use the application software
To copy clips to the local disk of your computer,
the dedicated application software must be
downloaded and installed on your computer. For
details about downloading software, see “Software
Downloads” (page 170).
Although the data regarding recorded materials
are stored over multiple files and folders, you
can easily handle the clips without considering
such data and directory structure by using the
dedicated application software.
[Note]
If you perform operations on clips, such as copying the clips
on the SxS memory card using Explorer (Windows) or Finder
(Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by the clips may
not be maintained.
To use a nonlinear editing system
In a nonlinear editing system, editing software
(option) that supports the formats recorded by the
camcorder is required.
When portable storage, USB HDD, or similar media
is connected to the external device connection
connector, you can copy clips from the recording
media inserted in an SxS card slot of the
camcorder to USB media.
1 Specify the destination folder for copying clips
in Operation >USB >Select Folder in the setup
menu.
You can also select [New] on the screen to
create a new folder.
[Note]
If a folder is not specified, a folder is automatically
created with a folder name the same as the creation
date of the first clip to be copied, and clips are copied
to that folder.
2 Select Operation >USB >Copy to USB in the
setup menu.
3 Select the slot in which the target recording
media is inserted.
Media(A) to USB: Copy all clips from the
recording media inserted in slot A.
Media(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the
recording media inserted in slot B.
Media(A)(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the
recording media inserted in slot A and slot
B.
000
137
9. Connecting External Devices: Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer
[Note]
When a copy destination folder is specified in step 1 and
Media(A)(B) to USB is selected, slot A clips are copied to
the specified destination folder. Slot B clips are copied
to a folder that is automatically created with a folder
name the same as the creation date of the first clip.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
All clips on the target recording media are
copied to the USB media.
[Note]
If a clip with the same file name as the clip to copy
already exists in the destination folder, the clip is not
copied.
Displaying a list of clips on portable storage/USB
media
You can display a list of the clips on portable
storage/USB media using Operation >USB >View
Clip List in the setup menu.
Renaming a folder on portable storage/USB
media
You can rename a folder using Operation >USB
>Rename Folder in the setup menu.
1 Select Operation >USB >Rename Folder in the
setup menu.
2 Select the folder to rename, and press the SET
button.
A file name input screen appears.
3 Enter a folder name, and select [Done] on the
screen.
The folder is renamed.
Checking for copy read errors
You can check for read errors after writing clips by
setting Operation >USB >Error Check in the setup
menu to On.
Formatting portable storage/USB media
You can format portable storage/USB media in
exFAT format using Operation >USB >Format USB
in the setup menu.
1 Select Operation >USB >Format USB in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
Initialization (formatting) begins.
3 When the formatting is completed, a message
appears on the screen. Select [OK].
Checking free space on portable storage/USB
media
The free space on portable storage/USB media is
displayed in the Media Remain row on the screen
displayed when Operation >USB in the setup
menu is selected.
About power supply to portable storage/USB
media
Power is supplied to portable storage/USB media
from the external device connector automatically
when performing an operation in Operation >USB
in the setup menu.
However, power supply is not started under the
following conditions, even when performing an
operation in Operation >USB in the setup menu.
To start the supply of power, perform the solution
shown in the table.
State
Solution
During clip recording,
playback, thumbnail display,
proxy recording, streaming,
proxy transfer, or live transfer
mode
Terminate the
previous operation.
State
Solution
Network Client Mode is On
Set Network Client
Mode to Off.
Camera adaptor is connected Unmount the
camera adaptor
connection.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Clips on portable storage or other USB media cannot be
copied to recording media inserted in an SxS card slot.
ˎˎ Clips cannot be recorded while power is supplied to
the external device connector. To start recording clips,
terminate the Operation >USB operation in the setup
menu.
000
138
9. Connecting External Devices
Configuring a Shooting and Recording System
You can mount a CA-FB70/TX70 HD Camera Adaptor to the camcorder and connect a Camera Control
Unit (CCU).
This allows you to configure a shooting and recording system consisting of multiple camcorders with
camera extension units connected to a remote control unit.
Tally and Call Indicators
For more information about the CA-FB70 and CA-TX70, refer to their respective operation manuals.
Data received from system
[Notes]
ˎˎ When using the camcorder in this system, do not connect a video light to the camcorder.
ˎˎ Supported only for XAVC and MPEG HD recording.
ˎˎ Not supported for proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function.
ˎˎ Not supported in the return video display by the camcorder.
The tally and call indicators for a system are as follows.
HDVF LED indicators
Text display on viewfinder screen
Tally
Green
Tally
CA call
Non-CA
call
REC/
GREEN

TALLY LED TALLY LED
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not lit
Not lit

CALL
No display No display No display
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Lit
Not lit

OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Not lit
Not lit
No display No display CALL
No display CALL
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Lit
Not lit

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Not lit
Lit
No display 
No display CALL
No display
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Lit
Lit


CALL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Not lit
Lit
No display 
CALL
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Lit
Lit


CALL
No display No display
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Lit
Not lit

ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Not lit
Not lit
No display No display CALL
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Lit
Not lit

ON
OFF
ON
ON
Not lit
Not lit
No display No display CALL
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Lit
Lit

No display CALL

No display
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Not lit
Lit
No display 
CALL
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Lit
Lit


CALL
ON
ON
ON
ON
Not lit
Lit
No display 
CALL
[Note]
Alarm indications using the tally indicator in the warning display are not displayed while a CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is
connected.
000
139
9. Connecting External Devices: Configuring a Shooting and Recording System
Supported Formats and Limitations of Shooting/Recording Systems
The supported formats of a shooting/recording system comprising the camcorder, camera adaptor, and
camera control unit are shown in the following table.
Operation menu
Format
Frequency
Input/Output
Rec Format
System format of
camera adaptor /
camera control unit
Output Format
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
1920×1080i
1920×1080 59.94i
Camcorder
limitation
Frequency
23.98
1920×1080 59.94i
No
HD422 50 720P
1280×720P
(2-3PD)
1280×720 59.94P
No
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
1920×1080i
1920×1080 50i
No
1920×1080i
1920×1080 50i
No
1280×720P
1280×720 50P
No
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
Return video
display
XAVC-L 35 1080P
No
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
50
1920×1080i
1920×1080 59.94i
No
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 25 1080i
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080i
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
HQ 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
XAVC-L 35 1080i
SP 1440×1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
1280×720P
1280×720 59.94P
No
HD422 50 1080i
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P
HQ 1920×1080i
HD 422 50 720P
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
SP 1440×1080i
1920×1080PsF
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
1920×1080 29.97PsF a)
1920×1080 59.94i
No
XAVC-I 1280×720P
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
HD 422 50 720P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
HQ 1280×720P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1920×1080P
HD422 50 720P
Return video
display
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-I 1280×720P
Output Format
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
29.97
1920×1080i
(2-3PD)
Input/Output
Rec Format
SDI
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
Camcorder
limitation
Format
SDI
59.94
System format of
camera adaptor /
camera control unit
Operation menu
1280×720P
1280×720 59.94P
No
000
140
9. Connecting External Devices: Configuring a Shooting and Recording System
System format of
camera adaptor /
camera control unit
Camcorder
limitation
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080 25PsF a)
1920×1080 50i
No
1280×720P
1280×720 50P
No
Operation menu
Format
Frequency
Input/Output
Rec Format
Output Format
Return video
display
SDI
25
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1920×1080P
HD422 50 720P
a) A PsF setting is recommended when a CA-TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected.
[Note]
In a shooting/recording system, special recording functions, such as wireless LAN connection function or Slow & Quick Motion,
cannot be used simultaneously.
000
141
9. Connecting External Devices
Recording External Input Signals
You can record SDI signals from devices connected to the SDI IN connector of the camcorder.
To output and record input signals instead of the camera picture, set Operation >Input/Output >Source
Select in the setup menu to [External].
HD/SD
Operation >Format >Rec
Format in the setup menu
Operation >Format
>Frequency in the setup
menu
Supported external input signal
formats
HD
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
SD 486 59.94i
50
SD 576 50i
59.94
SD 486 59.94i
50
SD 576 50i
[Notes]
ˎˎ External input signals cannot be recorded in Slow & Quick Motion mode. When a special recording mode, such as Slow &
Quick Motion mode, is selected, the recording mode is canceled when you set Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in
the setup menu to [External].
ˎˎ Execution of automatic adjustment functions, such as automatic black balance, and operations, such as playback, Rec
Review, and thumbnail display, will end when Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in the setup menu is set to
[External]. The camcorder enters stop mode and then the camera picture switches to external input.
ˎˎ Recording may stop if the input signal is disturbed while recording external input. Recording automatically resumes when
the input signal returns to normal.
ˎˎ Not supported for proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function.
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P
HD422 50 1080i
Supported External Input Signal Formats and Camcorder Recording Formats
HD/SD
HD
Operation >Format >Rec
Format in the setup menu
Operation >Format
>Frequency in the setup
menu
Supported external input signal
formats
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
XAVC-I 1280×720P
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
SP 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
SD
MPEG IMX 50
DVCAM
142
000
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Maintenance
Cleaning the Viewfinder
Note about the Battery Terminals
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and
mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a
commercially available lens cleaner.
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly
if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they become
corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for
more information about inspections.
[Note]
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.
Exchanging the Battery of the
Internal Clock
The camcorder’s internal clock is powered by a
lithium battery. If the message “BackUp Battery
End” appears in the viewfinder, this battery
must be exchanged. Contact a Sony service
representative.
000
143
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Error/Warning System
If a warning, caution, or operating condition that requires confirmation occurs on the camcorder, a message is displayed in the viewfinder, the corresponding indicators start flashing, and a warning sound is emitted.
You can adjust the volume of the warning sound using the ALARM knob. If the ALARM knob is set to minimum, the warning sound will not be audible.
Error Display
The camcorder will stop operation when the following kind of display occurs.
Error message
Warning sound
WARNING
indicator
Tally/REC indicator
Cause and Solution
E + error code
Continuous
–
High-speed flashing
Indicates an abnormality in the camcorder.
Turn off the camcorder, and check for any problem with connected devices, cables, or media.
(If the camcorder does not turn off when the POWER switch is set to OFF, remove the battery or disconnect the AC supply.)
If the error persists when the camcorder is turned on again, contact your Sony service representative.
Warning Display
Follow the instructions provided if the following display occurs.
Warning message
Warning sound
WARNING
indicator
Tally/REC indicator
Cause and Solution
Media Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The remaining capacity on the SxS memory card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
Media Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
Clips could not be recorded, copied, or split because there is no remaining capacity on the SxS memory card.
Replace immediately.
Battery Near End
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The remaining capacity of the battery pack is getting low.
Recharge at the earliest convenience.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
Battery End
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
The battery pack is dead.
Recording is disabled.
Connect a power source to DC IN and allow the battery pack to recharge without attempting to operate the camcorder.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
Temperature High
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The internal temperature is high.
Turn off the camcorder and allow it to cool down before operating it again.
Voltage Low
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The DC IN voltage is low (level 1).
Check the power source.
Insufficient Voltage
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
The DC IN voltage is too low (level 2).
Recording is disabled.
Connect a different power source.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
000
144
10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System
Warning message
Warning sound
WARNING
indicator
Tally/REC indicator
Cause and Solution
Clips Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on an SxS memory card has been reached. Recording or copying more
clips is not possible. Replace immediately.
Last Clip Recording
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The clip currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been reached.
Prepare a new SxS memory card.
Clips Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the SxS memory card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
Media(Proxy) Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
Proxy data cannot be recorded because there is no remaining free space on the proxy data SD card. Replace immediately.
Clips(Proxy) Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card has been reached. Recording more clips is not
possible. Replace immediately.
Media(Proxy) Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The remaining free space on the proxy data SD card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
Last Clip(Proxy) Rec
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The proxy data currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been reached.
Prepare a new proxy data SD card.
Clips(Proxy) Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card is getting low. Replace at the earliest
convenience.
Media(A)1) Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
When using the 2-slot Simul Rec function
Media(A)1) Clips Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
When using the 2-slot Simul Rec function
Media(A)1) Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
When using the 2-slot Simul Rec function
Media(A) Last Clip Rec
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
When using the 2-slot Simul Rec function
1)
1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B.
000
145
10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System
Caution and Operation Confirmation Display
The following caution and operation messages may appear in the center of the screen. Follow the
instructions provided to resolve the issue.
Display indication
Cause and Solution
Battery Error
Please Change Battery
An error was detected in the battery pack.
Replace with a normal battery pack.
Backup Battery End
Please Change
The remaining capacity of the backup battery is insufficient.
Replace the backup battery.
Unknown Media(A)1)
Please Change
• A memory card that has been partitioned or a memory card
containing more clips that can be handled by the camcorder
was inserted.
• An SxS card was inserted when the file system is set to FAT.
• An SDHC card was inserted when the file system is set to
exFAT or UDF.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be
replaced.
Media Error
Media(A)1) Needs to be Restored
An error occurred on the memory card, and the card must be
restored.
Eject and then re-insert the card, then repair the card.
Media Error
Cannot Record to Media(A)1)
The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used
for recording.
Playback may be possible, so making a copy and replacing the
memory card is recommended.
Media Error
Cannot Use Media(A)1)
The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used
for recording or playback.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be
replaced.
Cannot Use Media(A)1)
Unsupported File System
A card using a different file system or an unformatted card was
inserted.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be
replaced or formatted using the camcorder.
Media(A)1) Error
Playback Halted
Cannot continue playback because an error occurred while
reading from the memory card.
If the problem persists, make a copy and replace the memory
card.
Media(A)1) Error
Recording is stopped because an error occurred on the memory
card.
If the problem persists, replace the memory card.
Display indication
Cause and Solution
Different Media is Inserted
Cannot Use Media(A)1)
Different media was inserted. Eject the inserted card, and insert a
card of the same type as the previously inserted card.
1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B.
146
000
11. Appendix
Messages Displayed During Operation
This section describes the meaning of messages that may be displayed in response to button, switch, or knob operation.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Covers only the messages displayed about possible causes in response to an operation.
ˎˎ Messages displayed when an operation is attempted while a menu item cannot be selected (grayed out) are not described.
Operation
Message
Meaning and possible cause
REC button was pressed
Media not exist
Cannot record because there is no recording media in an SxS card slot.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
No Media in Slot(Proxy)
Proxy data recording mode is set to On, but cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is not inserted.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy) Error
Cannot record proxy data because cannot write to the proxy SD card due to a media error.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy): Write Protected
Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is write-protected.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
NG: Preparing
Cannot record proxy data because the proxy data recording circuitry initialization is not completed.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
No Media in Slot(Proxy)
Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is not inserted.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy) Error
Cannot record proxy data because cannot write to the proxy SD card due to a media error.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy): Write Protected
Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is write-protected.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
NG: Preparing
Cannot record proxy data because the proxy data recording circuitry initialization is not completed.
PREV button was pressed
First Clip Top!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip.
F REV button was pressed
First Clip Top!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip.
PREV + F REV buttons were pressed
First Clip Top!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip.
PLAY button was pressed
Last Clip End!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
NEXT button was pressed
Last Clip End!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
F FWD button was pressed
Last Clip End!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
NEXT + F FWD buttons were pressed
Last Clip End!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
Media slot was changed
Cannot Switch Slots
Cannot change slots during playback.
Recording media was removed
Media removed
Media was removing while reading from recording media or while writing to recording media (ACCESS indicator is lit).
GAIN switch was operated
Gain: xxdB
(where “xx” is the gain value)
Gain setting was changed.
Assignable switch assigned with XAVC Proxy
Rec Start was operated
000
147
11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation
Operation
Message
Meaning and possible cause
DCC switch was operated
DCC: On
DCC was set to On.
DCC: Off
DCC was set to Off.
Fixed By Hyper Gamma !
Cannot set DCC to On because Gamma Category is set to HG or User.
White: Preset xxxxK
(where “xxxx” is the color temperature value)
White balance was changed to the preset value.
White: A xxxxK
(where “xxxx” is the color temperature value)
White balance was changed to the memory A value.
White: B xxxxK
(where “xxxx” is the color temperature value)
White balance was changed to the memory B value.
White: ATW xxxxK
(where “xxxx” is the color temperature value)
White balance mode was changed to ATW.
Shutter: 1/xxxx
(where “xxxx” is the shutter value)
Shutter speed was changed (standard, Speed mode settings).
Shutter: xxxx
(where “xxxx” is the shutter value)
Shutter speed was changed (standard, Angle mode settings).
ECS: xxxxHz
(where “xxxx” is the frequency value)
Shutter speed was changed (ECS mode).
ECS: xxxxHz
(where “xxxx” is the frequency value)
Shutter speed was changed (ECS mode).
Iris Override: +x.xx
(where “x.xx” is a numeric value)
Iris override level was changed.
Color Bars
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because a color bar signal is being output.
Test Saw
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because a test signal is being output.
Not Available
Recording
Cannot execute because recording is in progress.
Not Available
Playing back
Cannot execute because playback is in progress.
Not Available
Displaying Thumbnails
Cannot execute because the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Color Bars
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because a color bar signal is being output.
Not Available
Playing back
Cannot execute because playback is in progress.
Not Available
Displaying Thumbnails
Cannot execute because the thumbnail screen is displayed.
White Balance Preset
Cannot execute because the white balance is set to the preset value.
ATW Hold
ATW Hold function was enabled.
ATW Hold Off
ATW Hold function was disabled.
White balance switch was operated
SHUTTER switch was operated
Menu knob was turned
Auto black switch was operated
Auto white switch was operated
Assignable switch assigned with ATW Hold
function was operated
000
148
11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation
Operation
Message
Meaning and possible cause
Assignable switch assigned with Clip
Continuous Rec was operated
Cannot Proceed
Recording
Cannot execute because recording is in progress.
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because a CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected to the CCU.
Cannot Proceed
Recording
Cannot execute because recording is in progress.
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
• Playback is in progress
• Thumbnail screen is displayed
• CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected to the CCU.
Cannot Proceed
Network Client Mode Setting is "On"
Cannot execute because network client mode is enabled.
Cannot Proceed
Network Function is Disabled
Cannot execute because network connection setting is set to Off.
Cannot Proceed
Network Client Mode Setting is "On"
Network Function is Disabled
Network client mode is set to On, but cannot execute because network connection is unavailable.
Cannot Start Streaming
Streaming Disabled Temporarily
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
• Proxy data playback is in progress
• 1280×720 clip playback is in progress with recording format set to 1920×1080
• 1920×1080 clip playback is in progress with recording format set to 1280×720
Cannot Start Streaming
Please stop Recording or Playback
Cannot execute because recording/playback was started while wireless function circuitry was initializing (including
thumbnail display).
Stop recording/playback (including thumbnail display) to enable execution.
Cannot Proceed
Streaming Setting is "On"
Cannot configure because streaming is in progress.
Cannot Connect to CCM
Network Function is Disabled
Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable.
Cannot Record Proxy
Cannot record proxy data, when proxy data recording is started, because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1,
Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Proxy Recording will be Stopped
Proxy data recording will stop because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy
in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Cannot Connect to CCM
Cannot Record Proxy
• Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable.
• Cannot record proxy data, when proxy data recording is started, because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1,
Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Cannot Connect to CCM
Proxy Recording will be Stopped
• Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable.
• Proxy data recording will stop because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with
Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Cannot Connect to CCM
Invalid User Name or Password
Connection Control Manager authentication error occurred.
Cannot Connect to CCM
Invalid Address or Port Number
Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because the Connection Control Manager address or port number settings
is incorrect.
Assignable switch assigned with Picture Cache
Rec was operated
Assignable switch assigned with Streaming was
operated
Assignable switch assigned with Streaming was
operated while network client mode is enabled
000
149
11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation
Operation
Message
Meaning and possible cause
Assignable switch assigned with Auto
Upload(Proxy) was operated
Cannot Proceed
Network Function is Disabled
Cannot execute because proxy data recording circuitry and wireless function circuitry initialization are not completed.
ONLINE button was pressed and held
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because wireless function circuitry is switching mode or power supply is switching off.
Assignable switch assigned with Zebra was
operated or ZEBRA switch on viewfinder was
changed
Zebra: On
Zebra was set to On.
Zebra: Off
Zebra was set to Off.
ZEBRA switch on viewfinder was operated
Zebra: On
Zebra was set to On.
Zebra: Off
Zebra was set to Off.
Assignable switch assigned with Master was
operated
Marker: On
Marker was set to On.
Marker: Off
Marker was set to Off.
Assignable switch assigned with Video Signal
Monitor was operated
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
• Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1 Select and SDI Out2 Select in the setup menu are both set to Off
• Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu is set to 720×480P or 720×576P
OUTPUT switch was moved to the BARS position Not Available
(color bar display)
S&Q Motion: On
ND filter was changed
Cannot execute because S&Q motion recording mode is enabled.
ND filter was changed.
2: 1/4ND xxxxK
(where “2: 1/4ND” is the ND filter type and “xxxx” is
the color temperature value)
ND:3 CC: x xxxxK
(where “ND:3” is the selected ND filter type and
“CC: x xxxx” is the selected CC filter and color
temperature value after electrical color
temperature conversion)
ND filter was changed with ND Filter C.Temp set to Off and Electrical CC assigned to an assignable switch.
Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW Color Temp SW 3200K
3200K was operated
Cannot Proceed
ND Filter C.Temp: On
Color Temp SW 3200K was enabled.
Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW Color Temp SW 4300K
4300K was operated
Cannot Proceed
ND Filter C.Temp: On
Color Temp SW 4300K was enabled.
Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW Color Temp SW 5600K
5600K was operated
Cannot Proceed
ND Filter C.Temp: On
Color Temp SW 5600K was enabled.
Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW Color Temp SW 6300K
6300K was operated
Cannot Proceed
ND Filter C.Temp: On
Color Temp SW 6300K was enabled.
Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
000
150
11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation
Operation
Message
Meaning and possible cause
Assignable switch assigned with Electrical CC
was operated
ND:3 CC: x xxxxK
(where “ND:3” is the selected ND filter type and
“CC: x xxxx” is the selected CC filter and color
temperature value after electrical color
temperature conversion)
Electrical CC filter was changed.
Cannot Proceed
Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
CC 5600K
5600K setting was selected.
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
• ND Filter C.Temp is set to On
• Electrical CC is assigned to an assignable switch, but 5600K is not assigned to Electrical CC.
Assignable switch assigned with CC5600K was
operated
Shot mark 1 was added.
Assignable switch assigned with Shot Mark1 was Shot Mark1
operated
(arbitrary character string when defining planning
metadata)
Cannot Record Essence Mark
Reached Essence Mark Limit
Cannot add because the maximum number of essence marks has been reached.
Cannot Proceed
Cannot add because of the following conditions.
• Cannot write because the media on which to record clips is write-protected
• Picture Cache Rec function is set to On
• Interval Rec recording is in progress
• Media is write-protected
• Target clip is recorded on an SD card
Shot mark 2 was added.
Assignable switch assigned with Shot Mark2 was Shot Mark2
operated
(arbitrary character string when defining planning
metadata)
Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag OK
was operated
Cannot Record Essence Mark
Reached Essence Mark Limit
Cannot add because the maximum number of essence marks has been reached.
Cannot Proceed
Cannot add because of the following conditions.
• Cannot write because the media on which to record clips is write-protected
• Picture Cache Rec function is set to On
• Interval Rec recording is in progress
• Media is write-protected
• Target clip is recorded on an SD card
OK Clip Flag
Clip flag (OK mark) was added.
Delete Clip Flag
Clip flag (OK mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice).
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
• Media is write-protected
• Target clip is recorded on an SD card
000
151
11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation
Operation
Message
Meaning and possible cause
Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag NG
was operated
NG Clip Flag
Clip flag (NG mark) was added.
Delete Clip Flag
Clip flag (NG mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice).
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
• Media is write-protected
• Target clip is recorded on an SD card
KEEP Clip Flag
Clip flag (KEEP mark) was added.
Delete Clip Flag
Clip flag (KEEP mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice).
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
• Media is write-protected
• Target clip is recorded on an SD card
Assignable switch assigned with Flash Band
Reduce was operated
Flash Band Reduce: On
Flash Band Reduce was set to On.
Flash Band Reduce: Off
Flash Band Reduce was set to Off.
SLOT SELECT button was operated
Switched Slot
Recording media to use was changed.
An assignable button assigned with Slow &
Quick Motion was operated in a recording
format that does not support Slow & Quick
Motion.
Cannot Proceed
S&Q Unsupported Rec Format
Slow & Quick Motion cannot be used due to unsupported format.
Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag Keep
was operated
000
152
11. Appendix
Items Saved in User Data
Table legend
Yes: Saved
Yes*: Saved (not cleared using Clear All Preset)
No: Not saved
–: Not saved (temporary setting)
Default: ‌Not saved in Reference file, but saved as default menu preset when File >Reference in the setup
menu is executed.
Item
Input/Output
User Menu
Item
Sub-item
Edit User Menu
File type
Reference
Lens
Output Format
Yes
No
No
No
Source Select
Yes
No
No
No
SDI Out1/3 Output
Yes
No
No
No
SDI Out2/4 Output
Yes
No
No
No
HDMI Output
Yes
No
No
No
4K(QFHD) SDI Out Super
Yes
No
No
No
SDI Out2/4/HDMI Super
Yes
No
No
No
Video Out Super
Yes
No
No
No
Reference
Lens
Down Converter
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Wide ID
Yes
No
No
No
Wide Mode(Ext.)
Yes
No
No
No
Super(VF Display)
Yes
No
No
No
Super(Menu)
Yes
No
No
No
Super(Marker)
Yes
No
No
No
LCD Color
Yes
No
No
No
LCD Marker&Zebra
Yes
No
No
No
Slow & Quick Motion
Yes
No
No
No
Frame Rate
Yes
No
No
No
Clip Continuous Rec
Yes
No
No
No
Picture Cache Rec
Yes
No
No
No
Cache Rec Time
Yes
No
No
No
LCD
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Frequency
Yes*
No
No
No
File System
Yes*
No
No
No
Rec Format
Yes
No
No
No
Aspect Ratio (SD)
Yes
No
No
No
Audio Length (IMX)
Yes
No
No
No
Base Setting
Shooting Mode
Yes
No
No
No
HDR Setting
4K(QFHD) Rec/Out
Yes
No
No
No
HD Rec/Out
Yes
No
No
No
SDR Gain
Yes
No
No
No
4K(QFHD) Color Space
Yes
No
No
No
HD Color Space
Yes
No
No
No
Media(A)
–
–
–
–
Media(B)
–
–
–
–
SD Card(Utility)
–
–
–
–
SD Card(Proxy)
–
–
–
–
Format Media
Scene
Scene
Operation Menu
Format
File type
All
All
Super Impose
Item
Sub-item
Rec Function
XAVC Proxy Rec
Mode
Interval Rec
No
No
No
No
Number of Frames
Yes
No
No
No
Interval Time
Yes
No
No
No
Pre-Lighting
Yes
No
No
No
Simul Rec
Yes
No
No
No
4K & HD (Sub) Rec
Yes
No
No
No
HD (Sub) Playback Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Setting
Yes*
No
No
No
Size
Yes*
No
No
No
Frame Rate
–
–
–
–
Bit Rate
–
–
–
–
Audio Channel
Yes*
No
No
No
000
153
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Sub-item
File type
Item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Assignable Switch <0>
Yes
No
No
No
<1>
Yes
No
No
No
<2>
Yes
No
No
<3>
Yes
No
<4>
Yes
<5>
Lens RET
VF Setting
Marker
Gain Switch
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Iris Override
Yes
No
No
No
Mode
Yes
No
No
No
No
Level
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Speed
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Clip High light
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Detect Window
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Detect Window Indication
No
No
No
No
Online
Yes
No
No
No
Iris APL Ratio
Yes
No
No
No
Zoom Speed
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Var Width
Yes
No
No
No
Color
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Var Height
Yes
No
No
No
Color Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Var H Position
Yes
No
No
No
Peaking Type
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Var V Position
Yes
No
No
No
Peaking Frequency
Yes
No
No
No
Zebra Select
Yes
No
No
No
Peaking Color
Yes
No
No
No
Zebra1 Level
Yes
No
No
No
VF Detail Level
Yes
No
No
No
Zebra1 Aperture Level
Yes
No
No
No
Setting
Yes
No
No
No
Zebra2 Level
Yes
No
No
No
Color
Yes
No
No
No
Center Marker
Yes
No
No
No
Safety Zone
Yes
No
No
No
Safety Area
Yes
No
No
No
Aspect Marker
Yes
No
No
No
Aspect Select
Yes
No
No
No
Aspect Mask
Yes
No
No
No
Aspect Safety Zone
Yes
No
No
No
Aspect Safety Area
Yes
No
No
No
100% Marker
Yes
No
No
No
User Box
Yes
No
No
No
User Box Width
Yes
No
No
No
User Box Height
Yes
No
No
No
User Box H Position
Yes
No
No
No
User Box V Position
Yes
No
No
No
Gain<L>
Yes
No
No
No
Gain<M>
Yes
No
No
No
Gain<H>
Yes
No
No
No
Gain <Turbo>
Yes
No
No
No
Shockless Gain
Yes
No
No
No
Auto Iris
Zebra
000
154
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Display On/Off
Sub-item
File type
Item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
“!” LED
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Video Level Warning
Yes
No
No
No
Gain <!>
Yes
No
No
No
Shutter Setting
Yes
No
No
No
Shutter <!>
Yes
No
No
No
ND Filter Position
Yes
No
No
No
White Preset <!>
Yes
No
No
No
Gain Setting
Yes
No
No
No
ATW Run <!>
Yes
No
No
No
Rec/Play Status
Yes
No
No
No
Extender <!>
Yes
No
No
No
Color Temp.
Yes
No
No
No
Filter <!>
Yes
No
No
No
Frame Rate/Interval
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Override <!>
Yes
No
No
No
Battery Remain
Yes
No
No
No
White Switch<B>
Yes
No
No
No
Timecode
Yes
No
No
No
Shockless White
Yes
No
No
No
Audio Level Meter
Yes
No
No
No
ATW Speed
Yes
No
No
No
Media Status
Yes
No
No
No
ATW Mode
Yes
No
No
No
SD Card(Utility)
Yes
No
No
No
AWB Fixed Area
Yes
No
No
No
Focus Position
Yes
No
No
No
Filter White Memory
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Position
Yes
No
No
No
Offset White<A>
Yes
No
No
No
Zoom Position
Yes
No
No
No
Warm Cool <A>
Yes
No
No
No
Extender
Yes
No
No
No
Warm Cool Balance<A>
Yes
No
No
No
ALAC
Yes
No
No
No
Offset White <B>
Yes
No
No
No
AE Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Warm Cool <B>
Yes
No
No
No
Focus Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Warm Cool Balance<B>
Yes
No
No
No
White Balance Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Shutter
Mode
Yes
Yes
No
No
CC5600K
Yes
No
No
No
Slow Shutter
Setting
Yes
Yes
No
No
Rec Format
Yes
No
No
No
Number of Frames
Yes
Yes
No
No
Gamma
Yes
No
No
No
Time Zone
Time Zone
Yes
No
No
No
Timecode Lock
Yes
No
No
No
Clip
Clip Naming
Yes
No
No
No
Network Condition
Yes
No
No
No
Title Prefix
Yes
No
No
No
Proxy Status
Yes
No
No
No
Number Set
No
No
No
No
NW Client Mode Status
Yes
No
No
No
–
Streaming Status
Yes
No
No
No
GPS
Yes
No
No
No
Video Signal Monitor
Yes
No
No
No
Clip Name
Yes
No
No
No
Focus Assist Indicator
Yes
No
No
Focus Area Marker
Yes
No
No
Lens Info
Yes
No
WRR RF Level
Yes
Clip Number
Yes
White Setting
Offset White
Update Media
Media(A)
–
–
–
Media(B)
–
–
–
–
GPS
GPS
Yes
No
No
No
Planning
Metadata
Load from Media(A)
–
–
–
–
Load from Media(B)
–
–
–
–
No
Properties
–
–
–
–
No
Clear Memory
–
–
–
–
No
No
Clip Name Disp
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Sort by
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
000
155
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Sub-item
File type
All
USB
Flash Band
Reduce
Item
Scene
Reference
Lens
Scene
Reference
Lens
No
Select Folder
–
–
–
–
Color Temp <A>
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
Color Temp Balance <A>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Rename Folder
–
–
–
–
R Gain <A>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Error Check
Yes
No
No
No
B Gain <A>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Format USB
–
–
–
–
Color Temp <B>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Copy to USB
–
–
–
–
Color Temp Balance <B>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Media Remain
–
–
–
–
R Gain <B>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
No
No
No
No
B Gain <B>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Master Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
R Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
B Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Master Flare
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
R Flare
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
G Flare
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
B Flare
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Black
Flare
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Gamma
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Black Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Matrix
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
White Clip
No
Yes
No
No
Detail(QFHD)
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Detail(HD)
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Detail(SD)
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Aperture
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Flare
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Test Saw
Yes
No
No
No
HDR Paint Setting HLG Look
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
HDR Black Offset
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
HDR Knee
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
HDR Knee Point
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
HDR Knee Slope
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
HDR Black Compression
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Switch Status
File type
All
View Clip List
Paint Menu
Item
White
Sub-item
Gamma(HDR)
Gamma Select
No
No
No
Gamma
Setting
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Step Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Master Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
R Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
G Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
B Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Gamma Category
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Gamma Select
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Range
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Master Black Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Point
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Slope
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Saturation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Saturation Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
No
Yes
No
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Black Gamma
Knee
White Clip
000
156
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Detail(QFHD)
Detail(HD)
Sub-item
File type
Item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Setting
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
H/V Ratio
Yes
Yes
Yes
Crispening
Yes
Yes
Yes
Level Depend
Yes
Yes
Level Depend Level
Yes
Frequency
Yes
Knee Aperture
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Setting
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
H/V Ratio
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Crispening
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Level Depend
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Level Depend Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Aperture
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Aperture Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Aperture Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
White Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
White Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Black Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Black Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V Black Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V Black Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V Detail Creation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V Detail Creation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Cross Color Suppress
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Default
No
H/V Ratio
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Crispening
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Level Depend
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Area Detection
–
–
–
–
Level Depend Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Area Indication
No
No
No
No
Frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Aperture
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Saturation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Aperture Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Hue
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Width
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
White Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Black Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V Black Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V Detail Creation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Detail(SD)
Aperture
Skin Detail
Lens
000
157
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Matrix
Multi Matrix
V Modulation
Low Key
Saturation
Saturation Mode
Sub-item
File type
Item
Sub-item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Adaptive Matrix
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Level
Tracing Matrix
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Preset Matrix
Yes
Yes
Yes
Preset Select
Yes
Yes
User Matrix
Yes
Level
Yes
Phase
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Gain Link
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
–9dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
–6dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
–3dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
3dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix R-G
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
6dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix R-B
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
9dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix G-R
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
12dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix G-B
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
18dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix B-R
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
24dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix B-G
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
30dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
36dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Area Indication
No
No
No
No
42dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Color Detection
–
–
–
–
Reset
–
–
–
–
Axis
No
No
No
No
Hue
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Saturation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
No
Default
No
Master V Modulation
Yes
Yes
Default
No
R V Modulation
Yes
Yes
Default
No
G V Modulation
Yes
Yes
Default
No
B V Modulation
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Range
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Saturation Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Saturation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Black Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Low Key Saturation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Noise Suppression Setting
Thumbnail Menu
Item
Sub-item
File type
Display Clip
Properties
–
–
–
–
–
Set Index Picture
–
–
–
–
–
Thumbnail View
Essence Mark Thumbnail
–
–
–
–
Clip Thumbnail
–
–
–
–
Add Shot Mark1
–
–
–
–
Delete Shot Mark1
–
–
–
–
Add Shot Mark2
–
–
–
–
Delete Shot Mark2
–
–
–
–
Add OK
–
–
–
–
Add NG
–
–
–
–
Add KEEP
–
–
–
–
Delete Clip Flag
–
–
–
–
Set Shot Mark
Set Clip Flag
000
158
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Sub-item
File type
All
Lock/Unlock Clip
Item
Scene
Reference
Lens
Select Clip
–
–
–
–
Lock All Clips
–
–
–
–
Unlock All Clips
–
–
–
–
Select Clip
–
–
–
–
All Clips
–
–
–
Copy Sub Clip
All Clips
–
–
Delete Clip
Select Clip
–
–
All Clips
–
Select Clip
All Clips
Copy Clip
Transfer Clip
Sub-item
File type
All
Black Shading
Scene
Reference
Lens
Black Saw/Para
Yes
No
Default
No
Master Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Master Gain (TMP)
–
–
–
–
Near End:Info Battery
Yes
No
No
No
–
End:Info Battery
Yes
No
No
No
–
–
Near End:Sony Battery
Yes
No
No
No
–
–
End:Sony Battery
Yes
No
No
No
–
–
–
Near End:Other Battery
Yes
No
No
No
–
–
–
–
End:Other Battery
Yes
No
No
No
–
–
–
–
Detected Battery
–
–
–
–
Battery
Transfer
Clip(Proxy)
Select Clip
–
–
–
–
DC Voltage Alarm DC Low Voltage1
Yes
No
No
No
All Clips
–
–
–
–
DC Low Voltage2
Yes
No
No
No
Filter Clips
OK
–
–
–
–
Front MIC Select
Yes
No
No
No
NG
–
–
–
–
Rear XLR Auto
Yes
No
No
No
KEEP
–
–
–
–
Front MIC CH1 Ref
Yes
No
No
No
None
–
–
–
–
Front MIC CH2 Ref
Yes
No
No
No
Thumbnail Caption
Yes
Yes
No
No
Rear MIC CH1 Ref
Yes
No
No
No
Rear MIC CH2 Ref
Yes
No
No
No
Line Input Ref
Yes
No
No
No
Min Alarm Volume
Yes
No
No
No
Speaker Attenuate
Yes
No
No
No
Headphone Out
Yes
No
No
No
Reference Level
Yes
No
No
No
Reference Out
Yes
No
No
No
CH1&2 AGC Mode
Yes
No
No
No
CH3&4 AGC Mode
Yes
No
No
No
AGC Spec
Yes
No
No
No
Limiter Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Output Limiter
Yes
No
No
No
CH1 Wind Filter
Yes
No
No
No
CH2 Wind Filter
Yes
No
No
No
CH3 Wind Filter
Yes
No
No
No
CH4 Wind Filter
Yes
No
No
No
1kHz Tone on Color Bars
Yes
No
No
No
MIC CH1 Level
Yes
No
No
No
MIC CH2 Level
Yes
No
No
No
Customize View
Maintenance Menu
Item
White Shading
Black Shading
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Channel Select
Yes
No
Default
No
White H Saw
No
No
No
No
White H Para
No
No
No
No
White V Saw
No
No
No
No
White V Para
No
No
No
No
White Saw/Para
Yes
No
Default
No
Channel Select
Yes
No
Default
No
Black H Saw
No
No
No
No
Black H Para
No
No
No
No
Black V Saw
No
No
No
No
Black V Para
No
No
No
No
Audio
000
159
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Sub-item
File type
Item
Reference
Lens
ND Filter C.Temp
Yes
No
No
No
ND FLT C.Temp<1>
Yes
No
No
No
No
ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Electrical CC<A>
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Electrical CC<B>
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Electrical CC<C>
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Electrical CC<D>
Yes
No
No
No
–
–
–
–
DCC Function Select
Yes
No
No
No
TX Audio Peak
–
–
–
–
DCC D Range
Yes
No
No
No
TX Input Level
–
–
–
–
DCC Point
Yes
No
No
No
TX ATT Level
–
–
–
–
DCC Gain
Yes
No
No
No
TX LCF Frequency
–
–
–
–
DCC Delay Time
Yes
No
No
No
TX System Delay
Yes
No
No
No
DCC Peak Filter
Yes
No
No
No
TX RF Power
–
–
–
–
Mode
Yes
No
No
No
TX Power Save
–
–
–
–
Frequency
Yes
No
No
No
TX-Cam Power Sync
Yes
No
No
No
Genlock
Yes
No
No
No
TC Out
Yes
No
No
No
Reference
–
–
–
–
DF/NDF
Yes
No
No
No
Auto Black Shading
–
–
–
–
LTC UBIT
Yes
No
No
No
Reset Black Shading
–
–
–
–
Counter Display
Yes
No
No
No
Master Gain (TMP)
–
–
–
–
Essence Mark
Find Mode
Yes
No
No
No
APR
–
–
–
–
Camera Config
HD SDI Remote I/F
Yes
No
No
No
Color Bars Select
Yes
No
No
No
User Menu Only
Yes
No
No
No
User Menu with Lock
No
No
No
No
RM Common Memory
Yes
No
No
No
Timecode
Reference
Lens
Rear1/WRR Level
Yes
No
No
No
Rear2/WRR Level
Yes
No
No
No
Audio CH3 Level
Yes
No
No
Audio CH4 Level
Yes
No
WRR Valid CH Sel
Yes
WRR CH Select
WRR Delay Comp
TX
File type
Scene
WRR Setting
Scene
Sub-item
All
Audio
All
RM Rec Start
Detail Control(RM/RCP)
Preset White
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
White Filter
DCC Adjust
Flicker Reduce
Genlock
Auto Shading
APR
Reset
–
–
–
–
Setup for Mobile
App
Setup
–
–
–
–
Access
Authentication
User Name
No
No
No
No
Password
No
No
No
No
No
Generate Password
–
–
–
–
No
Show Settings
–
–
–
–
Setting
Yes*
No
No
No
Network
SET Key on Thumbnail
Yes
No
No
No
ALAC
Yes
No
No
No
Wi-Fi Mode
Yes*
No
No
No
HD Modulation
Yes
No
No
No
NFC
–
–
–
–
No
WPS
–
–
–
–
Yes*
No
No
No
–
–
–
–
Color Temp <P>
Yes
No
No
Color Temp Balance <P>
Yes
No
No
No
Channel
R Gain <P>
Yes
No
No
No
SSID & Password
B Gain <P>
Yes
No
No
No
SSID
–
–
–
–
AWB Enable <P>
No
No
No
No
Wi-Fi Station Remote
Yes*
No
No
No
000
160
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Sub-item
File type
All
Network
Wi-Fi
Station
Detail
Settings
Scene
Item
Reference
Sub-item
File type
Lens
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Setting
Yes*
No
No
No
Yes*
No
No
No
Scan Networks
–
–
–
–
SSID
No
No
No
No
Password
No
No
No
No
Preset
Select
DHCP
Yes*
No
No
No
Preset 1
Display Name
Yes*
No
No
No
IP Address
Yes*
No
No
No
CCM Address
Yes*
No
No
No
No
CCM Port
Yes*
No
No
No
No
User Name
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Yes*
Yes*
No
No
No
No
Network Client
Mode
DNS Auto
Yes*
No
No
No
Password
Primary DNS
Server
Yes*
No
No
No
NCM with Proxy
Yes*
No
No
No
Camera Control
Yes*
No
No
No
Secondary DNS
Server
Yes*
Camera Setting
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Preset 2
Same as Preset 1
Preset 3
Same as Preset 1
Device Name (Wi-Fi)
–
–
–
–
IP Address (Wi-Fi)
–
–
–
–
File Transfer
–
–
–
–
Subnet Mask (Wi-Fi)
–
–
–
–
Remote File Transfer
Yes*
No
No
No
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
–
–
–
–
Auto Upload (Proxy)
Yes*
No
No
No
Regenerate Password
–
–
–
–
Default Upload Server
Yes*
No
No
No
Modem
Yes*
No
No
No
Clear Completed Jobs
–
–
–
–
Modem Remote
–
–
–
–
Clear All Jobs
–
–
–
–
Public Key Creation
–
–
–
–
View Job List
–
–
–
–
Public Key Clear
–
–
–
–
Setting
No
No
No
No
File Transfer
Streaming
Create Key Date
–
–
–
–
Preset Select
Yes*
No
No
No
Wired LAN
Yes*
No
No
No
Preset1
Size
Yes*
No
No
No
Wired LAN Remote
Yes*
No
No
No
Bit Rate
Yes*
No
No
No
DHCP
Yes*
No
No
No
Type
Yes*
No
No
No
IP Address
Yes*
No
No
No
Yes*
No
No
No
Subnet Mask
Yes*
No
No
No
Destination
Address
Gateway
Yes*
No
No
No
Destination Port
Yes*
No
No
No
DNS Auto
Yes*
No
No
No
Preset2
Primary DNS
Server
Yes*
No
No
No
Preset3
Secondary DNS
Server
Yes*
Wired
LAN
Detail
Settings
No
No
No
Clock Set
Language
Same as Preset1
Same as Preset1
Audio Channel
Yes*
No
No
No
Date Mode
Yes
No
No
No
12H/24H
Yes
No
No
No
Date
–
–
–
–
Time
–
–
–
–
Select
Yes
No
No
No
000
161
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Sub-item
File type
All
Hours Meter
Item
Scene
Reference
Lens
All File
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
–
Hours (System)
–
–
–
–
Load SD Card
–
–
–
Hours (Reset)
–
–
–
–
Save SD Card
–
–
–
–
Reset
–
–
–
–
File ID
Yes
No
No
No
Network Reset
Reset
–
–
–
–
All Preset
–
–
–
–
Fan Control
Setting
Yes
No
No
No
Store All Preset
–
–
–
–
VF Display Setting Chara/Marker Brightness
Yes
No
No
No
Clear All Preset
–
–
–
–
Option
Type 1
–
–
–
–
3Sec Clear Preset
No
No
No
No
Type 2
–
–
–
–
Recall Internal Memory
–
–
–
–
Type 3
–
–
–
–
Store Internal Memory
–
–
–
–
Install Option
–
–
–
–
Load SD Card
–
–
–
–
Remove Option
–
–
–
–
Save SD Card
–
–
–
–
Number
–
–
–
–
File ID
No
Yes
No
No
Scene White Data
Yes
No
No
No
Store Reference
–
–
–
–
Clear Reference
–
–
–
–
Load Reference(SD Card)
–
–
–
–
Version
Version Up
–
–
–
–
Net-Func Version Number
–
–
–
–
Net-Func Ver.Up
–
–
–
–
File Menu
Item
User File
Sub-item
Load SD Card
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
–
–
–
–
Save SD Card
–
–
–
–
File ID
No
No
No
No
Recall User Preset
–
–
–
–
Store User Preset
–
–
–
–
Clear User Preset
–
–
–
–
Load Customize Data
Yes
No
No
No
Load White Data
Yes
No
No
No
Scene File
Reference File
Save Reference(SD Card)
–
–
–
–
File ID
No
No
Yes
No
000
162
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Lens File
User Gamma
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Display Mode
No
No
No
No
Recall Internal Memory
–
–
–
–
Store Internal Memory
–
–
–
–
Load SD Card
–
–
–
–
Save SD Card
–
–
–
–
File ID
No
No
No
Yes
File Source
–
–
–
–
Clear Lens Offset
–
–
–
–
Lens Auto Recall
Yes
No
No
No
Lens Serial Number
–
–
–
–
Lens Name
–
–
–
–
Lens Manufacturer
–
–
–
–
Master V Modulation
No
No
No
Yes
Lens Center H
No
No
No
Yes
Lens Center V
No
No
No
Yes
R Flare
No
No
No
Yes
G Flare
No
No
No
Yes
B Flare
No
No
No
Yes
White Offset R
No
No
No
Yes
White Offset B
No
No
No
Yes
Shading Ch Select
Yes
No
No
No
Shading H SAW
No
No
No
Yes
Shading H PARA
No
No
No
Yes
Shading V SAW
No
No
No
Yes
Shading V PARA
No
No
No
Yes
Current Settings
–
–
–
–
Load SD Card
–
–
–
–
Reset
–
–
–
–
000
163
11. Appendix
Special Recording Support by Recording Format
Special recording 1)
Format
QFHD
XAVC-I QFHD
Normal recording
exFAT
XAVC-L QFHD
HD
XAVC-I HD
exFAT
XAVC-L 50
Interval Rec
Slow & Quick
Motion
Clip Continuous
Rec
2-slot Simul Rec
1-slot Simul Rec
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes 2)
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
XAVC-L 35
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
XAVC-L 25
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
MPEG HD422
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
MPEG HD420 HQ
UDF
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
exFAT
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
UDF
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
FAT
MPEG HD420 SP
SD
1-Slot Simul Rec +
Picture Cache Rec
Picture Cache Rec
MPEG IMX 50
DVCAM
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
exFAT
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
UDF
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
exFAT
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UDF
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1) For details about supported image size, frame rate, and functions, see “Advanced Operations” (page 49).
Only one special recording function can be used at any one time.
2) The format of subclips recorded simultaneously is MPEG HD422.
000
164
11. Appendix
Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings
Operation >Format in the setup menu
Frequency
Rec Format
59.94
50
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
29.97
25
23.98
Cache Rec Time
0–2 sec
2–4 sec
4–6 sec
6–8 sec
8–10 sec
10–12 sec
12–14 sec
13–15 sec
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
XAVC-I 1280×720P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
XAVC-L 50/35/25
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MPEG HD422
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MPEG HD420 HQ/SP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MPEG IMX50
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DVCAM
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 50/35
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MPEG HD422
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MPEG HD420 HQ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
000
165
11. Appendix
Media Recording and Playback Time
[Note]
The recording and playback times are for a continuous recording as a single clip. The actual times may be shorter, depending on the number of clips recorded.
Format
Recording/playback time
No. of pixels/Frame rate
Maximum bit rate
SBP-240F
SBS-128G1C
3840×2160 / 59.94P
600 Mbps
Approx. 45 minutes
–
3840×2160 / 50P
500 Mbps
Approx. 53 minutes
–
3840×2160 / 29.97P
300 Mbps
Approx. 88 minutes
–
3840×2160 / 25P
250 Mbps
Approx. 105 minutes
–
3840×2160 / 23.98P
240 Mbps
Approx. 110 minutes
–
1920×1080 / 59.94P, 50P
222 Mbps
Approx. 115 minutes
Approx. 57 minutes
1920×1080 / 29.97P, 25P, 59.94i, 50i
111 Mbps
Approx. 220 minutes
Approx. 105 minutes
1920×1080 / 23.98P
89 Mbps
Approx. 270 minutes
Approx. 135 minutes
1280×720 / 59.94P, 50P
112 Mbps
Approx. 215 minutes
Approx. 105 minutes
3840×2160 / 59.94P, 50P
150 Mbps
Approx. 175 minutes
Approx. 86 minutes
3840×2160 / 29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
100 Mbps
Approx. 255 minutes
Approx. 125 minutes
XAVC-L 50
–
50 Mbps
Approx. 470 minutes
Approx. 230 minutes
XAVC-L 35
–
35 Mbps
Approx. 635 minutes
Approx. 315 minutes
XAVC-L 25
–
25 Mbps
Approx. 850 minutes
Approx. 420 minutes
MPEG HD422
–
50 Mbps
Approx. 445 minutes
Approx. 220 minutes
MPEG HD420 HQ
–
35 Mbps
Approx. 685 minutes
Approx. 340 minutes
MPEG IMX
–
–
50 Mbps
Approx. 430 minutes
Approx. 215 minutes
DVCAM
–
–
25 Mbps
Approx. 820 minutes
Approx. 405 minutes
XAVC Intra
XAVC-I QFHD
XAVC-I HD
XAVC Long
MPEG-2 Long GOP
XAVC-L QFHD
000
166
11. Appendix
Usage Precautions
The fan and battery are consumable parts that will
need periodic replacement.
When operating at room temperature, a
normal replacement cycle will be about 5 years.
However, this replacement cycle represents only
a general guideline and does not imply that the
life expectancy of these parts is guaranteed. For
details on parts replacement, contact your dealer.
ˎˎIf sending the camcorder by truck, ship, air,
or other transportation service, pack it in the
shipping carton of the camcorder.
Care of the camcorder
ˎˎLocations subject to violent vibration
ˎˎNear strong magnetic fields
ˎˎClose to radio or TV transmitters producing
strong electromagnetic fields.
ˎˎIn direct sunlight or close to heaters for
extended periods
Viewfinder
To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable
communications devices
About the LCD panels
The life expectancy of the AC adaptor and the
electrolytic capacitor is about 5 years under
normal operating temperatures and normal usage
(8 hours per day; 25 days per month).
If usage exceeds the above normal usage
frequency, the life expectancy may be reduced
correspondingly.
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the
lenses or optical filters using a blower.
Do not attempt to clean the interior of the camera
using a blower. Any dust particles in the air that
enter components may cause a malfunction.
If the body of the camcorder is dirty, clean it with
a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth
moistened in a little neutral detergent, then wipe
dry. Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or
thinners, as these may cause discoloration or other
damage to the finish of the camcorder.
Use and storage
In the event of operating problems
Note on laser beams
Do not place this product close to medical devices
Laser beams may damage the CMOS image
sensor. If you shoot a scene that includes a laser
beam, be careful not to expose the CMOS image
sensor to the laser beam or any reflected light and
scattered light from the laser beam.
Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks
ˎˎThe internal mechanism may be damaged or
the body warped.
ˎˎIf an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe
is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe
may be damaged. In such a case, stop using
it and contact your dealer or a Sony service
representative.
Do not cover the camcorder while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the camcorder
can cause excessive internal heat build-up.
After use
Always turn off the POWER switch.
Before storing the camcorder for a long period
Remove the battery pack.
Shipping
ˎˎRemove the media before transporting the
camcorder.
If you should experience problems with the
camcorder, contact a Sony service representative.
This product (including accessories) has
magnet(s) which may interfere with pacemakers,
programmable shunt valves for hydrocephalus
treatment, or other medical devices. Do not
place this product close to persons who use such
medical devices.
Consult your doctor before using this product if
you use any such medical device.
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place.
Avoid using or storing the camcorder in the
following places.
ˎˎIn excessive heat or cold (operating temperature
range: 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F))
Remember that in summer in warm climates
the temperature inside a car with the windows
closed can easily exceed 50 °C (122 °F).
ˎˎIn damp or dusty locations
ˎˎLocations where the camcorder may be
exposed to rain
The use of portable telephones and other
communications devices near this camcorder can
result in malfunction and interference with audio
and video signals.
It is recommended that the portable
communications devices near this camcorder be
powered off.
Condensation
If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm
location, or if ambient temperature suddenly
rises, moisture may form on the outer surface of
the unit and/or inside of the unit. This is known
as condensation. If condensation occurs, turn off
the unit and wait until the condensation clears
before operating the unit. Operating the unit while
condensation is present may damage the unit.
Fitting the zoom lens
It is important to fit the lens correctly, as otherwise
damage may result. Be sure to refer to the section
“Mounting and Adjusting the Lens” (page 26).
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece
lens pointing directly at the sun.
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays
and melt the interior of the viewfinder.
The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured
with high precision technology, giving a
functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a
very small proportion of pixels may be “stuck”,
either always off (black), always on (red, green, or
blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long period
of use, because of the physical characteristics of
the liquid crystal display, such “stuck” pixels may
appear spontaneously. These problems are not a
malfunction. Note that any such problems have no
effect on recorded data.
Phenomena specific to CMOS image sensors
The following phenomena that may appear in
images are specific to CMOS (Complementary
Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors. They
do not indicate malfunctions.
White flecks
Although the CMOS image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc. This is related
to the principle of image sensors and is not a
malfunction.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the
following cases:
ˎˎWhen operating at a high environmental
temperature
ˎˎWhen you have raised the master gain
(sensitivity)
ˎˎWhen operating in Slow-Shutter mode
The problem may be alleviated by executing
automatic black balance adjustment.
000
167
11. Appendix: Usage Precautions
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.
Flicker
If recording is made under lighting produced
by discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium,
or mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker,
colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear
distorted.
In such cases, set the flicker-reduction function to
auto mode (page 114).
If the frame rate selected for recording is close
to the power-supply frequency, flicker may not
be reduced sufficiently even if you activate the
Flicker-Reduction function. In such cases, use the
electronic shutter.
Focal plane
Owing to the characteristics of the pickup
elements (CMOS image sensors) for reading video
signals, subjects that quickly move across the
screen may appear slightly skewed.
Flashband
The luminance at the top and bottom of the
screen may change when shooting a flashlight
beam or a light source that quickly flashes.
You can use the supplied application software to
correct clips that contain frames with flash bands.
Fragmentation
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced
properly, try formatting the recording media.
While repeating picture recording/playback with
a certain recording media for an extended period,
files in the media may be fragmented, disabling
proper recording/storage. In such a case, make
a backup of clips in the media then perform
formatting of the media using Operation >Format
Media (page 96) in the setup menu.
Notes on security
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND RESULTING FROM A FAILURE TO
IMPLEMENT PROPER SECURITY MEASURES
ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE
DATA LEAKS RESULTING FROM TRANSMISSION
SPECIFICATIONS, OR SECURITY PROBLEMS OF
ANY KIND.
ˎˎDepending on the operating environment,
unauthorized third parties on the network may
be able to access the unit. When connecting the
unit to the network, be sure to confirm that the
network is protected securely.
ˎˎCommunication content may be unknowingly
intercepted by unauthorized third parties in the
vicinity of the signals. When using wireless LAN
communication, implement security measures
properly to protect the communication content.
ˎˎFrom a safety standpoint, when using the unit
connected with the network, it is strongly
recommended to access the Control window
via a Web browser and change the access
limitation settings from the factory preset values
(page 75).
Changing the password regularly is also
recommended.
ˎˎDo not browse any other website in the Web
browser while making settings or after making
settings.
Since the login status remains in the Web
browser, close the Web browser when you
complete the settings to prevent unauthorized
third parties from using the unit or harmful
programs from running.
About GPS
The GPS (Global Positioning System) is a system
that calculates geographical location from highly
accurate US space satellites. This system allows
you to pinpoint your exact location on the earth.
The GPS satellites are located in 6 orbits, 20,000 km
above the earth. The GPS system consists of 24 or
more GPS satellites.
A GPS receiver receives radio signals from the
satellites, and calculates the current location of the
receiver based on the orbital information (almanac
data) and travel time of the signals, etc.
Determining a location is called “triangulating.” A
GPS receiver can determine the location’s latitude
and longitude by receiving signals from 3 or more
satellites.
ˎˎAs the positions of GPS satellites vary constantly,
it may take longer to determine the location or
the receiver may not be able to determine the
location at all, depending on the location and
time you use the camcorder.
ˎˎ“GPS” is a system for determining geographic
location by triangulating radio signals from
GPS satellites. Avoid using the camcorder
in places where radio signals are blocked or
reflected, such as a shadowy place surrounded
by buildings or trees, etc. Use the camcorder in
open sky environments.
ˎˎYou may not be able to record location
information at locations or in situations where
radio signals from the GPS satellites do not
reach the camcorder as follows.
–– In tunnels, indoors or under the shade of
buildings.
–– Between tall buildings or at narrow streets
surrounded by buildings.
–– In underground locations, locations
surrounded by dense trees, under an
elevated bridge, or in locations where
magnetic fields are generated, such as near
high voltage cables.
–– Near devices that generate radio signals of
the same frequency band as the camcorder:
near 1.5 GHz band mobile telephones, etc.
ˎˎIf you upload and share the images which are
recorded when the setting “GPS” is ”On,” the
record location may be exposed on the Internet
even if you do not intend to do so. If you do not
want to record location information, select “Off”
for “GPS” (page 102).
On triangulating errors
ˎˎIf you move to another location right after
setting “GPS” to “On” in the menu, it may
take a longer time for the camcorder to start
triangulating, compared to when you stay in the
same place.
ˎˎError caused by the position of GPS satellites
The camcorder automatically triangulates your
current location when the camcorder receives
radio signals from 3 or more GPS satellites.
The triangulating error allowed by the GPS
satellites is about 10 m (33 feet). Depending
on the environment of the location, the
triangulating error can be greater. In this case,
your actual location may not match the location
on the map based on the GPS information.
Meanwhile, the GPS satellites are controlled
by the United States Department of Defense,
and the degree of accuracy may be changed
intentionally.
ˎˎError during the triangulating process
The camcorder acquires location information
periodically during triangulating.
On the restriction of use of GPS
Use GPS in accordance with the regulations of the
situation, the countries/regions of use.
On the geographic coordinate system
The “WGS-84” geographic coordinate system is
used.
11. Appendix
Specifications
General
170 (6 3/4)
Mass
Approx. 3.6 kg (7 lb 15 oz) (body only)
Dimensions
(Unit: mm (inch), excluding
protrusions, body only)1)
269 (10 5/8)
000
168
332 (13 1/8)
1) The values for dimensions are approximate.
Power requirements
12 V (11 V to 17.0 V) DC
Power consumption
Approx. 24 W (body only, when
recording in XAVC-I, with LCD
monitor on)
Approx. 26 W (CBK-VF02 viewfinder,
lens, microphone, when recording
in XAVC-I, with LCD monitor on)
[Notes]
ˎˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption of
50 W or greater.
ˎˎ When using a battery (BP-GL95B), do not allow the total
power consumption of connected peripherals to exceed
55 W.
ˎˎ When using the AC-DN10A, do not allow the total power
consumption of connected peripherals to exceed 50 W.
ˎˎ Connect only devices with current consumption of 1.8 A
or lower to the DC OUT connector.
Operating temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Storage temperature
–20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F)
File system
exFAT, UDF, FAT
Continuous operating time
Approx. 185 minutes (using BP-GL95B)
Recording format (video)
XAVC Intra
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
XAVC-I QFHD: VBR, 600 Mbps (max)
XAVC-I HD: CBG, 223 Mbps (max)
XAVC Long
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
XAVC-L QFHD: VBR, 150 Mbps (max)
XAVC-L 50: VBR, 50 Mbps (max)
XAVC-L 35: VBR, 35 Mbps (max)
XAVC-L 25: VBR, 25 Mbps (max)
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD42: CBR, 50 Mbps, MPEG-2
422P@HL
MPEG HD420 HQ: VBR, 35 Mbps (max),
MPEG-2 MP@HL
MPEG HD420 SP: CBR, 25 Mbps,
MPEG‑2 MP@H-14
MPEG IMX
CBR, 50 Mbps
DVCAM
CBR, 25 Mbps
XAVC Proxy
AVC/H.264 Main Profile 4:2:0 Long GOP
1920×1080: 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps
1280×720: 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps
640×360: 3 Mbps
480×270: 1 Mbps, 500 kbps (VBR)
Recording format (audio)
XAVC Intra
LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
XAVC Long
LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422: LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz,
4-channel
MPEG HD420 HQ: LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz,
4-channel
MPEG IMX
LPCM 16/24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
DVCAM
LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
XAVC Proxy
AAC-LC, 128 kbps, 2-channel
Recording/playback time
See “Media Recording and Playback Time”
(page 165).
Recording frame rate
XAVC Intra
XAVC-I QFHD
3840×2160/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
XAVC-I HD
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
1280×720/59.94P, 50P
XAVC Long
XAVC-L QFHD
3840×2160/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
XAVC-L 50
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
1280×720/59.94P, 50P
XAVC-L 35
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
XAVC-L 25
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
1280×720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
MPEG HD420 HQ
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
1440×1080/59.94i, 50i
1280×720/59.94P, 50P
MPEG HD420 SP
1440×1080/59.94i, 50i
MPEG IMX
720×486/59.94i
720×576/50i
DVCAM
720×480/59.94i
720×576/50i
XAVC Proxy
Main line 1920×1080: 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
Main line 1280×720: 59.94P, 50P,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
Input/Output Section
Inputs
GENLOCK IN:
BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
unbalanced
TC IN:
BNC type, 0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kilohms
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2:
XLR type, 3-pin, female
LINE / AES/EBU / MIC / MIC+48V
switchable
LINE: +4, 0, –3 dBu
AES/EBU: AES3 compliant
MIC: –70 dBu to –30 dBu
MIC IN:
XLR type, 5-pin, female, –70 dBu to
–30 dBu
WRR:
D-sub 15-pin
Analog CH1: –40 dBu
Digital CH1/CH2: –40 dBFS
SDI IN:
SMPTE ST292-1/259 standard
compliant
4-channel audio
Outputs
VIDEO OUT:
BNC type, SD analog composite/HD-Y
switchable
000
169
11. Appendix: Specifications
SDI OUT 1/2/3/4:
BNC type, 0.8 Vp-p, unbalanced
(3G/1.5G/SD switchable)
SMPTE ST424/425, ST292-1/259
standard compliant
4-channel audio
AUDIO OUT:
XLR type, 5-pin, male, +4/0/–3 dBu
(balanced)
TC OUT:
BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 50 ohms
EARPHONE (stereo, minijack):
–11 dBu (reference level output,
maximum monitor volume,
16‑ohm load)
HDMI:
Type A, 19-pin
Other
DC IN:
DC OUT:
XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 V to 17 V DC
Round type 4-pin, 11 V to 17 V DC,
1.8 A maximum rated current
LENS:
12-pin, lens power source (11 V to 17 V
DC, 1.0 A maximum rated current)
REMOTE: 8-pin
LIGHT:
2-pin
USB:
4-pin (type A) (2), 4-pin (type B)
VF:
Square type 26-pin (for CBK-VF02),
round type 20-pin (for HDVF series)
Network connector:
RJ45 type, 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u),
10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3)
Camera Section
Imaging element
2/3-inch type, “Exmor R” CMOS image
sensor
3840 (H) × 2160 (V)
ND filters 1: Clear
2: 1/4 ND
3: 1/16 ND
4: 1/64 ND
Sensitivity F10 (system frequency: 59.94i) (Typical)
(2000 lx, 89.9% reflectance, 3200K)
Minimum illumination
0.019 lx (F1.4, +42 dB, 16-frame
accumulation)
Image S/N ratio
61 dB (Noise Suppression On,
1920×1080 59.94i) (Typical)
Horizontal resolution
1000 TVL (TV lines) or higher
(1920×1080 59.94i)
Black level 3 ± 1% (Black set to [±0] in the setup
menu)
Shutter speed
59.94i/P, 50i/P: 1/60 to 1/2000 sec.
29.97P: 1/40 to 1/2000 sec.
25P: 1/33 to 1/2000 sec.
23.94P: 1/32 to 1/2000 sec.
Slow shutter
2 to 8, 16 frames
Dynamic range
600% (SDR mode)
1300% (HDR mode)
Display Section
Macro
ON/OFF selectable
LCD monitor
Screen size
8.8 cm (3.5 inch) diagonal
Aspect ratio
16:9
Number of pixels
960 (H) × 540 (V)
Supplied Accessories
SxS card slots
Form factor: Express Card/34
Number of slots: 2
Connector: PCMCIA Express Card
compliant
Write rate: 50 Mbps or higher
Read rate: 50 Mbps or higher
SD card slots
Proxy (1), Utility (1)
Shoulder belt (1)
Cold shoe kit (1)
Lens mount cap
USB wireless LAN module (IFU-WLM3)
Protective cap (1)
Guard (1)
Before Using This Unit (1)
Operating Instructions (CD-ROM) (1)
Viewfinder operating instructions (CD-ROM
supplied with PXW-Z450KC) (1)
Lens (supplied with PXW-Z450KC) (1)
Flange focal length (flange back) adjustment chart
(1)
Stereo microphone (supplied with PXW-Z450KC)
(1)
Viewfinder (supplied with PXW-Z450KC) (1)
Stereo microphone windscreen (supplied with
PXW-Z450KC) (1)
Lens Section (PXW-Z450KC)
Related Equipment
Media Section
Audio Section
Sampling frequency
48 kHz
Quantization
16/24-bit
Headroom
20 dB (factory default) (20, 18, 16,
12 dB), EBUL
Frequency response
20 Hz to 20 kHz (±3 dB or less)
Dynamic range
90 dB (typical)
Distortion 0.08% or lower (–40 dBu input level)
Built-in speaker
Monaural, 300 mW output
Focal length
7.6 mm to 137 mm
Zoom
Power/Manual switchable
Zoom ratio 18×
Maximum aperture ratio
1:1.8
Iris
Auto/Manual switchable
F1.8 to F16, and C (closed)
Focus range
560 mm to ∞ (macro OFF)
10 mm to ∞ (macro ON)
Filter diameter
M82 mm, 0.75 mm pitch (inside hood)
Upgrade license
CBKZ-Z450QL (QUAD-LINK 3G-SDI Upgrade
License)
Power supply and related equipment
AC adaptor
AC-DN10A
Battery pack
BP-GL95B
Battery charger
BC-L70A
000
170
11. Appendix: Specifications
Lens, viewfinder and related equipment
Lens
2/3-inch bayonet mount lens only
Viewfinder HDVF-20A/L750/EL20/EL30
Viewfinder rotation bracket
BKW-401
Equipment for remote control
Remote control unit
RM-B170
RCP-1000/1500/1530
RCP-1001/1501
[Note]
Command network unit (CNU) is not supported.
HD camera adaptor
CA-FB70/TX70
[Note]
Digital wireless receiver
DWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D
UHF synthesized tuner unit
URX-S03D
Other peripheral devices
Tripod attachment
VCT-14/U14
Video light
UC-D200A (Nippon Video System NIPROS)
Ultralight (Anton Bauer)
Pad
CBK-SP01 soft-type shoulder pad
Wireless LAN adaptor
CBK-WA02
Network adaptor kit
CBK-NA1
USB adaptor
CBK-DL1
If SDI OUT2 is used when the CA-FB70 is attached, use an
L-shaped adaptor.
Products for maintenance, ease of use/handling
Media adaptor
Attachment bracket
A-2092-367-
MEAD-SD02 (for SD cards)
XQD ExpressCard adaptor
QDA-EX1 (for XQD memory cards)
Recording media
SxS memory cards
SxS PRO X series
SxS PRO+ series
SxS PRO series
SxS-1 series
Audio equipment
Microphone
ECM-678/674/673/680S
Microphone holder
CAC-12
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Notes
ˎˎAlways make a test recording, and verify that it
was recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR
ITS RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE
SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE
SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
ˎˎAlways verify that the unit is operating
properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS
OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE
TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING THE
WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF
THE WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON
WHATSOEVER.
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS OF
ANY KIND MADE BY USERS OF THIS UNIT OR
MADE BY THIRD PARTIES.
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS,
REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF ANY DATA
RECORDED ON THE INTERNAL STORAGE
SYSTEM, RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR
STORAGE SYSTEMS.
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE
TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION OF ANY
SERVICES RELATED TO THIS UNIT THAT MAY
RESULT DUE TO CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY
KIND.
Software Downloads
When the unit is used with a PC connection,
download any device drivers, plug-ins, and
application software you require from the
following websites.
Sony Professional products website:
Japan https://www.sony.jp/professional/
All other countries
https://pro.sony/ (click [Change Country,
Region or Language] at the bottom of the
page and select the region and language)
Sony Creative Software, software download page:
http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/download/
software_for_sony_equipment
000
171
11. Appendix: Specifications
Chart of Peripheral Devices and Accessories
ECM-680S/678/674/673
Microphone
4K monitor/HD monitor/SD monitor
CAC-12
Microphone holder
CBK-VF02
Viewfinder
HDVF-20A/L750/EL20/EL30
Viewfinder
URX-S03D
UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
DWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D Digital Wireless
Receiver
SxS memory cards
SBS-32G1C, SBS-64G1C, SBS-128G1C, SBP-64E,
SBP-128E, SBP-256E, SBP-120F, SBP-240F
MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor
QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor
PXW-Z450
RM-B170
RCP-1000/1500/1530
RCP-1001/1501
Remote Control Unit
CA-FB70 HD Camera Adaptor
CA-TX70 HD Camera Adaptor
VCT-14
Tripod attachment
MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio License
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT
DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC
STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC
VIDEO.
IMPORTANT:
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE CONTAINED IN THE
CAMCORDER, PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”) CAREFULLY. BY USING THE SOFTWARE
YOU ARE ACCEPTING THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO
NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA, YOU MAY NOT USE
THE SOFTWARE.
This EULA is a legal agreement between you and Sony
Corporation (“SONY”). This EULA governs your rights
and obligations regarding the software of SONY and/or
its third party licensors (including SONY’s affiliates) and
their respective affiliates (collectively, the “THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS”) contained in the camcorder, together with any
updates/ upgrades provided by SONY, any printed, on-line or
other electronic documentation for such software, and any
data files created by operation of such software (collectively,
the “SOFTWARE”).
Notwithstanding the foregoing, any software in the
SOFTWARE having a separate end user license agreement
(including, but not limited to, GNU General Public license
and Lesser/Library General Public License) shall be covered
by such applicable separate end user license agreement
in lieu of the terms of this EULA to the extent required by
such separate end user license agreement (“EXCLUDED
SOFTWARE”).
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The SOFTWARE is
protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws
and international treaties.
BP-GL95B
Battery Pack
AC-DN10A
AC Adaptor
BC-L70A
Battery Charger
COPYRIGHT
All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE (including, but not
limited to, any images, photographs, animation, video, audio,
music, text and “applets” incorporated into the SOFTWARE)
is owned by SONY or one or more of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS.
GRANT OF LICENSE
SONY grants you a limited license to use the SOFTWARE
solely in connection with the camcorder and only for your
individual use. SONY and the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS
expressly reserve all rights, title and interest (including, but
not limited to, all intellectual property rights) in and to the
SOFTWARE that this EULA does not specifically grant to you.
000
172
11. Appendix: Specifications
REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
You may not copy, publish, adapt, redistribute, attempt to
derive source code, modify, reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble any of the SOFTWARE, whether in whole or in
part, or create any derivative works from or of the SOFTWARE
unless such derivative works are intentionally facilitated by
the SOFTWARE. You may not modify or tamper with any
digital rights management functionality of the SOFTWARE.
You may not bypass, modify, defeat or circumvent any
of the functions or protections of the SOFTWARE or any
mechanisms operatively linked to the SOFTWARE. You may
not separate any individual component of the SOFTWARE
for use on more than one camcorder unless expressly
authorized to do so by SONY. You may not remove, alter,
cover or deface any trademarks or notices on the SOFTWARE.
You may not share, distribute, rent, lease, sublicense, assign,
transfer or sell the SOFTWARE. The software, network
services or other products other than SOFTWARE upon
which the SOFTWARE’S performance depends might be
interrupted or discontinued at the discretion of the suppliers
(software suppliers, service suppliers, or SONY). SONY
and such suppliers do not warrant that the SOFTWARE,
network services, contents or other products will continue
to be available, or will operate without interruption or
modification.
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE AND OPEN SOURCE
COMPONENTS
Notwithstanding the foregoing limited license grant, you
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE may include EXCLUDED
SOFTWARE. Certain EXCLUDED SOFTWARE may be
covered by open source software licenses (“Open Source
Components”), which means any software licenses approved
as open source licenses by the Open Source Initiative or any
substantially similar licenses, including but not limited to any
license that, as a condition of distribution of the software
licensed under such license, requires that the distributor
make the software available in source code format. If and
to the extent disclosure is required, please visit www.sony.
com/linux or other SONY-designated web site for a list of
applicable OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS included in the
SOFTWARE from time to time, and the applicable terms and
conditions governing its use. Such terms and conditions
may be changed by the applicable third party at any time
without liability to you. To the extent required by the licenses
covering EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, the terms of such licenses
will apply in lieu of the terms of this EULA. To the extent the
terms of the licenses applicable to EXCLUDED SOFTWARE
prohibit any of the restrictions in this EULA with respect to
such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, such restrictions will not apply
to such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. To the extent the terms of
the licenses applicable to Open Source Components require
SONY to make an offer to provide source code in connection
with the SOFTWARE, such offer is hereby made.
of the SOFTWARE to a prohibited country or otherwise in
violation of any such restrictions or regulations.
USE OF SOFTWARE WITH COPYRIGHTED
MATERIALS
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES
The SOFTWARE may be capable of being used by you to
view, store, process and/or use content created by you and/
or third parties. Such content may be protected by copyright,
other intellectual property laws, and/or agreements. You
agree to use the SOFTWARE only in compliance with all
such laws and agreements that apply to such content. You
acknowledge and agree that SONY may take appropriate
measures to protect the copyright of content stored,
processed or used by the SOFTWARE. Such measures
include, but are not limited to, counting the frequency of
your backup and restoration through certain SOFTWARE
features, refusal to accept your request to enable restoration
of data, and termination of this EULA in the event of your
illegitimate use of the SOFTWARE.
CONTENT SERVICE
PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY BE DESIGNED
TO BE USED WITH CONTENT AVAILABLE THROUGH ONE OR
MORE CONTENT SERVICES (“CONTENT SERVICE”). USE OF
THE SERVICE AND THAT CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS
OF SERVICE OF THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF YOU DECLINE
TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS, YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
WILL BE LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that certain
content and services available through the SOFTWARE
may be provided by third parties over which SONY has
no control. USE OF THE CONTENT SERVICE REQUIRES AN
INTERNET CONNECTION. THE CONTENT SERVICE MAY BE
DISCONTINUED AT ANY TIME.
INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND THIRD PARTY
SERVICES
You acknowledge and agree that access to certain
SOFTWARE features may require an Internet connection
for which you are solely responsible. Further, you are solely
responsible for payment of any third party fees associated
with your Internet connection, including but not limited
to Internet service provider or airtime charges. Operation
of the SOFTWARE may be limited or restricted depending
on the capabilities, bandwidth or technical limitations of
your Internet connection and service. The provision, quality
and security of such Internet connectivity are the sole
responsibility of the third party providing such service.
EXPORT AND OTHER REGULATIONS
You agree to comply with all applicable export and re-export
restrictions and regulations of the area or country in which
you reside, and not to transfer, or authorize the transfer,
The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is not designed,
manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control
equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe
performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities,
aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic
control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems,
in which the failure of the SOFTWARE could lead to death,
personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage
(“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). SONY, each of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS, and each of their respective affiliates specifically
disclaim any express or implied warranty, duty or condition
of fitness for HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE
You acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is
at your sole risk and that you are responsible for use of the
SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS,” without
warranty, duty or condition of any kind.
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for
purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRDPARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as
“SONY”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, DUTIES
OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SONY DOES NOT WARRANT OR
MAKE ANY CONDITIONS OR REPRESENTATIONS (A) THAT
THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN ANY OF THE SOFTWARE
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL
BE UPDATED, (B) THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY OF THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECT OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY
DEFECTS WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT THE SOFTWARE
WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE
OR DATA, (D) THAT ANY SOFTWARE, NETWORK SERVICES
(INCLUDING THE INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS (OTHER
THAN THE SOFTWARE) UPON WHICH THE SOFTWARE’S
PERFORMANCE DEPENDS WILL CONTINUE TO BE AVAILABLE,
UNINTERRUPTED OR UNMODIFIED, AND (E) REGARDING
THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE
IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR
OTHERWISE.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN
BY SONY OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR CONDITION OR
IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY.
SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME
THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THESE
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for
purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as “SONY”) SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY RELATED
TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE
OR ANY ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, DOWN TIME AND USER’S
TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF THEM HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, EACH AND
ALL OF THEIR AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION
OF THIS EULA SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. SOME JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
CONSENT TO USE OF NON-PERSONAL
INFORMATION, LOCATION DATA, DATA SECURITY
You acknowledge and agree that SONY and its affiliates,
partners and agents may read, collect, transfer, process and
store certain information collected from the SOFTWARE,
including but not limited to information about (i) the
SOFTWARE and (ii) the software applications, contents and
peripheral devices that interact with your camcorder and the
SOFTWARE (“Information”). Information includes, but is not
limited to: (1) unique identifiers relating to your camcorder
and its components; (2) performance of the camcorder, the
SOFTWARE and their components; (3) configurations of your
camcorder, the SOFTWARE and the software applications,
contents and peripheral devices that interact with the
camcorder and the SOFTWARE; (4) use and frequency of use
of the functions of (x) the SOFTWARE, and (y) the software
applications, contents and peripheral devices that interact
with the SOFTWARE; and (5) location data, as indicated
below. SONY and its affiliates, partners and agents may use
and disclose Information subject to applicable laws in order
to improve its products and services or to provide products
or services to you. Such uses include, but are not limited
to: (a) administering the functionalities of the SOFTWARE;
(b) to improve, service, update or upgrade the SOFTWARE;
(c) improving, developing and enhancing the current and
future products and services of SONY and other parties; (d)
to provide you with information about the products and
services offered by SONY and other parties; (e) complying
000
173
11. Appendix: Specifications
with applicable laws or regulations; and (f) to the extent
offered, providing you with location-based services of SONY
and other parties, as indicated below. In addition, SONY
retains the right to use Information to protect itself and third
parties from illegal, criminal or harmful conduct.
upon your complete installation or acceptance of such
update or modifications. Any updates/modifications shall be
deemed to be, and shall constitute part of, the SOFTWARE
for purposes of this EULA. By acceptance of this EULA, you
consent to such update/ modification.
Certain services available through the SOFTWARE may rely
upon location information, including, but not limited to, the
geographic location of the camcorder. You acknowledge
that for the purpose of providing such services, SONY,
the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS or their partners may collect,
archive, process and use such location data, and that such
services are governed by the privacy policies of SONY or
such third party. By using any such services, you agree that
you have reviewed the privacy policies applicable to such
services and consent to such activities.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER, SEVERABILITY
SONY, its affiliates, partners and agents will not intentionally
use Information to personally identify the owner or user of
the SOFTWARE without your knowledge or consent. Any use
of Information will be in accordance with the privacy policies
of SONY or such third party. Please contact applicable
contact address of each area or country for SONY’s current
privacy policy.
Please contact applicable third parties for privacy policies
relating to personally identifiable and other information
you provide when you use or access third party software or
services.
Information may be processed, stored or transferred to
SONY, its affiliates or agents which are located in countries
outside of your country of residence. Data protection and
information privacy laws in certain countries may not offer
the same level of protection as your country of residence and
you may have fewer legal rights in relation to Information
processed and stored in, or transferred to, such countries.
SONY will use reasonable efforts to take appropriate
technical and organizational steps to prevent unauthorized
access to or disclosure of Information, but does not warrant it
will eliminate all risk of misuse of such Information.
AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE
From time to time, SONY or the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS may
automatically update or otherwise modify the SOFTWARE,
including, but not limited to, for purposes of enhancement
of security functions, error correction and improvement of
functions, at such time as you interact with SONY’s or third
parties’ servers, or otherwise. Such updates or modifications
may delete or change the nature of features or other
aspects of the SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to,
functions you may rely upon. You acknowledge and agree
that such activities may occur at SONY’s sole discretion and
that SONY may condition continued use of the SOFTWARE
This EULA and SONY’s privacy policy, each as amended and
modified from time to time, together constitute the entire
agreement between you and SONY with respect to the
SOFTWARE. The failure of SONY to exercise or enforce any
right or provision of this EULA shall not constitute a waiver of
such right or provision. If any part of this EULA is held invalid,
illegal, or unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to
the maximum extent permissible so as to maintain the intent
of this EULA, and the other parts will remain in full force and
effect.
AMENDMENT
SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND ANY OF THE TERMS
OF THIS EULA AT ITS SOLE DISCRETION BY POSTING NOTICE
ON A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY EMAIL NOTIFICATION
TO AN EMAIL ADDRESS PROVIDED BY YOU, BY PROVIDING
NOTICE AS PART OF THE PROCESS IN WHICH YOU OBTAIN
UPGRADES/ UPDATES OR BY ANY OTHER LEGALLY
RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF NOTICE. If you do not agree to
the amendment, you should promptly contact SONY for
instructions. Your continued use of the SOFTWARE after
the effective date of any such notice shall be deemed your
agreement to be bound by such amendment.
THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES
Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express intended thirdparty beneficiary of, and shall have the right to enforce, each
provision of this EULA with respect to the SOFTWARE of such
party.
GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION
The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this EULA.
This EULA shall be governed by the laws of Japan, without
regards to conflict of laws provisions. Any dispute arising out
of this EULA shall be subject to the exclusive venue of the
Tokyo District Court in Japan, and the parties hereby consent
to the venue and jurisdiction of such courts.
EQUITABLE REMEDIES
Notwithstanding anything contained in this EULA to the
contrary, you acknowledge and agree that any violation
of or non-compliance with this EULA by you will cause
irreparable harm to SONY, for which monetary damages
would be inadequate, and you consent to SONY obtaining
any injunctive or equitable relief that SONY deems necessary
or appropriate in such circumstances. SONY may also take
any legal and technical remedies to prevent violation of
and/or to enforce this EULA, including, but not limited to,
immediate termination of your use of the SOFTWARE, if
SONY believes in its sole discretion that you are violating or
intend to violate this EULA. These remedies are in addition
to any other remedies SONY may have at law, in equity or
under contract.
TERMINATION
Without prejudice to any of its other rights, SONY may
terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with any of its terms.
In case of such termination, you must: (i) cease all use, and
destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE; (ii) comply with the
requirements in the section below entitled “Your Account
Responsibilities”.
Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, you
may contact SONY by writing to SONY at applicable contact
address of each area or country.
Copyright © 2012 Sony Corporation.
Open Software Licenses
On the basis of license contracts between Sony
and the software copyright holders, this product
uses open software.
To meet the requirements of the software
copyright holders, Sony is obligated to inform you
of the content of these licenses.
For the content of these licenses, see “License1.
pdf” in the “License” folder of the supplied
CD‑ROM.
000
174
11. Appendix: Specifications
Trademarks
ˎˎXDCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
are registered trademarks of
ˎˎXAVC and
Sony Corporation.
ˎˎXQD is a registered trademark of Sony
Corporation.
ˎˎAndroid and Google Chrome are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Google, Inc.
ˎˎMicrosoft and Windows are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
ˎˎApple, Macintosh, Safari, and iPhone and their
logos are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Apple Inc. registered in the US and other
countries.
ˎˎThe terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States
and other countries.
ˎˎWi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi
Alliance.
ˎˎThe N-Mark is a trademark or registered
trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United
States and in other countries.
ˎˎQR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
ˎˎAll system names and product names are
registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective owners. Trademarked items are not
indicated by ® or ™ symbols in this document.
">